Adobe InCopy In Copy CC (2015) Help 2015 En

User Manual: adobe InCopy - CC (2015) - Help Free User Guide for Adobe InCopy Software, Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 393

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Adobe® InCopy® CC Help

Legal notices

Legal notices
For legal notices, see http://help.adobe.com/en_US/legalnotices/index.html.

Last updated 6/13/2015

iii

Contents
Chapter 1: What’s new
Usability and productivity

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

Text changes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

Collaboration

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

Chapter 2: Creative Cloud
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Browse, sync, and manage assets

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Add fonts from Typekit

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Creative Cloud Market

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Creative Cloud Extract

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Creative Cloud Libraries

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Share files and folders

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Collaborate on folders and libraries
Launch Creative Cloud apps

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Manage your Creative Cloud for teams membership

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Chapter 3: Workspace
Workspace basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Viewing stories

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Recovery and undo

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Moving through documents

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Customizing preferences and defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Chapter 4: InCopy documents
Using an InCopy workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Transforming graphics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Stand-alone documents
Saving and exporting
Importing graphics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Including metadata in a story

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Controlling graphics display

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Frame grids

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Frames, grids, rulers, and guides

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Chapter 5: InCopy and InDesign
Sharing content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Working with managed files

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Understanding a basic managed-file workflow
Adjusting your workflow
Assignment packages

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Last updated 6/13/2015

INCOPY
Contents

Chapter 6: Text
Using the thesaurus

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Using text macros

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Using editorial notes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Tracking and reviewing changes
Text variables

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Hyperlinks

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Adding text

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Checking spelling

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Cross-references

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Copyfitting text

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Editing text

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Find/Change
Footnotes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Glyphs and special characters
Chapter 7: Styles
Working with styles

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Paragraph and character styles
Drop caps and nested styles

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Chapter 8: Typography
Bullets and numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Formatting CJK characters
Using fonts

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Text composition

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Tabs and indents

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Leading

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Kerning and tracking
Aligning text

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Composing CJK characters

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Changing spacing between characters in CJK text

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Formatting characters

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Formatting paragraphs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Formatting text

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Chapter 9: Tables
Selecting and editing tables
Table and cell styles

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Table strokes and fills
Creating tables
Formatting tables

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Chapter 10: Printing
Setting up a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Printing stories

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Last updated 6/13/2015

INCOPY
Contents

Chapter 11: PDF
Understanding Adobe PDF
Exporting to Adobe PDF
Chapter 12: XML
Working with XML
Using XML files

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Tagging content for XML

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Structuring documents for XML
Exporting to XML

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Chapter 13: Keyboard shortcuts
Default keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Chapter 14: System requirements
System requirements for Incopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Last updated 6/13/2015

Chapter 1: What’s new

Usability and productivity
Enhanced layers
The Layers panel in InCopy gives you more control over your documents. You can hide or lock individual page items
in a layer. See Use layers.
Save performance improvements
Close documents and save changes to multiple stories faster than before due to multithreading implementation. Use
the Background Tasks panel (Window > Utilities > Background Tasks) to view the progress of ongoing processes.
Tool Hints panel
The Tool Hints panel lists all the hidden modifier key behaviors available for the currently selected tool. See View tool
hints.
Community Help
Adobe Community Help offers access to complete Adobe product documentation as well as to community-created
learning content and other learning content on Adobe.com. Adobe Community Help includes an AIR-based viewer
that displays the latest online Help or defaults to a local version of Help when a web connection is unavailable.
Community Help also includes expert-moderated comments and user ratings on Adobe documentation,
knowledgebase articles, tutorials, and other content.
Edit Original for multiple selected items
If you select multiple placed images on your page or in the Links panel, you can choose the Edit Original command to
open the images in their respective editing applications. See Edit original artwork.
Miscellaneous enhancements
Zoom from dialog boxes You can now use the keyboard shortcuts to zoom in and out of your document when you have
a modal dialog box open in Layout view. Press Ctrl+- or Ctrl+= (Windows) or Command+- or Command +=.
Sticky Preview check boxes InCopy now remembers whether the Preview checkbox is selected in a dialog box after you

exit and restart.
Collate option The Print dialog box includes a Collate option that helps you avoid manually sorting the printout.
New default font The default font is changed from Times (Mac) and Times New Roman (Windows) to the
crossplatform OpenType version of Minion Pro Regular.
Collapse multiple links to same source In InCopy CS5, links to images placed multiple times in a document are

collapsed into a single row in the Links panel. You can now turn off this collapsing behavior with a new option in the
Panel Options dialog box.
Menu commands changed or moved The following menu commands have new locations.

Last updated 6/13/2015

2
What’s new

Tip: Choose Window > Workspace > [New in CS5] to highlight menu commands of new and enhanced features.

InCopy CS4 command

InCopy CS5 command

View > Show/Hide Frame Edges, Show/Hide Assigned Frames,
Show/Hide Hyperlinks

View > Extras > Show/Hide Frame Edges, Show/Hide Assigned Frames,
Show/Hide Hyperlinks

Window > Type & Tables > Cell Styles / Character Styles / Paragraph
Styles > Table Styles

Window > Styles > Cell Styles / Character Styles / Paragraph Styles /
Table Styles

Window > Tags

Window > Utilities > Tags

Window > Scripts

Window > Utilities > Scripts

Text changes
New Eyedropper tool
Use the Eyedropper tool to copy text formatting from one text selection and apply that formatting to different text.
Customize which attributes to apply in the Eyedropper Tool Options dialog box. See Copy type attributes (Eyedropper).
Paragraphs that span columns
In InCopy CS5, you can make a paragraph span multiple columns. You can also split a paragraph into multiple columns
within the same text frame. See Create paragraphs that span or split columns.
Caption variables
In InDesign CS5, you can generate captions based on image metadata using a number of methods. Live captions use a
new text variable called Metadata Caption. You can create or edit caption text variables for use in InDesign. See Define
caption variables.

Collaboration
Track change feature enhancements
The Track Changes feature is now available in both InCopy CS5 and InDesign CS5. In InCopy, the Track Changes
toolbar includes icons that are more intuitive. The Changes menu includes additional options for accepting and
rejecting changes in either the current story or in all stories. You can also accept and reject changes from individual
participants. See Tracking and reviewing changes .
Mini Bridge
Mini Bridge is a subset of Adobe Bridge that is available as a panel within InCopy. See previews of files on your local
hard drive or server without launching Adobe Bridge and leaving InCopy. Drag and drop files into editable frames or
open files directly in InCopy in fewer steps and in less time.
Improved Adobe Bridge integration
A new File Handling preference option lets you generate page thumbnails for more than the first page of InCopy files.
The default number of pages to generate thumbnails for is set to 2, but you can change it to 1, 2, 5, 10, or All. You can
now see previews of pages in the Preview pane of Bridge. Choosing more thumbnail pages may cause your InCopy
document to take longer to save.

Last updated 6/13/2015

3
What’s new

See Using Adobe Bridge with InCopy.
Document installed fonts
In InDesign CS5, if you choose to include the document fonts when using the Package command, InDesign generates
a folder named “Document Fonts.” If you open an InDesign or InCopy file located in the same parent folder that this
Document Fonts folder is located in, these fonts are automatically installed for you. See Document installed fonts.
Buzzword integration
Buzzword is a web-based text editor that lets users create and store text files on a web server. In InCopy CS5, you can
import and export text from Buzzword documents. See Import Buzzword documentsand Export content to Buzzword.

Last updated 6/13/2015

6
Creative Cloud

Chapter 2: Creative Cloud
Adobe® Creative Cloud™ allows you to download, install, and update apps. You can also sync files and fonts, and
showcase and discover creative work on Behance.

Download and install apps
Download, install, and update your Creative Cloud apps. Discover new Creative Cloud apps and install them on your
computer. You can browse apps by popularity and design segments.
Creative Cloud desktop app is installed automatically when you download a product. If you already have Adobe
Application Manager installed, it auto-updates itself to the Creative Cloud desktop app. To download it manually, visit
the Creative Cloud desktop app page.
1 Access Adobe Creative Cloud from the Taskbar (Windows) or the Apple toolbar (Mac OS).

By default, Adobe Creative Cloud is launched when you log in to your computer.

2 Click the Apps panel. Recently installed apps on your computer appear at the top of the panel. The list may include

previously installed versions.

Last updated 6/13/2015

7
Creative Cloud

3 Scroll down to find additional apps. You can also filter by category to find apps that you need.

Last updated 6/13/2015

8
Creative Cloud

4 Click Install or Update.
5 To download and install a previous version of an app, select Previous Version, and then choose a version from the

Install menu.

For more information on installing CC or CS6 apps, see .
The apps, for example Photoshop, Illustrator, are downloaded and installed on your computer. You need to launch them
from your computer. For detailed instructions, see .

Sync files and folders
Sync files from your computer to Creative Cloud and access them from anywhere. Files are instantly available on all
your connected devices, computers, and on your Creative Cloud Files page. To sync files, download and install Creative
Cloud desktop app on all computers.

Last updated 6/13/2015

9
Creative Cloud

To sync files, do one of the following:

• Copy, paste, or move files to the Creative Cloud Files directory on your computer
• In an app, choose File > Save or File > Save As and navigate to the Creative Cloud Files directory on your computer.
The original files are always on your computer or device. Files are synced via Creative Cloud to all connected devices.
You can view your files online on the Creative Cloud Assets page. Once the files are synced, you don't need to be online
and you can view them from the Creative Cloud Files directory or folder on your computer.
For information to work with files uploaded on Creative Cloud, see .

Add fonts from Typekit
Choose a typeface from one of Typekit's many foundry partners and sync it to your desktop with Creative Cloud.
Synced fonts are available for use in all Creative Cloud apps and other desktop software.

Last updated 6/13/2015

10
Creative Cloud

You must have a paid Creative Cloud membership or an eligible Typekit account to sync fonts to your desktop
computer.
The Fonts panel displays fonts synced to your computer. To sync fonts, do the following:
1 In Creative Cloud desktop app, click the Fonts panel.
2 Click Add Fonts from Typekit. A Typekit window opens in your browser.
3 In the Typekit window, move your mouse over a font card and click + Use Fonts.
4 Select the fonts from the selected family and click Sync selected fonts.

Have questions about syncing fonts? Here’s a to cover everything step by step.

Search for assets on Adobe Stock
Adobe Stock is a service that sells millions of royalty-free high-quality photos, illustrations and graphics. You can
purchase Adobe Stock on an as-needed basis as a single image, illustration, or graphic; or you can purchase a multiimage subscription. There are a number of subscription packages available.
You can search for stock images from right within the Creative Cloud desktop app.

Last updated 6/13/2015

11
Creative Cloud

1 On the Stock tab, enter keywords for the stock image search and click Go.
2 If prompted, provide your date of birth and click Update. You are taken to an Adobe Stock website page that displays

stock images relevant to your search.

Last updated 6/13/2015

12
Creative Cloud

Adobe Stock and Creative Cloud Libraries

Once you've found a stock image of interest, you can add its watermarked preview to any of your libraries directly using
the Adobe Stock website. Then, in Creative Cloud apps that support Libraries—Photoshop, lllustrator, InDesign,
Premiere Pro, and After Effects—you can drag the watermarked stock image from the Libraries panel to your creative
project. When you're satisfied that the stock image is appropriate for your project, you can choose to license the stock
image directly from within the Libraries panel in the desktop app.
Creative Cloud apps that support library-linked smart objects—Photoshop, Illustrator, and InDesign—take this
integration a notch deeper. When you license the stock image, all linked instances of the stock image in your open
documents are automatically updated to the licensed, high-resolution stock image without the watermark.
For more information, see Using Adobe Stock .

Search for assets on Creative Cloud Market
Creative Cloud Market is a collection of high-quality, curated content for creatives by creatives. Creative Cloud
subscribers can access assets from Market for free on both desktop and mobile (via Creative Cloud connected apps),
choosing from an incredible selection of vector graphics, icons, patterns, UI kits, and more. Creative Cloud subscribers
can download up to 500 unique, royalty-free assets each month. This powerful new service will allow creatives to
seamlessly find assets to build upon, manipulate, and modify to jumpstart their creative process.

Last updated 6/13/2015

13
Creative Cloud

For more information, see .

Share and discover work on Behance
Showcase & discover creative work on Behance. As a member, you can create a portfolio of your work and broadcast it
widely and efficiently. Or, explore the latest creative work on a global scale by browsing featured or popular work across
fields.

• Login or sign up to access your Behance Activity Feed, Portfolio, and Share & Discover New Work. If you already
have an account, you'll be prompted to log in. If you don't have an account already, signup is quick and easy.
• Or, even without a Behance account, you can explore Featured Projects and Works-in-Progress from within the
panel.

Last updated 6/13/2015

14
Creative Cloud

For more information, see Share on Behance or visit the Adobe Behance Forum.

Home and activity feed
The Activity Stream on the Home panel contains your interactions with Creative Cloud. Events and activities, such as
new app availability, updates, and installation status are displayed here.

Last updated 6/13/2015

15
Creative Cloud

Preferences
Choose

> Preferences to open the Preferences screen.

• To sign out of the Creative Cloud desktop app, click General and then click Sign Out.
• Select the Show notifications setting.
• Select Always Keep Creative Cloud Desktop Up To Date to enable automatic updates.
• Enable Login to AEM Assets to connect to your AEM Assets repository. For more information, see Work with AEM
Assets .
• Select Creative Cloud and use the Apps tab to specify App Language and Install Location.
• Use the Files, Fonts, and Behance tabs to specify the respective settings.
• Specify the Show OS Notifications setting in each tab.

Need more help?
Ask the Community
Post, discuss and be part of our awesome community

More Help

• Release Notes | Creative Cloud desktop app
•
•
• Update apps to Creative Cloud 2015
• Creative Cloud 2015 OS support
• Troubleshoot installation and download
• Creative Cloud FAQ
• Adobe ID FAQ

Last updated 6/13/2015

16
Creative Cloud

Browse, sync, and manage assets
Your Adobe Creative Cloud account comes with online storage so that your files are available to you anywhere and on
any device or computer. You can preview many creative file types directly in a web browser on your computer, tablet,
or smartphone. These file types include: PSD, AI, INDD, JPG, PDF, GIF, PNG, Photoshop Touch, Ideas, and others.
Adobe Creative Cloud for desktop keeps all the files in sync. Any additions, modifications, or deletions are reflected on
all connected computers and devices. For example, if you upload an .ai file using the Creative Cloud Assets page, it is
automatically downloaded on all connected computers.

Browse assets
Your Creative Cloud assets include files synced with your desktop, assets created using Creative Cloud enabled mobile
apps, and Creative Cloud libraries. You can browse all of these assets using the Creative Cloud Assets page, which
organizes assets as follows:
Files shows assets synced with Creative Cloud Files directory on your desktop
Mobile Creations shows assets created using Creative Cloud enabled mobile apps
Libraries shows design libraries created by you

Note: While you can perform several operations such as rename, share, download, replace, and archive on desktop assets
(under Files), you can only view assets under Mobile Creations and Libraries, on the Creative Cloud Assets page.

When you click an asset category, it expands to show subcategories, if any. For example, assets under Files are further
organized as All, Shared, and Archived.

Last updated 6/13/2015

17
Creative Cloud

All: shows all files synced with Creative Cloud Files directory
Shared: shows files shared between you and other Creative Cloud users
Archived: shows deleted files
Similarly, you can browse assets created using Creative Cloud mobile apps under Mobile Creations, where the assets
are further categorized based on the creating mobile app.
For information about Libraries, see .

Sync or upload files
To sync files from your computer, do one of the following:

• Copy, paste, or move files to the Creative Cloud Files directory on your desktop.
• In an app, choose File > Save or File > Save As and navigate to the Creative Cloud Files directory.
To open the Creative Cloud Files directory from Creative Cloud desktop app, select Assets > Files and click Open Folder.

Last updated 6/13/2015

18
Creative Cloud

Note: Filenames that contain special characters such as |, ", ?, <, >, /, *, or : are not synced. Neither do files with reserved
names, such as AUX or Com1. If you receive an error, rename the file to sync it to Creative Cloud. For more information,
see Error: Unable to Sync Files .
Additionally, you can upload files directly to the Creative Cloud Assets page using any of the following methods.

Upload and manage your files on Creative Cloud using the Actions menu on the Creative Cloud Assets page.

Last updated 6/13/2015

19
Creative Cloud

Drag and drop assets from your desktop to the Creative Cloud Assets page.

Replace a file
Uploading the file again, creates a version of the file and replaces the existing file with a new one. Creative Cloud also
keeps a copy of every change you make to a file and sync through Photoshop Touch, Adobe Ideas, and the Creative
Cloud desktop app.
To replace a file, using the Creative Cloud Assets page, do the following:
1 Navigate to and open the file for viewing.
2 Select Actions > Replace or drag the file from the folder to the browser window.

Note: The new file must be the same file type as the file being replaced. For example, you can't replace a .PSD file with
a .AI file. For information on versioning, see Versioning FAQs .

Delete files
You can delete files from the Creative Cloud website or Adobe Touch Apps. You can also use the OS commands to delete
files from the Creative Cloud Files directory on your desktop. All file deletions are synced with your account, and files
are archived in Creative Cloud. The original files are always on your computer with a copy available on Creative Cloud
so that you can access it anywhere.

Last updated 6/13/2015

20
Creative Cloud

Archived files continue to occupy online storage. You can permanently delete or restore files from the Archive folder.
Permanently deleting the files frees up the storage quota.

Permanently delete or restore files
Deleting assets permanently is a two-step process:
1 Archive a file from your Creative Cloud Files directory on your desktop, Creative Cloud enabled touch apps, or the

Creative Cloud Assets page. Archived files move to the Archived category under My Assets > Files.
2 On the Archived page, select the files to delete permanently and click Permanently Delete.
3 In the confirmation dialog, click Permanently Delete.

You can also restore an archived file:
1 On the Archived page, select the files to restore and click Restore.
2 In the confirmation dialog, click Restore.

Storage plans and quota
The storage quota depends on your Creative Cloud membership.
Membership plan

Free storage quota

Free

2 GB

Creative Cloud (Photography)

2 GB

Creative Cloud (Single App and Complete)

20 GB

Creative Cloud for teams

100 GB

You can view your storage status from the Files tab under Assets panel of the Creative Cloud for desktop app or on the
Settings page of the Creative Cloud Activity page.

Last updated 6/13/2015

21
Creative Cloud

The Creative Cloud syncs up to 1 GB of overflow from any device. After that, the desktop app stops syncing new files
and notifies that you are over quota. A red exclamation point marks any files that are unable to upload. You can still
move, rename, or delete files. To continue to sync files, permanently delete other files to free up space.
Note: A small portion of storage is used for administrative purposes. Therefore, the actual storage space is slightly less than
allocated. It varies from 100 KB to 500 KB based on number of user files.

Troubleshooting
Ask the Community
Post, discuss, and be part of our awesome community

More Help topics
Find and change text

Last updated 6/13/2015

148
Text

Using text macros
Create a text macro
A textmacro is a shortcut for a sequence of keystrokes. A macro can be simple—it can type a word or phrase you use
often—or it can be complex, such as a formatted address. A macro code is the name of the text macro you create. For
example, instead of repeatedly typing “Centers for Disease Control and Prevention,” you can create a macro code (such
as “cdc”) that changes to the full name.
1 Choose Window > Text Macros.
2 If you want to create a text macro from existing text, select the text in the document.
3 Choose New Macro from the Text Macros panel menu, or click the New Macro button

in the Text Macros panel.

4 Enter a macro code in the Macro Code text box. Note that macro codes are case-sensitive.

The code appears in the Text Macros list.
5 For Macro Text, type the text string that you want entered when you activate the text macro.
6 To include text attributes from the existing text when inserting or swapping macro text, select Remember Text

Attributes.
By default, inserted or swapped macro text uses the style attributes of the destination paragraph.
7 To assign a keyboard shortcut for activating the macro, place the cursor in the Macro Key Shortcut text box, and

press the keys you want to use for the shortcut.
Shortcuts are especially useful if you turn off Automatically Swap Macro Text in the Text Macros panel.
If the keyboard shortcut you want to assign to the macro is already assigned to another function, the alert symbol
appears at the bottom of the dialog box with the message “Currently Assigned To: [function].” If you choose to assign
the keyboard shortcut to the macro, the previous keyboard shortcut function is overridden.
8 Click OK.

You can replace the macro code with macro text automatically while typing, by using a macro key shortcut, or by
choosing Swap Macro Text from the Text Macros panel menu.

Edit a text macro
1 From the list in the Text Macros panel, double-click the text macro you want to edit, or select it and click the Edit

Text Macro button

in the Text Macros panel.

2 Enter your changes in the text box, and click OK.

Duplicate a macro
Use the Duplicate Macro command to create a copy of an existing macro. The duplicate macro is assigned the same
code as the original, but with a number appended to it, and is listed immediately after the original macro in the Text
Macros panel. For example, duplicating the macro “DOT” creates a copy of the macro, named “DOT1.”
1 Select the text macro you want to duplicate from the list in the Text Macros panel.
2 Choose Duplicate Macro from the Text Macros panel menu.

Last updated 6/13/2015

149
Text

Delete a text macro
1 Select the text macro you want to delete from the Text Macros panel list.
2 Choose Delete Macro from the Text Macros panel menu.

Note: Once you delete a macro, you cannot undo the deletion.

Insert or swap macro text
You can insert macro text in three different ways: Using the Insert Macro Text command to insert macro text at the
insertion point, having macro text inserted automatically while typing, or swapping existing text with macro text.

Insert macro text automatically
If Automatically Swap Macro Text is selected, macro codes are automatically converted to macro text while you type.
For example, if you created a macro code named “cdc,” when you type cdc followed by a word-ending character such a
space or period, Center for Disease Control and Prevention appears. The macro code is case-sensitive.
1 Make sure that Automatically Swap Macro Text from the Text Macros panel menu is selected. (A check mark should

appear next to it.)
2 Type the macro code followed by a word-ending character (space, comma, period, or paragraph return).

If you want to restore the macro code text, choose Edit > Undo until the macro code reappears.

Insert macro text at the insertion point
The Insert Macro Text command places the selected macro text at the current text insertion point.
1 Using the Type tool

, click the location where you want to insert the macro text.

2 Do one of the following:

• Press the macro keyboard shortcut for the macro you want.
• Select the macro you want from the Text Macros panel, and choose Insert Macro Text from the panel menu, or
.
click the Insert Macro Text button

Swap text with macro text
The Swap Macro Text command searches the text immediately preceding the current text insertion point for any
defined macro code (case-sensitive) and, if one is found, removes the macro code and replaces it with the associated
macro text. For example, you have created a text macro for Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and the macro
code is CDC. To use the macro, type The CDC, and then with the text insertion point placed immediately following
the macro code, choose Swap Macro Text. InCopy then searches the text immediately preceding the insertion point and
replaces CDC with the macro text Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.
1 Using the Type tool

, click to the immediate right of the macro code that you want to replace, or select the text

you want to replace.
2 Choose Swap Macro Text from the Text Macros panel menu, or choose Edit > Swap Macro Text.

Note: The Swap Macro Text command does not continue to search the entire document for every occurrence of the macro
code. To find and replace all instances of a word or phrase, use the Find/Change command.

Last updated 6/13/2015

150
Text

Using editorial notes
About editorial notes
Editorial notes are brief comments or annotations for yourself or other contributors. In Galley and Story views, all notes
. In Layout
are displayed inline (within the text), and the content of the note is displayed between note bookends
view, each note is indicated by a note anchor . The content of the note is displayed in the Notes panel and can be colorcoded for each user.

Notes panel overview
The Notes panel contains the name of the note’s author, the date and time it was last modified, the story label, the page
number, the note number out of total notes, the number of characters and words, and the content of the note.

A User color B Show/Hide notes C Go to note anchor D Go to previous note E Go to next note F New note G Delete note

Note: Regardless of which view you are using, the content of the Notes panel appears the same.

Last updated 6/13/2015

151
Text

Open the Notes panel
❖ Do one of the following:

• Choose Window > Notes.
• In Layout view, choose Notes > New Note.

Use Notes Mode
Notes Mode is a convenient way to add, split, or delete notes, depending on where the insertion point is located or what
text is selected.
1 Do any of the following:

• To create a new note, place the insertion point in text.
• To convert text to a note, select the text.
• To split a note, place the insertion point inside a note.
• To convert the note to text, select the note bookends (in Galley view or Story view).
• To move the insertion point out of a note, place the insertion point at the beginning or end of the note.
2 Choose Notes > Notes Mode.

Add a note
1 Do either of the following:

• Using the Type tool
• Using the Note tool

, click where you want to place the note, and choose Notes > New Note.
, click where you want to place the note.

Adding a note in Layout view opens the Notes panel if it is not already open.
2 In Galley or Story view, type your note between the note bookends. In Layout view, type your note in the Notes

panel.
You can add as many notes as you want in any location. However, you cannot create a note within another note.
You can also add a note using Notes Mode.

Convert text to a note
1 Select the text that you want to move into a new note.
2 Choose Notes > Convert To Note.

A new note is created. The selected text is removed from the body of the story and pasted into the new note. The note
anchor or bookend is located where the text you selected was cut.
If you add notes to a linked InCopy story, they also appear in the story in InDesign, and can be edited in InDesign.
You can also convert text to a note using Notes Mode.
You can assign keyboard shortcuts to convert a word, line, paragraph, or story to a note. Choose Edit > Keyboard
Shortcuts, and then choose Notes Menu from the Product Area menu. Add a shortcut to the command, and then click
OK.

Last updated 6/13/2015

152
Text

Convert notes to text
1 Open the Notes panel.
2 Select the text in the Notes panel that you want to add to the text of the document. Or, in Galley view, select the text

in the inline note.
3 Choose Notes > Convert To Text.

You can also convert notes to text using Notes Mode.
Note: If you select only a portion of the note contents when you convert the contents to text, the original note will be divided
into two separate notes, and the portion of the note contents that is converted to text will appear between the two new notes.

Navigate between notes
When you navigate through notes, the active text insertion point moves from the current note anchor to the anchor of
to
the next or previous note. When navigating between notes in Layout view, click the Go to Note Anchor button
view the note anchor associated with the note displayed in the Notes panel.
1 Click anywhere within the contents of a story.
2 Do one of the following:

• Choose Notes > Previous Note or Notes > Next Note.
• Select Previous Note or Next Note from the Notes panel menu.
• Click the Go To Previous Note button or the Go To Next Note button in the Notes panel.
Note: In the Galley and Story views, you can use the Find/Change command to locate a note. The Notes section of the
Preferences dialog box contains a setting to include notes in Find/Change searches.

Split a note
1 In the Notes panel or in the note itself, place the insertion point where you want to split the note.

You cannot split a note if the insertion point is at the beginning or end of the note, or if the note is empty.
2 Do one of the following:

• Choose Notes > Split Note.
• Choose Split Note from the Notes panel menu. The active text insertion point is placed between the two split
notes.
You can also split a note using Notes Mode.

Expand or collapse notes
When expanded, the content of the note appears between the bookends. As you enter the content of the note, the
bookends move apart to accommodate the text. You can collapse the bookends to hide the content of the note.
1 Select the Type tool

, and then click the begin-note bookend

or the end-note bookend

2 If the insertion point is in a note container, choose Notes > Collapse Note.

To expand or collapse all notes in the active story, choose Notes > Expand/Collapse Notes In Story.

Last updated 6/13/2015

153
Text

Select and open a note in Layout view
A note anchor marks the location of a note in Layout view. The Notes panel displays the contents of the note, along
with specific information about the note.
1 Select the Type tool

or Note tool

2 Move the pointer over the note anchor until the pointer appears as a pointing hand.
3 Do one of the following:

• Click the note anchor.
• Choose Notes > Previous Note or Notes > Next Note.

Edit a note
• In Galley view or Story view, select the Type tool
to edit, and make your changes.
• In Layout View, select the Type tool
changes.

, and then click between the bookends of the note you want

, click the note anchor to open the note in the Notes panel, and make your

Check spelling or find/change text in notes
1 Select the Galley or Story view tab.
2 Expand the notes you want to spell-check or search. Choose Notes > Expand/Collapse Notes In Story to expand all

notes.
3 Choose Edit > Spelling > Check Spelling or Edit > Find/Change.

Note: If you choose Change All while spell-checking or finding text, text in collapsed notes is ignored in Galley View or Story
View, but all occurrences of the text are replaced in Layout View.

Move or duplicate notes
You can move or duplicate notes.

Move or duplicate notes in Galley and Story views
1 Shift+Alt-click (Windows) or Shift+Option-click (Mac OS) the start-note or end-note bookend to select the note.
2 Do one of the following:

• Drag the selected note to move it.
• Shift-drag the selected note to duplicate it.

Duplicate a note anchor in Layout view
❖ Do one of the following:

• Using the Type tool
different location.

, drag across the note anchor to highlight it, and then choose Edit > Copy. Paste it in a

• Using the Note tool or Type tool, hold down Shift, and drag the anchor to where you want to place it in the text.

Last updated 6/13/2015

154
Text

Delete notes
• To delete a single note, Shift+Alt-click (Windows) or Shift+Option-click (Mac OS) the start-note or end-note
bookend to select the note, and then choose Notes > Delete Note.
• To delete all notes in the active story, choose Notes > Remove Notes From Story.
• To delete all notes in the document, choose Notes > Remove All Notes.

Printing and exporting notes
When you print an InCopy document, you can print any notes that are included in the document at the same time. You
can also export notes from InCopy as PDF annotations. However, notes in tables are not exported as PDF annotations.

Specify note preferences
Preferences settings let you set the color for note anchors, bookends, and backgrounds when inline in the Galley and
Story views. You can also choose to display note info as a tool tip, as well as choose whether to include note content in
Find/Change operations and spell checking in the Galley and Story views.
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Notes (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Notes (Mac OS).
2 Select a color for note anchors and note bookends from the Note Color menu. Select [User Color] to use the color

specified in the User dialog box. This is especially useful if more than one person is working on the file.
3 Select Show Note Tool Tips to display note information and some or all of the note content as a tool tip when the

mouse pointer hovers over a note anchor in Layout view or a note bookend in Galley or Story view.
4 Specify whether you want to include inline note content when using the Find/Change and Spell Check commands

(in Galley and Story views only).
Note: In Layout view, you cannot use the Find/Change and Spell Check commands to search for the contents of notes,
regardless of the settings in the Preferences dialog box. However, Change All does edit the contents of notes.
5 Select either [None] or [Note Color] (the color you chose in step 2) to use for the background color of an inline note.
6 Click OK.

To show or hide notes, choose View > Show Notes or Hide Notes.

More Help topics
Keys for working with text
Printing
Exporting to Adobe PDF
Change the user name and color

Tracking and reviewing changes

Last updated 6/13/2015

155
Text

Track changes
A valuable feature is the ability to track changes made to a story by each contributor in the writing and editing process.
Whenever anyone adds, deletes, or moves text within an existing story, the change is marked in the Story Editor in
InDesign or the Galley and Story views in InCopy. You can then accept or reject the changes.
Use the Track Changes panel in InDesign or the Track Changes toolbar in InCopy to turn Track Changes on or off and
to show, hide, accept, or reject changes made by contributors.

A Change bars B Added text C Deleted text D Moved text (from) E Moved text (to)

Turn on change tracking
1 Choose Window > Editorial > Track Changes to open the Track Changes panel (InDesign), or choose Window >

Track Changes to open the Track Changes toolbar (InCopy).
2 With the insertion point in text, do any of the following:

• To enable change-tracking in only the current story, click the Enable Track Changes In Current Story icon

• (InDesign) To enable tracking in all stories, choose Enable Track Changes In All Stories from the Track Changes
panel menu.
• (InCopy) To enable tracking in all open stories in a multistory document, choose Changes > Enable Tracking In
All Stories.
3 Add, delete, or move text within the story as needed.

Note: When Track Changes is turned on, a track changes icon
and Story view.

appears at the right end of the Story bar in Galley view

How change tracking is displayed
When Track Changes is turned on, each change is marked by default as follows in Story Editor (InDesign) or in Galley
and Story views (InCopy):
The Track Changes section of the Preferences dialog box lets you choose a color to identify your changes. It also lets you
select which changes (adding, deleting, or moving text) you want tracked and the appearance of tracking.
Added text Highlighted.
Deleted text Highlighted and marked with a strikethrough.
Moved (cut-and-pasted) text Highlighted and marked with a strikethrough in its original location; highlighted and

boxed in the new location.

Last updated 6/13/2015

156
Text

Note: If you cut text from one document and paste it into another, it is displayed as deleted text in the document of its
original location and as added text in its new location.
Copied text Highlighted in the new location. The original text is unchanged.
Change bars A change bar is a vertical line that appears to the left of a line of text that has been changed. You can choose

whether to show or hide change bars as you work. You can also specify what color to use for displaying the change bars.

Show or hide changes
When changes are hidden, the text appears as it would with the change-tracking feature turned off. That is, added text
is visible, deleted text is invisible, and moved or pasted text appears where it has been inserted.
(InDesign) When change-tracking is turned on, editing is tracked regardless of whether you work in Story Editor or in
the document layout. You can view changes only in Story Editor, not in the layout.
(InCopy) When change-tracking is turned on, editing is tracked regardless of whether you work in Galley, Story, or
Layout view. You can view changes only in the Galley and Story views, not the Layout view.
❖ In the Track Changes panel (InDesign) or the Track Changes toolbar (InCopy), click the Show/Hide Changes button

Turn off change tracking
❖ With the insertion point in text, do any of the following:

• To disable change-tracking in only the current story, click the Disable Track Changes In Current Story icon

• (InDesign) To disable tracking in all stories, choose Disable Track Changes In All Stories from the Track Changes
panel menu.
• (InCopy) To disable tracking in all open stories in a multistory document, choose Changes > Disable Tracking
In All Stories.
Note: If you disable tracking, no further changes are tracked. Previously tracked changes are not affected.

View change information in the Track Changes panel
1 Choose Window > Track Changes.
2 Click the insertion point in a change. The Track Changes panel displays the date, time, and other change

information.

Accept and reject changes
When changes have been made to a story, whether by you or by others, the change-tracking feature enables you to
review all changes and decide whether to incorporate them into the story. You can accept or reject single changes, only
portions of a tracked change, or all changes at once.
When you accept a change, it becomes a normal part of the text flow and is no longer highlighted as a change. When
you reject a change, the text reverts to how it was before the change was made.
1 In Story Editor (InDesign) or Galley or Story view (InCopy), position the insertion point at the beginning of the

story.
2 In the Track Changes panel (InDesign) or the Track Changes toolbar (InCopy), click the Next Change button

3 Do any of the following:

• To accept the highlighted change and incorporate it into the text flow, click the Accept Change button

Last updated 6/13/2015

157
Text

• To reject the change and revert to the original text, click the Reject Change button
To accept or reject the highlighted change and go to the next change, Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac OS)
the Accept Change or Reject Change button.

• To move back to the previous change or skip over a change and go to the next one, click the Previous Change
or Next Change button
.
button
• To accept or reject all changes without reviewing, click the Accept All Changes In Story button
All Changes In Story button
.

or the Reject

• To accept or reject all changes in the story or in the document, or to accept or reject all changes by a certain
participant, choose the appropriate option from the Track Changes panel menu (InDesign) or from the Changes
menu (InCopy).
Note: If you change your mind about accepting or rejecting a change, you can undo the change by choosing Edit > Undo or
pressing Ctrl+Z (Windows) or Command+Z (Mac OS).
Choosing an Accept All Changes or Reject All Changes command also applies to hidden conditional text.

Set Track Changes preferences
Preference settings let you control many tracking options. You can choose a color to identify your changes and select
what changes you want tracked: adding, deleting, or moving text. You can also set the appearance of each type of
tracked change, and you can have changes identified with colored change bars in the margins.
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Track Changes (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Track Changes (Mac OS).
2 Select each type of change that you want to track.
3 For each type of change, specify the text color, background color, and marking method.
4 Select Prevent Duplicate User Colors to ensure that all users are assigned different colors.
5 To show change bars, select the Change Bars option. Choose a color from the Change Bar Color menu, and specify

whether you want change bars to appear in the left or right margin.
6 Select Include Deleted Text When Spellchecking if you want to spell-check text marked to be deleted.
7 Click OK.

Change the user name and color
1 Close all open stories.
2 Choose File > User.
3 Specify the user name and color to be used for change-tracking and notes, and then click OK.

More Help topics
Using editorial notes
Adding editorial notes in InDesign

Text variables

Last updated 6/13/2015

158
Text

Create and edit text variables
A text variable is an item you insert in your document that varies according to the context. For example, the Last Page
Number variable displays the page number of the last page of the document. If you add or remove pages, the variable
is updated accordingly.
InCopy includes several preset text variables that you can insert in your document. You can edit the format of these
variables, or you can create your own. Some variables, such as Running Header and Chapter Number, are especially
useful for adding to master pages to ensure consistent formatting and numbering. Other variables, such as Creation
Date and File Name, are useful for adding to the slug area for printing.
Note: Adding too much text to a variable may cause overset or compressed text. Variable text does not break across lines.

Create or edit text variables
The options available for creating the variable depend on the type of variable you specify. For example, if you choose
the Chapter Number type, you can specify text to appear both before and after the number, and you can specify the
numbering style. You can create several different variables based on the same variable type. For example, you can create
one variable that displays “Chapter 1” and another that displays “Ch. 1.”
Similarly, if you choose the Running Header type, you can specify which style is used as the basis for the header, and
you can select options for deleting end punctuation and changing the case.
1 If you want to create text variables for use in all new documents you create, close all documents. Otherwise, the text

variables you create appear only in the current document.
2 Choose Type > Text Variables > Define.
3 Click New, or select an existing variable and click Edit.
4 Type a name for the variable, such as “Full Chapter” or “Running Title.”
5 From the Type menu, choose a variable type, specify the options for that type, and then click OK.

Different options are available depending on the variable type you select.
Text Before / Text After For all variable types (except Custom Text), you can specify text that will be added before or
after the variable. For example, you can add the word “of ” before the Last Page Number variable and the phrase
“total pages” after the variable to create an “of 12 total pages” effect. You can also paste text into the boxes, but special
characters such as tabs and auto page numbers are stripped out. To insert special characters, click the triangle to the
right of the text box.
Style For all numbered variable types, you can specify the numbering style. If [Current Numbering Style] is
selected, the variable uses the same numbering style selected in the document’s Numbering & Section Options
dialog box.

Variable types
Chapter Number
A variable created with the Chapter Number type inserts the chapter number. You can insert text before or after the
chapter number, and you can specify a numbering style.
If the document’s chapter number is set to continue from the previous document in the book, you may need to update
the book’s numbering in order for the appropriate chapter number to appear.
Creation Date, Modification Date, and Output Date

Last updated 6/13/2015

159
Text

Creation Date inserts the date or time the document is first saved; Modification Date inserts the date or time the
document was last saved to disk; Output Date inserts the date or time the document starts a print job, exports to PDF,
or packages the document. You can insert text before and after the date, and you can modify the date format for all date
variables.
Date Format You can type date formats directly into the Date Format box, or you can choose format options by clicking

the triangle to the right of the box. For example, the date format “MM/dd/yy” displays as 12/22/07. By changing the
format to “MMM. d, yyyy” the date will display as Dec. 22, 2007.
Date variables use the language applied to text. For example, the creation date may appear in Spanish text as “01
diciembre 2007” and in German as “01 Dezember 2007.”
Abbreviation

Description

Example

Month number, no leading zero

Month number, leading zero

MMM

Abbreviated month name

Aug

MMMM

Full month name

August

Day number, no leading zero

Day number, leading zero

Weekday name, abbreviated

Fri

EEEE

Full weekday name

Friday

yy or YY

Year number, last two digits

y (Y) or yyyy (YYYY)

Full year number

2007

G or GGGG

Era, abbreviated or expanded

AD or Anno Domini

Hour, no leading zero

Hour, leading zero

Hour, no leading zero, 24-hour format

Hour, leading zero, 24-hour format

Minute, no leading zero

Minute leading zero

Second, no leading zero

Second, leading zero

AM or PM, two characters

z or zzzz

Time zone, abbreviated or expanded

PST or Pacific Standard Time

File Name
This variable inserts the name of the current file into the document. It’s commonly added to the slug area of the
document for printing or used in headers and footers. In addition to Text Before and Text After, you can choose the
following options.
Include Entire Folder Path Select to include the full folder path with the file name. The standard path conventions for

either Windows or Mac OS are used.

Last updated 6/13/2015

160
Text

Include File Extension Select to include the file name extension.

The File Name variable is updated whenever you save the file with a new name or to a new location. The path or
extension does not appear in the document until it’s saved.
Image Name
The Image Name variable is useful for generating automatic captions from metadata. The Image Name variable
includes a Metadata Caption variable type. If a text frame containing this variable is adjacent to or grouped with an
image, the variable displays the metadata of that image. You can edit the Image Name variable to determine which
metadata field is used.
See Define caption variables.
Last Page Number
The Last Page Number type is useful for adding the total number of pages in a document to headers and footers using
the common “Page 3 of 12” format. In this case, the number 12 is generated by the Last Page Number, and it’s updated
whenever pages are added or removed. You can insert text before or after the last page number, and you can specify a
numbering style. From the Scope menu, choose an option to determine whether the last page number in the section or
document is used.
Note that the Last Page Number variable does not count the pages in the document.
Running Header (Paragraph or Character Style)
The Running Header variables insert the first or last occurrence on the page of the text to which the specified style is
applied. If no text on the page is formatted with the specified style, the text from a previous page is used.
See Create variables for running headers and footers.
Custom Text
This variable is commonly used for inserting placeholder text, or a text string that may need to be changed quickly. For
example, if you’re working on a project that uses a code name for a company, you can create a custom text variable for
the code name. When you are able to use the real company name, you can simply change the variable to update all the
occurrences.
To insert special characters in a text variable, click the triangle to the right of the text box.

Insert text variables
1 Place the insertion point where you want the variable to appear.
2 Choose Type > Text Variables > Insert Variable, and then choose the variable you want to insert.

The variable appears on the page as if you’d typed it in the document. For example, the Creation Date variable might
appear as December 22, 2007. If you choose Type > Show Hidden Characters, the variable instance is surrounded by a
box using the current layer color.
Note: Text variables do not break across lines.

Delete, convert, and import text variables
Use the Text Variables dialog box to delete, convert, and import text variables.

Last updated 6/13/2015

161
Text

Delete text variables
If you want to delete an instance of a text variable inserted in a document, simply select the variable and press Backspace
or Delete. You can also delete the variable itself. When you do so, you can decide how to replace the variables inserted
in the document.
1 Choose Type > Text Variables > Define.
2 Select the variable, and then click Delete.
3 Specify how the variable will be replaced by specifying a different variable, converting the variable instances to text,

or deleting the variable instances altogether.

Convert text variables to text
• To convert a single instance, select the text variable in the document window, and then choose Type > Text Variables
> Convert Variable To Text.
• To convert all instances of the text variable in the document, choose Type > Text Variables > Define, select the
variable, and then click Convert To Text.

Import text variables from another document
1 Choose Type > Text Variables > Define.
2 Click Load, and then double-click the document that has the variables you want to import.
3 In the Load Text Variables dialog box, make sure that a check mark appears next to the variables you want to import.

If any existing variable has the same name as one of the imported variables, choose one of the following options
under Conflict With Existing Text Variable, and then click OK:
Use Incoming Definition Overwrites the existing variable with the loaded variable and applies its new attributes to

all text in the current document that used the old variable. The definitions of the incoming and existing variables
are displayed at the bottom of the Load Text Variables dialog box so that you can view a comparison.
Auto-Rename Renames the loaded variable.

4 Choose OK, and then click Done.

You can also copy variables to other documents when you synchronize a book file.

Create variables for running headers and footers
By default, the Running Header variables insert the first occurrence (on the page) of the text to which the specified style
is applied. Running Header variables are especially useful for displaying the current heading or title in the header or
footer.
1 If your content is not already formatted, create and apply the paragraph style or character style for the text you want

to appear in the header (such as a title or heading style).
2 Choose Type > Text Variables > Define.
3 Click New, and then type a name for the variable.
4 From the Type menu, choose Running Header (Paragraph Style) or Running Header (Character Style).
5 Specify the following options:
Style Choose the style to display in your header or footer.

Last updated 6/13/2015

162
Text

Use Decide whether you want the first or last occurrence of the style that’s applied on the page. First On Page is the
first paragraph (or character) that begins on a page. If there is no occurrence of the style on the page, the previous
occurrence of the applied style is used. If there is no previous occurrence in the document, the variable is empty.
Delete End Punctuation If selected, the variable displays the text minus any end punctuation (periods, colons,

exclamation points, and question marks).
Change Case Select this option to change the case of the text that appears in the header or footer. For example, you

may want to use sentence case in your footer, even though the heading on the page appears in title case.
6 Click OK, and then click Done in the Text Variables dialog box.

You can now insert the variable in a header or footer you create on the master page.
If a header or footer text frame has been created on the master page of the InDesign document, you can insert the
variable in the header or footer. (See Edit text on a master page.)

Define caption variables
Caption variables are updated automatically when a text frame containing a caption variable is moved next to an image.
By default, the Name metadata is used for the variable type when you choose Type > Text Variables > Insert Variable >
Image Name. You can edit the Image Name variable, or you can create new variables that specify image metadata.
1 Choose Type > Text Variables > Define.
2 Choose New to create a variable or Edit to edit an existing variable.
3 For Type, select Metadata Caption.
4 Choose an option from the Metadata menu.
5 Specify text that appears before or after the metadata, and then choose OK.

More Help topics
Create headers and footers

Hyperlinks
Hyperlinks panel overview
You can create hyperlinks so that when you export to Adobe PDF or SWF in InDesign, a viewer can click a link to jump
to other locations in the same document, to other documents, or to websites. Hyperlinks you export to PDF or SWF in
InCopy are not active.
A source is hyperlinked text, a hyperlinked text frame, or a hyperlinked graphics frame. A destination is the URL, file,
email address, page text anchor, or shared destination to which a hyperlink jumps. A source can jump to only one
destination, but any number of sources can jump to the same destination.
A source is hyperlinked text or a hyperlinked graphic. A destination is the URL, file, email address, page, text anchor, or
shared destination to which a hyperlink jumps. A source can jump to only one destination, but any number of sources
can jump to the same destination.

Last updated 6/13/2015

163
Text

Note: If you want the source text to be generated from the destination text, insert a cross-reference instead of adding a
hyperlink. See Cross-references.

A Hyperlink source B List of hyperlinks in the current document C Hyperlink status icons

Open the Hyperlinks panel
• Choose Window > Interactive > Hyperlinks.
• Choose Window > Hyperlinks.
• Choose Window > Type & Tables > Cross-References.

Sort hyperlinks in the Hyperlinks panel
❖ Choose Sort from the Hyperlinks panel menu, and then choose any of the following:
Manually Displays the hyperlinks in the order in which they were added to the document.
By Name Displays the hyperlinks in alphabetical order.
By Type Displays the hyperlinks in groups of similar type.

Display hyperlinks in smaller rows
❖ Choose Small Panel Rows from the Hyperlinks panel menu.

Create hyperlinks
You can create hyperlinks to pages, URLs, text anchors, email addresses, and files. If you create a hyperlink to a page or
text anchor in a different document, make sure that the exported files appear in the same folder.
To show or hide hyperlinks, choose View > Extras > Show Hyperlinks or Hide Hyperlinks.
Note: Hyperlinks are included in exported Adobe PDF files if Hyperlinks is selected in the Export Adobe PDF dialog box in
InDesign. Hyperlinks are included in the exported SWF file if Include Hyperlinks is selected in the Export SWF dialog box.

Create a hyperlink to a web page (URL)
You can use several different methods to create hyperlinks to URLs. When you specify a URL, you can use any valid
Internet resource protocol: http://, file://, ftp://, or mailto://.

Last updated 6/13/2015

164
Text

You can also use the Buttons feature to link to web pages. (See Buttons .)
You may want to create a character style for hyperlinks. Hyperlinks are often formatted in underlined blue text.
1 Select the text, frame, or graphic you want to be the hyperlink’s source. For example, you can select the text, “See the

Adobe website.”
2 In the Hyperlinks panel, use any of the following methods to create a hyperlink to a URL:

• In the URL text box, type or paste the URL name (such as http://www.adobe.com), and then choose New
Hyperlink from the Hyperlinks panel. Choose URL from the Link To menu, specify appearance options, and
click OK.
• If a URL is selected in your document, choose New Hyperlink From URL in the Hyperlinks panel menu. Doubleclick the hyperlink in the Hyperlinks panel, and then choose URL from the Link To menu, specify appearance
options, and click OK.
• Select a previously added URL from the URL menu. The hyperlink appearance is the same as that used in the
previous URL.
• Choose New Hyperlink in the Hyperlinks panel menu. Choose URL from the Link To menu, specify appearance
options, and click OK.
Note: If a URL hyperlink isn’t working in the exported PDF, there may be a problem with the hyperlink being a “Shared
Destination.” Double-click the hyperlink in the Hyperlinks panel, choose URL from the Link To menu, deselect Shared
Hyperlink Destination, and click OK.

Create a hyperlink to a file
When you create a hyperlink to a file, clicking the hyperlink in the exported PDF or SWF file opens the file in its native
application, such as Microsoft Word for .doc files.
Make sure the file you specify is available to anyone opening the PDF or SWF file you export. For example, if you’re
sending the exported PDF to a coworker, specify a file located on a shared server rather than your hard drive.
1 Select the text, frame, or graphic you want to be the source of the hyperlink.
2 Choose New Hyperlink in the Hyperlinks panel menu, or click the Create New Hyperlink button at the bottom of

the Hyperlinks panel.
3 In the New Hyperlink dialog box, choose File from the Link To menu.
4 For Path, type the pathname or click the folder button to locate and double-click the filename.
5 Select Shared Hyperlink Destination if you want the file to be stored in the Hyperlinks panel for easy reuse.
6 Specify the appearance of the hyperlink source, and then click OK.

Create a hyperlink to an email message
1 Select the text, frame, or graphic you want to be the source of the hyperlink.
2 Choose New Hyperlink in the Hyperlinks panel menu, or click the Create New Hyperlink button at the bottom of

the Hyperlinks panel.
3 In the New Hyperlink dialog box, choose Email from the Link To menu.
4 For Address, type the email address, such as username@company.com.
5 For Subject Line, type the text that appears in the subject line of the email message.

Last updated 6/13/2015

165
Text

6 Select Shared Hyperlink Destination if you want the email message to be stored in the Hyperlinks panel for easy

reuse.
7 Specify the appearance of the hyperlink source, and then click OK.

Create a hyperlink to a page
You can create a hyperlink to a page without first creating a destination. However, by creating a page destination, you
can specify a page number and view setting.
1 Select the text, frame, or graphic you want to be the source of the hyperlink.
2 Choose New Hyperlink in the Hyperlinks panel menu, or click the Create New Hyperlink button at the bottom of

the Hyperlinks panel.
3 In the New Hyperlink dialog box, choose Page from the Link To menu.
4 For Document, select the document containing the destination that you want to jump to. All open documents that

have been saved are listed in the pop-up menu. If the document you’re looking for isn’t open, select Browse in the
pop-up menu, locate the file, and then click Open.
5 For Page, specify the page number you want to jump to.
6 For Zoom Setting, do one of the following to select the view state of the page being jumped to:

• Select Fixed to display the magnification level and page position that were in effect when you created the link.
• Select Fit View to display the visible portion of the current page as the destination.
• Select Fit In Window to display the current page in the destination window.
• Select Fit Width or Fit Height to display the width or height of the current page in the destination window.
• Select Fit Visible to display the page so that its text and graphics fit the width of the window, which usually means
that the margins are not displayed.
• Select Inherit Zoom to display the destination window at the magnification level the reader uses when the
hyperlink is clicked.
7 Specify appearance options, and then click OK.

Create a hyperlink destination
Creating a hyperlink destination is necessary only if you’re creating a hyperlink or cross-reference to a text anchor. A
text anchor can point to a selection of text or to the insertion point location. Then you create the hyperlink or crossreference that points to the hyperlink destination. You can also create hyperlink destinations for pages and URLs, but
a destination isn’t necessary for those links.
Hyperlink destinations you create do not appear in the Hyperlinks panel; they appear in the dialog box that appears
when you’re creating or editing hyperlinks.
1 If you’re creating a text anchor, use the Type tool to place the insertion point, or select the range of text that you want

to be the anchor.
You cannot set up an anchor destination for text on a master page.
2 Choose New Hyperlink Destination in the Hyperlinks panel menu.
3 Choose Text Anchor in the Type menu. Specify a name for the text anchor, and then click OK.
4 Do any of the following, and then click OK:

• Choose Text Anchor in the Type menu. Specify a name for the text anchor.

Last updated 6/13/2015

166
Text

• Choose Page in the Type menu. Specify the page number you want to jump to and the Zoom Setting. Type a name
for the page, or select Name With Page Number to name the destination automatically based on the page number
and zoom setting you specify.
• Choose URL in the Type menu. Type or paste a URL, such as http://www.adobe.com. You can use any valid
Internet resource protocol: http://, file://, ftp://, or mailto://.

Create a hyperlink to a text anchor
1 Select the text, frame, or graphic you want to be the source of the hyperlink.
2 Choose New Hyperlink in the Hyperlinks panel menu, or click the Create New Hyperlink button at the bottom of

the Hyperlinks panel.
3 Choose Text Anchor from the Link To menu.
4 For Document, select the document containing the destination that you want to jump to. All open documents that

have been saved are listed in the pop-up menu. If the document you’re looking for isn’t open, select Browse in the
pop-up menu, locate the file, and then click Open.
5 From the Text Anchor menu, choose the text anchor destination you created.
6 Specify hyperlink appearance options, and then click OK.

Create a hyperlink to any shared destination
While creating a hyperlink, if you choose Shared Destination from the Link To menu, you can specify any named
destination. A destination is named when you add a URL using the URL text box or when you select Shared Hyperlink
Destination while creating a hyperlink to a URL, file, or email address.
1 Select the text, frame, or graphic you want to be the source of the hyperlink.
2 Choose New Hyperlink in the Hyperlinks panel menu, or click the Create New Hyperlink button at the bottom of

the Hyperlinks panel.
3 In the New Hyperlink dialog box, choose Shared Destination from the Link To menu.
4 For Document, select the document containing the destination that you want to jump to. All open documents that

have been saved are listed in the pop-up menu. If the document you’re looking for isn’t open, select Browse in the
pop-up menu, locate the file, and then click Open.
5 Choose a destination from the Name menu.
6 Specify hyperlink appearance options, and then click OK.

Hyperlink appearance options
The options determine the appearance of the hyperlink or cross-reference source in the exported PDF or SWF file.
These appearance options are also displayed in the InDesign document if you choose View > Extras > Show Hyperlinks.
Character Style Choose a character style to apply to the hyperlink source. The Character Style option is available only

if the hyperlink source is selected text, not a selected frame or graphic.
If you’re inserting a cross-reference, you can apply a character style when you edit a cross-reference format. You can
also apply character styles to building blocks within a format. See Using cross-reference formats.
Type Select Visible Rectangle or Invisible Rectangle.
Highlight Select Invert, Outline, Inset, or None. These options determine the appearance of the hyperlink when it’s
being clicked in the PDF or SWF file.
Color Select a color for the visible hyperlink rectangle.

Last updated 6/13/2015

167
Text

Width Select Thin, Medium, or Thick to determine the thickness of the hyperlink rectangle.
Style Select Solid or Dashed to determine the appearance of the hyperlink rectangle.

Convert URLs to hyperlinks
You can find and convert URLs (such as “www.adobe.com”) in your document and convert them to hyperlinks.
1 Choose Convert URLs To Hyperlinks from the Hyperlinks panel menu.
2 For Scope, indicate whether your want to convert URLs in the entire document, the current story, or the current

selection.
3 To apply a character style to the hyperlink, select a character style from the Character Style menu.
4 Do any of the following, and then click Done.

• Click Find to locate the next URL.
• Click Convert to convert the current URL to a hyperlink.
• Click Convert All to convert all URLs to hyperlinks.

Manage hyperlinks
Use the Hyperlinks panel to edit, delete, reset, or locate hyperlinks. In InCopy, you can manage hyperlinks only if the
story is checked out for editing.

Edit hyperlinks
1 In the Hyperlinks panel, double-click the item you want to edit.
2 In the Edit Hyperlinks dialog box, make changes to the hyperlink as necessary, and then click OK.

Note: To edit a hyperlink to a URL, select the hyperlink, edit the URL in the URL text box, and then press Tab or Enter.

Delete hyperlinks
When you remove a hyperlink, the source text or graphic remains.
❖ Select the item or items you want to remove in the Hyperlinks panel, and then click the Delete button at the bottom

of the panel.

Rename a hyperlink source
Renaming the hyperlink source changes the way it appears in the Hyperlinks panel.
1 In the Hyperlinks panel, select the hyperlink.
2 Choose Rename Hyperlink from the Hyperlinks panel menu, and specify a new name.

Edit or delete hyperlink destinations
1 Open the document in which the destination appears.
2 Choose Hyperlink Destination Options in the Hyperlinks panel menu.
3 For Destination, select the name of the destination you want to edit.
4 Do one of the following:

• Click Edit, and then make changes to the destination as necessary.
• Click Delete to remove the destination.

Last updated 6/13/2015

168
Text

5 When you have finished editing or deleting destinations, click OK.

Reset or update hyperlinks
1 Select the range of text, the text frame, or the graphic frame that will act as the new hyperlink source. For example,

you may want to select additional text to include in the source.
2 Select the hyperlink in the Hyperlinks panel.
3 Do either of the following:

• Choose Reset Hyperlink in the Hyperlinks panel menu.
• To update hyperlinks to external documents, choose Update Hyperlink in the Hyperlinks panel menu.

Go to a hyperlink source or anchor
• To locate the source of a hyperlink or cross-reference, select the item you want to locate in the Hyperlinks panel.
Choose Go To Source in the Hyperlinks panel menu. The text or frame will be selected.
• To locate the destination of a hyperlink or cross-reference, select the item you want to locate in the Hyperlinks panel.
Choose Go To Destination in the Hyperlinks panel menu.
If the item is a URL destination, InDesign starts or switches to your web browser to display the destination. If the item
is a text anchor or page destination, InDesign jumps to that location.

Editing hyperlinks imported from Word
When a Microsoft Word document with hyperlinks is imported into an InDesign document, you may notice a box or
border around the hyperlink URLs (such as www.adobe.com). The InDesign document inherits a blue swatch called
Word_R0_G0_B255. The document also inherits a character style called “Hyperlink” that underlines the text and
applies the blue color.
To remove the box, in the Hyperlinks panel, double-click the hyperlink. Under Appearance, choose Invisible Rectangle
from the Type menu, and click OK.
You may also want to delete the imported swatch. While doing so, you can replace it with a different swatch. See Delete
individual swatches .
Before you place the Word document in InDesign, you may want to remove the hyperlinks from the URLs in the Word
document to avoid inheriting this formatting. See your Word documentation. Another option is to create a character
style named “Hyperlink” in the InDesign document before you import. When you import the Word document, the InDesign
style that has the same name is used by default.

More Help topics
Add automatic page numbers for story
Export to PDF for printing
Cross-references

Adding text

Last updated 6/13/2015

169
Text

Adding text
You can add text by typing, pasting, or importing text from another file. In general, you use standard word-processing
on the toolbox, and then use the techniques described
techniques to work with text in InCopy. Select the Type tool
below. These methods work the same way in Galley, Story, and Layout views, whether or not the content is linked to
Adobe InDesign®.
Typing Click the insertion point where you want to add text, and begin typing.
Selecting Drag, double-click, or triple-click to select individual characters, words, lines, or paragraphs (depending on

the Preferences settings). Or click anywhere in the content, and choose Edit >Select All.
Pasting Copy or cut text, click at the location you want, and choose Edit > Paste. If you want to remove the formatting

of the pasted text, choose Edit > Paste Without Formatting. If you want to add or remove spacing as necessary, select
Adjust Spacing Automatically When Cutting And Pasting Words in the Type section of the Preferences dialog box.
You can also use Edit > Paste Without Grid Format to paste text into a frame grid so that the pasted text retains its font,
font size, and character spacing settings of the copied text.
Deleting Select the text you want to delete, and choose Edit > Clear.

You can also import text directly from another text document.

Importing files
You can import text from other InCopy stories, Microsoft® Word, Microsoft Excel, and any application that can export
text in Rich Text Format (RTF) or text-only format. All importable file formats are listed in the InCopy Place dialog box
(in the Files Of Type menu for Windows®, and in the right list pane for Mac OS).
Document formatting and styles
You can import files with or without formatting. If you import the files with formatting, InCopy imports most
character and paragraph formatting attributes from text files, but ignores most page-layout information, such as page
breaks, margins, and column settings (which you can set in InDesign). In general, InCopy imports all formatting
information specified in the word-processing application, except for features not available in InCopy.
If InCopy has an import filter for an application, you can determine which styles are imported, and which formatting
to use if there is a name conflict.
Note: InDesign controls the styles in linked InCopy stories. When you place an InCopy story in InDesign, any imported
styles in the InCopy document are overridden in InDesign if there are conflicting style names.
Saving files for import
If your word-processing application can save files in more than one file format, try using the format capable of retaining
the most formatting—either the application’s native file format or an interchange format such as Rich Text Format
(RTF).
You can import files created in the recent versions of Microsoft Word. If you are placing a file from a different wordprocessing application or from Word 95 for Windows or earlier, such as Word 6, open the file in its original application
and save it in a compatible Word format or in RTF, which preserves most formatting.

Last updated 6/13/2015

170
Text

Place (import) text
For large amounts of text, the Place command is the most useful way to import content. InCopy supports a variety of
word-processing, spreadsheet, and text file formats. The degree to which the original formatting is preserved depends
on the import filter for the file type and the options you choose as you place the file. You can also open Word, text, and
RTF files directly in InCopy.
1 Using the Type tool

, click where you want the text to appear.

2 Choose File > Place.
3 In the Place dialog box, select Show Import Options if you want to display a dialog box containing import options

for the type of file you’re placing.
4 Select the text file you want to place, and then click Open. (If you Shift-click Open, the Import Options dialog box

appears, even if Show Import Options isn’t selected.)
5 Do any of the following:

• If a dialog box displays import options for the type of file you’re placing, select any options you want, and click
OK.
• If the document you’re importing contains fonts that aren’t available on your system, a dialog box opens to
inform you of the font substitution. If you prefer to specify other substitution fonts, click Find Font and choose
alternatives.
If the text you import into your document includes pink, green, or another color of highlighting, you likely have one or
more composition preference options turned on. Open the Composition section of the Preferences dialog box, and notice
which options are turned on under Highlight. For example, if the placed text is formatted with fonts not available in InCopy,
the text is highlighted in pink.

Import options
When you import Word, Excel, and tagged text files, you can determine how the files are imported.

Microsoft Word and RTF import options
If you select Show Import Options when placing a Word file or an RTF file, you can choose from these options:
Table Of Contents Text Imports the table of contents as part of the text in the story. These entries are imported as text

only.
Index Text Imports the index as part of the text in the story. These entries are imported as text only.
Footnotes Imports Word footnotes. Footnotes and references are preserved, but renumbered based on the document’s
footnote settings. If the Word footnotes are not imported properly, try saving the Word document in RTF format and
importing the RTF file.
Endnotes Imports endnotes as part of the text at the end of the story.
Use Typographer’s Quotes Ensures that imported text includes left and right quotation marks (“ ”) and apostrophes (’)

instead of straight quotation marks (" ") and apostrophes (').
Remove Styles And Formatting From Text And Tables Removes formatting, such as typeface, type color, and type style,

from the imported text, including text in tables. Paragraph styles and inline graphics aren’t imported if this option is
selected.
Preserve Local Overrides When you choose to remove styles and formatting from text and tables, you can select
Preserve Local Overrides to maintain character formatting, such as bold and italics, that is applied to part of a
paragraph. Deselect this option to remove all formatting.

Last updated 6/13/2015

171
Text

Convert Tables To When you choose to remove styles and formatting from text and tables, you can convert tables to

either basic, unformatted tables or unformatted, tab-delimited text.
If you want to import unformatted text and formatted tables, import the text without formatting, and then paste the
tables from Word into InCopy .
Preserve Styles And Formatting From Text And Tables Preserves the Word document’s formatting in the InDesign or

InCopy document. You can use the other options in the Formatting section to determine how styles and formatting are
preserved.
Manual Page Breaks Determines how page breaks from the Word file are formatted in InDesign or InCopy. Select

Preserve Page Breaks to use the same page breaks used in Word, or select Convert To Column Breaks or No Breaks.
Import Inline Graphics Preserves inline graphics from the Word document in InCopy .
Import Unused Styles Imports all styles from the Word document, even if the styles aren’t applied to text.
Convert Bullets & Numbers To Text Imports bullets and numbers as actual characters, preserving the look of the

paragraph. However, in numbered lists, the numbers are not automatically updated when the list items are changed.
Track Changes Selecting this option causes Track Changes markups from the Word document to appear in the InCopy

document. In InDesign, view track changes in Story Editor.
Import Styles Automatically Imports styles from the Word document into the InDesign or InCopy document. If a

yellow warning triangle appears next to Style Name Conflicts, then one or more paragraph or character styles from the
Word document have the same name as an InCopy style.
To determine how these style name conflicts are resolved, select an option from the Paragraph Style Conflicts and
Character Style Conflicts menu. Choosing Use InCopy Style Definition causes the imported style text to be formatted
based on the InCopy style. Choosing Redefine InCopy Style causes the imported style text to be formatted based on the
Word style, and changes existing InCopy text formatted with the Word style. Choosing Auto Rename causes the
imported Word styles to be renamed. For example, if InCopy and Word have a Subheading style, the imported Word
style is renamed Subheading_wrd_1 when Auto Rename is selected.
Note: InCopy converts paragraph and character styles but not bulleted and numbered list styles.
Customize Style Import Lets you use the Style Mapping dialog box to select which InCopy style should be used for each
Word style in the imported document.
Save Preset Stores the current Word Import Options for later reuse. Specify the import options, click Save Preset, type

the name of the preset, and click OK. The next time you import a Word style, you can select the preset you created from
the Preset menu. Click Set As Default if you want the selected preset to be used as the default for future imports of Word
documents.

Text-file import options
If you select Show Import Options when placing a text file, you can choose from these options:
Character Set Specifies the computer language character set, such as ANSI, Unicode UTF8, or Windows CE, that was

used to create the text file. The default selection is the character set that corresponds to the default language and
platform of InDesign or InCopy.
Specifies the computer language character set, such as ANSI, Unicode UTF8, Shift JIS, or Chinese Big 5, that was used
to create the text file. The default selection is the character set that corresponds to the default language and platform of
InDesign or InCopy.
Platform Specifies whether the file was created in Windows or Mac OS.
Set Dictionary To Specifies the dictionary to be used by the imported text.

Last updated 6/13/2015

172
Text

Extra Carriage Returns Specifies how extra paragraph returns are imported. Choose Remove At End Of Every Line or
Remove Between Paragraphs.
Replace Replaces the specified number of spaces with a tab.
Use Typographer’s Quotes Ensures that imported text includes left and right quotation marks (“ ”) and apostrophes (’)

instead of straight quotation marks (" ") and apostrophes (').

Microsoft Excel import options
You can choose from these options when importing an Excel file:
Sheet Specifies the worksheet you want to import.
View Specifies whether to import any stored custom or personal views, or to ignore the views.
Cell Range Specifies the range of cells, using a colon (:) to designate the range (such as A1:G15). If there are named
ranges within the worksheet, these names appear in the Cell Range menu.
Import Hidden Cells Not Saved In View Includes any cells formatted as hidden cells in the Excel spreadsheet.
Table Specifies how the spreadsheet information appears in the document.
Formatted Table InCopy tries to preserve the same formatting used in Excel, although the formatting of text within

each cell may not be preserved. If the spreadsheet is linked rather than embedded, updating the link will override any
formatting applied to the table in InCopy .
Unformatted Table The table is imported without any formatting from the spreadsheet. When this option is selected,

you can apply a table style to the imported table. If you format text using paragraph and characters styles, the formatting
is preserved even if you update the link to the spreadsheet.
Unformatted Tabbed Text The table is imported as tab-delimited text, which you can then convert to a table in

InDesign or InCopy.
Formatted Only Once InDesign preserves the same formatting used in Excel during the initial import. If the

spreadsheet is linked rather than embedded, formatting changes made to the spreadsheet are ignored in the linked table
when you update the link. This option isn’t available in InCopy.
Table Style Applies the table style you specify to the imported document. This option is available only if Unformatted

Table is selected.
Cell Alignment Specifies the cell alignment for the imported document.
Include Inline Graphics Preserves inline graphics from the Excel document in InCopy .
Number Of Decimal Places To Include Specifies the number of decimal places of spreadsheet figures.
Use Typographer’s Quotes Ensures that imported text includes left and right quotation marks (“ ”) and apostrophes (’)

instead of straight quotation marks (" ") and apostrophes (').

Tagged-text import options
You can import (or export) a text file capable of taking advantage of InCopy formatting capabilities by using the tagged
text format. Tagged-text files are text files containing information describing the formatting you want InCopy to apply.
Properly tagged text can describe almost anything that can appear in an InCopy story, including all paragraph-level
attributes, character-level attributes, and special characters.
For information on specifying tags, view the Tagged Text PDF at www.adobe.com/go/learn_id_taggedtext_cs5_en
(PDF).

Last updated 6/13/2015

173
Text

The following options are available when you import a tagged-text file and select Show Import Options in the Place
dialog box.
Use Typographer’s Quotes Ensures that imported text includes left and right quotation marks (“ ”) and apostrophes (’)

instead of straight quotation marks (" ") and apostrophes (').
Remove Text Formatting Removes formatting, such as typeface, type color, and type style, from the imported text.
Resolve Text Style Conflicts Using Specifies which character or paragraph style to apply when there is a conflict
between the style in the tagged-text file and the style in the InDesign document. Select Publication Definition to use
the definition that already exists for that style in the InDesign document. Select Tagged File Definition to use the style
as defined in the tagged text.
Show List Of Problem Tags Before Place Displays a list of unrecognized tags. If a list appears, you can choose to cancel

or continue the import. If you continue, the file may not look as expected.

Import Buzzword documents
Buzzword is a web-based text editor that lets users create and store text files on a web server. In InCopy CS5, you can
import and export text from Buzzword documents.
When you import a Buzzword document, a URL-based link is created to the Buzzword document on the server. When
the Buzzword document is updated outside InCopy , you can use the Links panel to update the imported version in
InCopy . However, doing so removes any changes to the Buzzword text you’ve made in InCopy .
Note: The Acrobat.com Buzzword application is available only in English, French, and German.
1 Choose File > Place From Buzzword.
2 If you haven’t already signed in to CS Live, click Sign In, specify your e-mail address and password, and then click

Sign In.
Once you sign in, the Place Buzzword Documents dialog box displays a list of the Buzzword documents you can
import.
3 Select one or more documents you want to import, or paste the URL of the Buzzword document into the Paste URL

field.
4 Select any of the following options, and then click OK.
Show Import Options If you select this option, the Buzzword Import Options dialog box appears before you place

the file.
Replace Selected Item Select this option to replace the object currently selected in the document.
Link To Document Select this option to create a link between the Buzzword document and the placed text. If you
establish a link and update the Buzzword document, the Links panel indicates that the file has been modified. If you
update the link, the text in InCopy is updated. However, formatting changes you’ve made to this text in InCopy are
lost.
Apply Grid Format Reformat the imported text according to grid attributes.

5 If you selected Show Import Options, specify settings in the Buzzword Import Options dialog box.

This dialog box includes most of the same options found in the RTF Import Options dialog box. See Microsoft Word
and RTF import options. Buzzword currently does not have a styles feature, so none of the style options are valid at
this time.
6 With the loaded text cursor, click or drag to create a text frame.

Last updated 6/13/2015

174
Text

Type Asian text using inline input
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Advanced Type (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Advanced Type (Mac OS).
2 Select Use Inline Input For Non-Latin Text, and then click OK.

You can use a system input method, if available, for adding 2-byte and 4-byte characters. This method is especially
useful for entering Asian characters.
You can use a special input program to input Asian text directly into text frames.

More Help topics
Paste text
Import graphics
Convert Word styles to InDesign styles
Work with stand-alone documents
Export content to Buzzword

Checking spelling
Check spelling
You can check the spelling in a document or in all open stories. InCopy highlights misspelled or unknown words,
repeated words (such as “the the”), uncapitalized words, and uncapitalized sentences. When performing a spell check,
InCopy checks all XML content and expanded inline notes.
When you check spelling, InCopy uses the dictionary for the languages you assigned to the text in your document.
InCopy uses the Proximity language dictionaries for both spelling and hyphenation. Each dictionary contains hundreds
of thousands of words with standard hyphenation breaks.
For stand-alone stories (stories not linked to an InDesign layout), you can customize language dictionaries to ensure
that any unique vocabulary you use is recognized and treated correctly. For example, when you run a spelling check
(Edit > Spelling > Check Spelling), you can click Add and enter the settings you want.

Set spelling preferences
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Spelling (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Spelling (Mac OS).
2 Do any of the following:

• Select Misspelled Words to find words that do not appear in the language dictionary.
• Select Repeated Words to find duplicate words such as “the the.”
• Select Uncapitalized Words to find words (such as “germany”) that appear in the dictionary only as capitalized
words (“Germany”).
• Select Uncapitalized Sentences to find uncapitalized words following periods, exclamation points, and question
marks.
3 Select Enable Dynamic Spelling to underline potentially misspelled words while you type.

Last updated 6/13/2015

175
Text

4 Specify the underline color of misspelled words (words not found in the user dictionaries), repeated words (such as

“the the”), uncapitalized words (such as “nigeria” instead of “Nigeria”), and uncapitalized sentences (sentences that
don’t begin with a capital letter).
Note: To spell-check notes, make sure that Include Note Content When Checking Spelling is selected in Notes preferences.
To spell-check deleted text, make sure that Include Deleted Text When Spellchecking is selected in the Track Changes
preferences.

Check spelling
1 If your document includes foreign-language text, select the text and use the Language menu on the Character panel

to specify the language for that text.
2 Choose Edit > Spelling > Check Spelling.

Spell-checking begins.
Note: The Check Spelling command does not check collapsed stories in a multistory file. However, when you select
Change All or Ignore All, all collapsed stories and tables are affected.
3 If you want to change the range of your spell-checking, do any of the following, and then click Start to begin checking

the spelling:

• Select Document to check the entire document.Select All Documents to check all open documents.
• Select Story to check all text in the currently selected frame, including text in other threaded text frames and
overset text. Select Stories to check stories in all selected frames.
• Select To End Of Story to check from the insertion point.
• Select Selection to check only selected text. This option is available only if text is selected.
4 When unfamiliar or misspelled words or other possible errors are displayed, choose an option:

• Click Skip to continue spell-checking without changing the highlighted word. Click Ignore All to ignore all
occurrences of the highlighted word, until InCopy is restarted.
• Select a word from the Suggested Corrections list or type the correct word in the Change To box, and then click
Change to change only that occurrence of the misspelled word. You can also click Change All to change all
occurrences of the misspelled word in your document.
• To add a word to a dictionary, select the dictionary from the Add To menu, and click Add.
• Click Dictionary to display the Dictionary dialog box, where you can specify the target dictionary and language,
and specify hyphenation breaks in the added word. If you want to add the word to all languages, choose All
Languages from the Language menu. Click Add.

Correct spelling errors as you type
By turning on Autocorrect, you can allow capitalization errors and common typing mistakes to be replaced while you
type. Before Autocorrect will work, you must create a list of commonly misspelled words and associate them with the
correct spelling.
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Autocorrect (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Autocorrect (Mac OS).
2 Choose Enable Autocorrect. (You can also choose Edit > Spelling > Autocorrect to turn this feature on or off

quickly.)
3 From the Language menu, choose which language the autocorrections are applied to.
4 To correct capitalization errors (such as typing “germany” instead of “Germany”), select Autocorrect Capitalization

Errors. You don’t need to add the capitalized words to the list of autocorrections.

Last updated 6/13/2015

176
Text

5 To add a word that you commonly misspell, click Add, type the misspelled word (such as “teh”), type the correction

(such as “the”), and then click OK.
6 Continue to add words that you commonly misspell, and then click OK.

When you type any misspelled word you added to the list, the word is automatically replaced by the word you entered
as the correction.
To remove autocorrect words you’ve added, select the word in the list and choose Remove. To edit autocorrect words,
select the word, click Edit, retype the correction, and click OK.

Use dynamic spelling
When dynamic spelling is enabled, you can correct spelling errors by using the context menu. Potentially misspelled
words are underlined (based on the dictionary associated with the language of the text). If you type text in different
languages, select the text and assign the correct language.
1 To enable dynamic spelling, choose Edit > Spelling > Dynamic Spelling.

Potentially misspelled words are underlined in your document.
2 Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac OS) the underlined word, and do one of the following:

• Select a suggested correction. If a word is repeated or needs to be capitalized, you can choose Delete Repeated
Word [word] or Capitalize [word].
• Select Add [word] To User Dictionary. This automatically adds the word to the current dictionary without
opening the Dictionary dialog box. The word remains unchanged in the text.
• Select Dictionary. This opens the Dictionary dialog box where you can select the Target dictionary, change
hyphenation breaks, and specify a language. If you want to add the word to all languages, choose All Languages
from the Language menu, and then click Add. The word is added to the selected dictionary and remains
unchanged in the text.
• Select Ignore All to ignore occurrences of this word in all documents. When InCopy is restarted, the word is
flagged again as a misspelling.
Note: If you select Ignore All and then decide that you don’t want to ignore that word after all, Choose Ignored Words from
the Dictionary List menu in the Dictionary dialog box and remove the word from the list.

Hyphenation and spelling dictionaries
InCopy uses Proximity dictionaries for most languages to verify spelling and to hyphenate words. You can add words
to each dictionary to customize it. You can assign different languages to text, and InCopy uses the appropriate
dictionary to handle spelling and hyphenation. You can create additional user dictionaries, and you can import or
export word lists saved in a plain text file.
When you customize the words in a dictionary, you actually create lists of added words (words that aren’t already in the
dictionary) and removed words (existing dictionary words that you want to be flagged as a potential misspelling). The
Dictionary dialog box lets you display and edit added words, removed words, and ignored words (words that are
ignored for the current session because you clicked Ignore All). You can add words that apply to all languages, which
is especially useful for last names, street names, and other items that aren’t specific to a language.
If you want to use the language dictionaries from a previous version of InDesign or InCopy, use your system Find
command to locate the user dictionary files (.udc), and then add them to your list of dictionaries in Dictionary
preferences.
Where dictionary words are stored

Last updated 6/13/2015

177
Text

By default, hyphenation and spelling exceptions are located in user dictionary files stored outside the document on the
computer where InCopy is installed (dictionary file names end with a .clam or .not extension). However, you can also
store exception lists inside any InCopy document. In addition, you can store word lists in an external user dictionary,
in the document, or in both. The location of existing dictionaries appears in the Dictionary preferences.
Storing hyphenation and spelling exceptions inside a document makes it easier to treat text consistently when you move
that document to other computers. For this reason, you can merge the user dictionary into the document in Dictionary
preferences. You can also control the location of exceptions from the Create Package Folder dialog box (see Package
files ). In contrast, storing an exception list outside the document makes it easier to use the same list of exceptions for
multiple documents.
Note: If the user dictionary is merged into the exceptions list, the entire user dictionary is added to the document, even if
the words are not used, thereby increasing the document’s file size.
Applying languages to text
You can use the Language menu in the Character panel to apply a language to selected text. You can also specify a
default language for an entire document, or for all new documents. InCopy also includes a language locking feature that
prevents the language setting in Asian text from being changed when it is part of a selection and a non-Asian language
is chosen from the Language menu. (See Assign a language to text.)
You can use the Language menu in the Control panel or Character panel to apply a language to selected text. You can
also specify a default language for an entire document, or for all new documents. (See Assign a language to text.)
Exception word lists
You can exclude words from being considered. For example, if you want to use an alternate spelling for a common word
such as “bicycle,” which you may need to spell in a different way for your company name or for a specific document,
add the word to the list of excluded words so that it will be flagged during a spell check. InCopy can maintain a separate
set of added and removed words for each installed language.

Create or add user dictionaries
You can create a user dictionary, or you can add user dictionaries from previous InDesign or InCopy versions, from
files that others have sent you, or from a server where your workgroup’s user dictionary is stored. The dictionary you
add is used for all your InCopy documents.
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Dictionary (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Dictionary (Mac OS).
2 From the Language menu, choose the language with which you want to associate the dictionary.
3 Do one of the following:

• To create a new dictionary, click the New User Dictionary icon below the Language menu. Specify the name
and location of the user dictionary (which includes a .udc extension), and then click Save.
• To add an existing dictionary, click the Add User Dictionary icon
includes a .udc or .not extension, and then click Open.

, select the user dictionary file, which

Note: If you can’t find the dictionary file, you might want to use your system Find command to locate the .udc files (try
using *.udc), note the location, and then try again.
The dictionary is added to the list under the Language menu. You can add words to the dictionary when checking
spelling or by using the Dictionary dialog box.

Last updated 6/13/2015

178
Text

Set the default language dictionary for the current document
You can change the default language dictionary for a document or for all new documents you create. Changing the
default dictionary in an existing document doesn’t affect text that has already been created or text that you type into an
existing text frame.
Use the Character Style or Paragraph Style panel to set a specific dictionary for a specific style. The Language menu
appears in the Advanced Character Formats section.
1 Open the document.
2 Select the Selection tool from the toolbar and make sure no items are selected in the document.
3 Choose Type > Character.
4 Choose the desired dictionary from the Language menu on the Character panel. If you cannot see the language

option in the Character panel, select Show Options and then select your language from the list.

Set the default language dictionary for all new documents
1 Start InCopy , but do not open a document.
2 Choose Type > Character.
3 Choose the desired dictionary from the Language pop-up menu on the Character panel. If you cannot see the

language option in the Character panel, select Show Options and then select your language from the list.

Remove, relink, and reorder user dictionaries
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Dictionary (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Dictionary (Mac OS).
2 From the Language menu, choose the language to which the dictionary belongs.
3 Do any of the following:

• To remove a dictionary from the list, select it and click the Remove User Dictionary icon
least one dictionary per language.

. You must have at

• If the language dictionary includes a question mark icon next to it, select the dictionary, click the Relink User
, and then locate and open the user dictionary.
Dictionary icon
• To change the order of the user dictionaries, drag and drop them. The order of the dictionaries in the list is the
order in which the dictionaries are checked.

Add words to dictionaries
If, during a spell check, InDesign displays an unfamiliar word in the Check Spelling dialog box, select the dictionary
from the Add To menu, and then click Add. You can also use the Dictionary dialog box to let you specify the target
dictionary and language, and to indicate how words are added to an exception word list.
For stand-alone stories (stories not linked to an InDesign layout), you can add words to the language dictionaries.
Customizing your dictionaries ensures that any unique vocabulary you use is recognized and treated correctly.
1 Choose Edit > Spelling > User Dictionary.
2 In the Language menu, choose a language. Each language contains at least one dictionary. If you want the word to

be added to all languages, choose All Languages.
3 In the Target menu, choose the dictionary where you want to store the word. The Target menu lets you store the

changes in an external user dictionary or in any open document.
4 In the Dictionary List menu, choose Added Words.
5 In the Word box, type or edit the word to be added to the word list.

Last updated 6/13/2015

179
Text

6 Click Hyphenate to see the word’s default hyphenation. Tildes (~) indicate possible hyphenation points.
7 If you don’t like the hyphenation points, follow these guidelines to indicate your preferred hyphenation of the word:

• Type one tilde (~) to indicate the best possible hyphenation points, or the only acceptable hyphenation point, in
the word.
• Type two tildes (~~) to indicate your second choice.
• Type three tildes (~~~) to indicate a poor but acceptable hyphenation point.
• If you want the word never to be hyphenated, type a tilde before its first letter.
If you need to include an actual tilde in a word, type a backslash before the tilde (\~).
8 Click Add, and then click Done. The word is added to the currently selected Dictionary List.

Note: Remember that hyphenation points interact with the hyphenation settings in your documents. As a result, the word
might not break where you expect it to. Control these settings by choosing Hyphenation in the Paragraph panel menu. (See
Hyphenate text.)

Remove or edit words in dictionaries
1 Choose Edit > Spelling > User Dictionary.
2 In the Language menu, choose a language.
3 In the Target menu, choose the dictionary from which you want to remove the word. The Target menu lets you

choose an external user dictionary or any open document.
4 In the Dictionary List menu, do one of the following:

• To modify the list of additions to the selected Target word list, choose Added Words.
• To modify the list of words that are flagged as misspelled, choose Removed Words.
• To modify the list of words that are being ignored during the current InCopy session, choose Ignored Words.
This list includes all the words for which you’ve chosen Ignore All.
5 In the word list, edit the word, or select the word and click Remove.
6 Click Done.

Export a word list
You can export word lists to a text file (.txt) and then import that list of words into a user dictionary in InCopy . The
words in the text file must be separated by a space, tab, or paragraph return. You can export added words and removed
words, but you cannot export ignored words, which are used only in the current session.
1 Choose Edit > Spelling > User Dictionary.
2 Choose the language from the Language menu and the dictionary from the Target menu that contains the list of

words you want to export.
3 Click Export, specify the file name and location, and then click Save.

The list of words is saved in a text file. You can edit this list of words in any text editor, and then import the word list.
You can also send the word list to others, who can import it into their user dictionaries.

Import a word list
1 Choose Edit > Spelling > User Dictionary.
2 Choose the language from the Language menu and the dictionary from the Target menu.

Last updated 6/13/2015

180
Text

3 Click Import, locate the text file containing your list of spelling exceptions, and then click Open.

Change dictionary preferences
Use Dictionary preferences to specify how InCopy handles hyphenation and spelling dictionaries. Most languages in
InCopy use Proximity dictionaries to verify spelling and to hyphenate words. If you have installed hyphenation or
spelling components from a different company, you can select a different vendor for each installed language.
Note: The Dictionary Preferences dialog box does not enable you to specify the language dictionary used for spell checking
or hyphenating text. This dialog box is used to specify which hyphenation and spelling plug-ins InCopy uses for the language
specified in the Language field. If you use only the default hyphenation and spelling plug-in, you don't need to change any
settings in the Dictionary Preferences dialog box. If you install a different spelling or hyphenation plug-in provided by a
third-party developer, it appears as an option in the Hyphenation Vendor and Spelling Vendor menus in this dialog box.
This would let you select one vendor's hyphenation or spelling engine for some languages and another vendor's hyphenation
or spelling engine for other languages.
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Dictionary (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Dictionary (Mac OS).
2 For Language, specify the language for which you want to edit settings or change the hyphenation or spelling vendor.
3 Create, add, or remove user dictionaries. (See Create or add user dictionaries.)
4 If you have installed a hyphenation component from a company other than Adobe, select it in the Hyphenation

menu.
5 If you have installed a spelling dictionary component from a company other than Adobe, select it in the Spelling

menu.
6 In the Compose Using menu in the Hyphenation Exceptions menu, do one of the following:

• To compose text using the hyphenation exceptions list stored in the external user dictionary, choose User
Dictionary.
• To compose text using the hyphenation exceptions list stored inside the document, choose Document.
• To compose text using both lists, choose User Dictionary And Document. This is the default setting.
7 To add the exceptions list stored in the external user dictionary to the exceptions list stored within the document,

select Merge User Dictionary Into Document.
Note: If you work with many different partners or clients, you might want to deselect the Merge User Dictionary Into
Document option. For example, if you’re a service provider, you probably don’t want your user dictionary merged with
every customer’s file.
8 To recompose all stories when certain settings are changed, select Recompose All Stories When Modified. Selecting

this option recomposes stories when you change the Compose Using settings (see step 6) or when you use the
Dictionary command to add or remove words. Recomposing all stories can take some time, depending on the
amount of text in the document.
9 Click OK.

Using dictionaries in a workgroup
Make sure that each station in your workgroup has the same customized user dictionaries installed and added, so that
a document uses the same spelling and hyphenation rules regardless of who is working on it. You can either make sure
that everyone adds the same dictionaries to their computer, or you can share a user dictionary over the network server.

Last updated 6/13/2015

181
Text

A lock icon indicates that a dictionary is locked and can be used, but not edited. When a user dictionary is stored on
a server, the first user to load the dictionary locks the file; all subsequent users see that the dictionary is locked. Files
can also be locked through the operating system, when the file is made read-only. If you share a user dictionary over
the network server, you may want to lock the file so that it’s read-only for all users, allowing only the administrator to
add words.
Make sure that everyone in the workgroup uses the customized user dictionary installed on the common network
workstation, and not the dictionary stored with a document. However, before you take a document to a service
provider, you might want to merge the user dictionary into the document.
If you don’t share a customized user dictionary on a common network workstation, locate user dictionary files and copy
them from one workstation to another. The location of user dictionaries appear in the Dictionary preferences.
After you update a shared workstation’s user dictionary, the changes don’t appear in individual workstations until a user
restarts InCopy or presses Ctrl+Alt+/ (Windows) or Command+ Option+/ (Mac OS) to recompose all text.

Assign a language dictionary to selected text
If you use more than one language in a stand-alone story (stories not linked to an InDesign layout), you can tell InCopy
which language dictionary to use for spell checking and hyphenating words in a particular language. You can assign
different language dictionaries to the various parts of your document down to a single character of text.

A Glockenspiel in English B Glockenspiel in Traditional German C Glockenspiel in Reformed German

1 Select the text to which you want to assign a dictionary.
2 Choose Type > Character to open the Character panel.
3 At the bottom of the Character panel, choose a dictionary from the Language menu. (If the Language menu doesn’t

appear in the Character panel, choose Customize from the Character panel menu, select Language, and click OK.)
Note: If the InCopy story is linked to an InDesign layout with an embedded hyphenation list, the embedded list governs
spell checking and hyphenation.

Cross-references
If you’re writing a manual or reference document, you may want to include a cross-reference to refer the reader from
one part of your document to another. Example: For more information, see “Field mice” on page 249. You can specify
whether a cross-reference derives from a paragraph style, such as a heading style, or from a text anchor you’ve created.
You can also determine the cross-reference format, such as Page Number Only or Full Paragraph & Page Number.

Insert cross-references
Use the Hyperlinks panel to insert cross-references into your document. The text being referred to is the destination
text. The text that is generated from the destination text is the source cross-reference.

Last updated 6/13/2015

182
Text

When you insert a cross-reference in your document, you can choose from several predesigned formats, or you can
create your own custom format. You can apply a character style to the entire cross-reference source, or to text within
the cross-reference. Cross-reference formats can be synchronized across a book.
Cross-reference source text is editable and can break across lines.
Note: Cross-references are included in exported Adobe PDF files if Hyperlinks is selected in the Export Adobe PDF dialog
box in InDesign. Cross-references are included in the exported SWF file if Include Hyperlinks is selected in the Export SWF
dialog box.
In InCopy standalone documents, you can create and edit cross-references as you can in InDesign. In checked-out
stories, you can create and edit cross-references to paragraphs in the same story as the source, to paragraphs in another
checked-out story if the InDesign document is open, or to text anchors in any story of any InDesign document.

A Cross-reference source in document B Selected destination paragraph C Click here to create or edit cross-reference format.

For a video tutorial on inserting cross-references, see www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4024_id.
1 Place the insertion point where you want the cross-reference to be inserted.
2 Do any of the following:

• Choose Type > Hyperlinks & Cross-References > Insert Cross-Reference.
• Choose Window > Type & Tables > Cross-References, and then choose Insert Cross-Reference from the
Hyperlinks panel menu.
• Click the Create New Cross-Reference button

in the Hyperlinks panel.

3 In the New Cross-Reference dialog box, choose Paragraph or Text Anchor from the Link To menu.

If you choose Paragraph, you can create a cross-reference to any paragraph in the document you specify.
If you choose Text Anchor, you can create a cross-reference to any text in which you have created a hyperlink
destination. (See Create a hyperlink destination.) Creating a text anchor is especially useful if you want to use
different text than the actual destination paragraph.

Last updated 6/13/2015

183
Text

4 For Document, select the document containing the destination that you want to refer to. All open documents that

have been saved are listed in the pop-up menu. If the document you’re looking for isn’t open, choose Browse, locate
the file, and then click Open.
5 Click a paragraph style (such as Head1) in the left box to narrow down the choices, and then select the paragraph

you want to refer to. (Or, if Text Anchor is selected, choose the text anchor.)
6 Choose the cross-reference format you want to use from the Format menu.

You can edit these cross-reference formats or create your own. See Using cross-reference formats.
7 Specify the appearance of the source hyperlink. See Hyperlink appearance options.
8 Click OK.

When you insert a cross-reference, a text anchor marker appears at the beginning of the destination paragraph. You
can view this marker when you choose Type > Show Hidden Characters. If this marker is moved or deleted, the crossreference becomes unresolved.

Using cross-reference formats
Several cross-reference formats appear in the New Cross-Reference dialog box by default. You can edit these formats,
delete them, or create your own.
Note: If you’ve deleted or edited cross-reference formats in your document and want to return them to the default formats,
you can choose Load Cross-Reference Formats from the panel menu and choose a document with unedited formats. You
can also synchronize cross-reference formats in a book.
For a video tutorial on editing cross-reference formats, see www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4024_id.

Create or edit cross-reference formats
Unlike other presets, cross-reference formats can be edited or deleted. When you edit a cross-reference format, any
source cross-reference that uses that format is automatically updated.
In InCopy, you can create or edit cross-reference formats only in stand-alone documents. In assignment files, the crossreference formats are determined by the InDesign document.
1 Do any of the following:

• Choose Define Cross-Reference Formats from the Hyperlinks panel menu.
• While creating or editing a cross-reference, click the Create Or Edit Cross-Reference Formats button

2 In the Cross-Reference Formats dialog box, do one of the following:

• To edit a format, select the format on the left.
• To create a format, select a format to base the new format on, and then click the Create Format button
creates a duplicate of the selected format.

. This

3 For Name, specify the name of the format.
4 In the Definition text box, add or remove any text as needed. Click the Building Block icon

blocks from a menu. Click the Special Characters icon
special characters.

to insert building
to select dashes, spaces, quotation marks, and other

5 To apply a character style to the entire cross-reference, select Character Style For Cross-Reference, and then choose

or create the character style from the menu.
You can also use the Character Style building block to apply a character style to text within the cross-reference.
6 Click Save to save the changes. Click OK when finished.

Last updated 6/13/2015

184
Text

Cross-reference building blocks
Building block

What it does

Example

Page Number

Inserts the page number.

on page
on page 23

Paragraph Number

Inserts the paragraph number in a crossreference to a numbered list.

See
See 1
In this example, only “1” is used from the
paragraph, “1. Animals.”

Paragraph Text

Inserts the paragraph text without the
paragraph number in a cross-reference to a
numbered list.

See “”
See “Animals”
In this example, only “Animals” is used from
the paragraph, “1. Animals.”

Full Paragraph

Partial Paragraph

Inserts the entire paragraph, including
paragraph number and paragraph text.

See “”

Lets you create a cross-reference to the first
part of a paragraph, up to the specified
delimiter, such as a colon or em dash.

See

See “1. Animals”

See Chapter 7
In this example, only “Chapter 7” is used from
the title “Chapter 7: Dogs and Cats.”
Specify the delimiter (such as : in this
example), and indicate whether the delimiter
is excluded (“false” or “0”) or included (“true”
or “1”) in the source cross-reference.
See Creating cross-references to partial
paragraphs.

Text Anchor Name

Chapter Number

Inserts the text anchor name. You can create
text anchors by choosing New Hyperlink
Destination from the Hyperlinks panel menu.

See

Inserts the chapter number.

in chapter

See Figure 1

in chapter 3
File Name

Character Style

Inserts the filename of the destination
document.

in
in newsletter.indd

Applies a character style to text within a cross- See on
reference.
page
See Animals on page 23.
Specify the character style name, and include
the text you want to apply the character style
to between the and tags.
See Apply character styles within a crossreference.

Creating cross-references to partial paragraphs
You can design cross-reference formats to include only the first part of a paragraph. For example, if you have headings
in your document that look like, “Chapter 7—Granada to Barcelona,” you can create a cross-reference that refers only
to “Chapter 7.”

Last updated 6/13/2015

185
Text

A The cross-reference source ends at an em dash (^_) B “false” excludes the em dash from the source

When you insert the Partial Paragraph building block, you must do two things. First, specify the delimiter between the
quotation marks. The delimiter is the character that ends the paragraph. Common delimiters include colons (Chapter
7: Granada), periods (Chapter 7. Granada), and dashes (Chapter 7—Granada). To insert special characters such as em
dashes (^_), em spaces (^m), and bullet characters (^8), choose an option from the menu that appears when you click
the Special Characters icon.
Second, indicate whether the delimiter character is excluded (Chapter 7) or included (Chapter 7—). Use
includeDelim=”false” to exclude the delimiter and includeDelim=”true” to include the delimiter. Instead of “false” or
“true,” you can use “0” or “1,” respectively.

Apply character styles within a cross-reference
If you want to emphasize a section of text within a cross-reference, you can use the Character Style building block. This
building block consists of two tags. The tag indicates which style is applied, and the tag
ends the character style. Any text or building blocks between these tags is formatted in the specified style.

Last updated 6/13/2015

186
Text

A This tag applies a character style named “Red.” B This tag ends the character style formatting. C A character style named “Bold” is applied to
the rest of the cross-reference source.

1 Create the character style you want to use.
2 In the Cross-Reference Formats dialog box, create or edit the format you want to apply.
3 Under Definition, select the text and building blocks to which you want to apply the character style.
4 Choose Character Style from the menu to the right of the definition list.
5 Type the name of the character style between the quotation marks exactly as it appears in the Character Styles panel.

Style names are case sensitive. If the character style is in a group, type the name of the group followed by a colon
before the character style, such as Style Group 1: Red.
6 Click Save to save the format, and then click OK.

Load (import) cross-reference formats
When you load cross-reference formats from another document, the incoming formats replace any existing formats
that share the same name.
In InCopy, you can import cross-reference formats only in standalone documents. You cannot import formats from an
InCopy document into an InDesign document. If the new or modified format in InCopy conflicts with a format in the
InDesign document when the story is checked in, the InDesign format takes precedence.
1 Choose Load Cross-Reference Formats from the Hyperlinks panel menu.
2 Double-click the document containing the cross-reference formats you want to import.

You can also share cross-reference formats across documents by synchronizing a book.

Delete cross-reference formats
You cannot delete a cross-reference format that has been applied to cross-references in the document.
1 In the Cross-Reference Formats dialog box, select the format you want to delete.
2 Click the Delete Format button

Last updated 6/13/2015

187
Text

Manage cross-references
When you insert a cross-reference, the Hyperlinks panel indicates the status of the cross-reference. For example, icons
,
indicate if the destination text appears on the pasteboard , a master page , a hidden layer , in overset text
or in hidden text . Cross-references that link to such destination areas are unresolved. The panel also lets you know
if the destination paragraph has been edited
(also called out-of-date) or is missing . Destination text is missing if
either the destination text or the file containing the destination text cannot be found. Hold the mouse pointer over any
icon to view a tool tip description.
In InCopy, you can manage cross-references only if the story is checked out for editing.

Update cross-references
An update icon indicates that the cross-reference destination text has changed or that the cross-reference source text
has been edited. You can easily update the cross-reference. If the destination moves to a different page, the crossreference is updated automatically.
When you update a cross-reference, any formatting changes you’ve made to the source text are removed.
When printing or outputting, you are notified if cross-references are out of date or unresolved.
You can also use the Preflight panel to notify you when cross-references are out of date or unresolved. When defining a
profile, select Cross-References in the Text section. See Define preflight profiles .
1 Select one or more out-of-date cross-references. To update all cross-references, make sure that none are selected.
2 Do any of the following:

• Click the Update Cross-References button

in the Hyperlinks panel.

• Choose Update Cross-Reference from the Hyperlinks panel menu.
• Choose Type > Hyperlinks & Cross-References > Update Cross-Reference.
To update all cross-references in a book, choose Update All Cross-References from the book panel menu. You are
notified if any cross-references remain unresolved.

Relink cross-references
If the missing destination text has been moved to a different document, or if the document containing the destination
text is renamed, you can relink the cross-reference. When you relink, any changes made to the source cross-reference
are removed.
1 In the Cross-References section of the Hyperlinks panel, select the cross-reference you want to relink.
2 Choose Relink Cross-Reference from the Hyperlinks panel menu.
3 Locate the document in which the destination text appears, and then click Open.

If any other destination text appears in that document, you can relink additional cross-references.

Edit cross-references
To change the appearance of the source cross-reference or specify a different format, you can edit the cross-reference.
If you edit a cross-reference that links to a different document, the document is opened automatically.
1 Do any of the following:

• Choose Type > Hyperlinks & Cross References > Cross-Reference Options.
• In the Cross-References section of the Hyperlinks panel, double-click the cross-reference you want to edit.
• Select the cross-reference, and choose Cross-Reference Options from the Hyperlinks panel menu.

Last updated 6/13/2015

188
Text

2 Edit the cross-reference, and then click OK.

Delete cross-references
When you delete a cross-reference, the source cross-reference is converted to text.
1 In the Cross-References section of the Hyperlinks panel, select the cross-reference or cross-references you want to

delete.
2 Click the Delete icon, or choose Delete Hyperlink/Cross-Reference from the panel menu.
3 Click Yes to confirm.

To completely remove a cross-reference, you can also select the cross-reference source and delete it.

Editing cross-reference source text
You can edit cross-reference source text. The advantage of editing cross-reference text is that you can change tracking
or word spacing as needed for copyfitting, or make other changes. The disadvantage is that if you update or relink the
cross-reference, any local formatting changes are removed.

Copyfitting text
Copyfitting text
InCopy keeps track of several text statistics and makes this data available in the Copyfit Info toolbar. As you write your
story, the Copyfit Info toolbar automatically displays the number of lines, words, and characters, and the vertical depth
at the bottom of the work area for both linked and stand-alone stories in Galley and Layout views.
Note: You can make the Copyfit Info toolbar a floating panel. (See Use toolbars.)
For linked InCopy documents or for stand-alone documents with a Depth setting, the Copyfit Progress Info box
indicates the precise amount by which a story is too long or too short. If the story doesn’t fill the frames assigned to it,
the copyfit box turns blue and displays a count. The length of the blue bar indicates roughly what percentage of the
frame is currently filled with text. The shorter the blue bar, the more text you need to add to fill the space.

If the text overflows the assigned frame space, a copyfit line indicates where overset text begins, and the Copyfit
Progress Info box turns red and displays the amount you need to cut to fit copy into the frame. (See Editing overset
text.)
Note: The red bar is always the same length. It does not reflect any percentage of the space available.

Last updated 6/13/2015

189
Text

The Copyfit Info toolbar also includes options for displaying the number of lines, words, and characters, and the
vertical depth in the current selection, from the beginning of the current story to the current insertion point, or from
the current insertion point to the end of the current story. (See Customize Copyfit Info settings.)
When you show hidden characters (choose Type > Show Hidden Characters), InCopy displays a number sign (#) at the
end of the last character to indicate the end of the text flow for a story. (See View hidden characters.)

Customize Copyfit Info settings
• To add Copyfit Info controls, click the triangle on the right side of the Copyfit Info toolbar, choose Customize, select
which items you want to appear in the toolbar, and then click OK.
• To include footnote text in text statistics, choose Include Footnotes In Text Statistics from the Copyfit Info toolbar
menu.
• To define word count based on a specified number of characters rather than actual words, choose Define Word
Count from the Copyfit Info toolbar menu, select Count Every, specify the number of characters, and click OK.
• To stop updating text statistics while you type, turn off Update Info Automatically from the Copyfit Info toolbar
menu.
• To display additional statistics such as kanji, kana, and romanji characters, choose Show Details from the Copyfit
Info toolbar menu.

Editing overset text
If a story is linked to an InDesign layout, the story is limited to the frames the designer specifies. If you specified a Depth
setting when creating a stand-alone InCopy document, the story is limited to that depth. When you type more than the
allowed length of text, the text is overset. When the story is underset, there is space available to be filled with text. As
you write and edit, you can tell when your story fits perfectly into the InDesign layout. You can still edit overset text.
In Galley view or Story view, overset text is set apart from the rest of the story by a copyfit break line. You use the same
procedures to write and edit the text, whether it is above or below the copyfit break line.
In Layout view, overset text is not visible, but the Copyfit Progress Info box indicates the number of overset lines in the
document.
If you’re writing or editing a threaded story in Layout view, you don’t need to do anything special when you reach the
end of a frame. The insertion point automatically follows the story thread from frame to frame as you type.

Show or hide the depth ruler
❖ In Galley or Story view, choose View > Show Depth Ruler or Hide Depth Ruler.

Last updated 6/13/2015

190
Text

To change the units of measurement used for the depth ruler, change the Vertical setting in Units & Increments
Preferences.

Editing text
Select text
❖ Using the Type tool, do one of the following:

• Drag the I-bar cursor over a character, word, or an entire text block to select it.
• Double-click a word to select it. Spaces next to the word are not selected.
• Double-click a character to select contiguous characters of the same type. For example, when Roman text, kanji,
and hiragana all appear in a paragraph, and you double-click on a kanji, the adjoining kanji in the same string
will be selected.
• Triple-click anywhere in a line to select a line. If the Triple Click To Select A Line preferences option is deselected,
triple-clicking selects the entire paragraph.
• If the Triple Click To Select A Line option is selected, quadruple-click anywhere in a paragraph to select the entire
paragraph.
• Quintuple-click to select the entire story, or click anywhere in a story and choose Edit > Select All.
Note: If you select text that contains a note anchor, using any of the above procedures, the note and its contents are also
selected.
If you cannot select text in a frame, the text frame could be on a locked layer or on a master page. Try unlocking the
layer or going to the master page. The text frame may also be beneath another text frame or transparent object. See
Select text in a frame that is covered.

Change what triple-clicking does
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Type (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Type (Mac OS).
2 Select Triple Click To Select A Line to enable triple-clicking to select a line (this is the default). Deselect this option

if you want triple-clicking to select a paragraph.

Select text in a frame that is covered
1 Using the Selection tool

, hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) and click to select the text frame.

2 Select the Type tool, and then click inside the text frame or select text.

Paste text
You can paste text from another application or from Adobe InCopy.
If the insertion point is not inside a text frame when you paste text into InDesign, a new plain text frame will be created.
If the insertion point is inside a text frame, the text will be pasted inside that frame. If you have text selected when you
paste, the pasted text will overwrite the selected text.

Last updated 6/13/2015

191
Text

When you use Edit > Paste Without Grid Format to paste text into a frame grid, the pasted text retains its font, font size,
and character spacing settings of the copied text. You can select text and choose Edit > Apply Grid Format to format
the pasted text according to the character attributes of the frame grid.

Paste text from another application
1 To preserve formatting and information such as styles and index markers, open the Clipboard Handling section of

the Preferences dialog box, and select All Information under Paste. To remove these items and other formatting
when pasting, select Text Only.
2 Cut or copy text in another application or in an InCopy document.
3 If you like, select text or click in a text frame. Otherwise, the text will be pasted into its own new frame.
4 Do one of the following:

• Choose Edit > Paste. If the pasted text doesn’t include all the formatting, you may need to change settings in the
Import Options dialog box for RTF documents.
• Choose Edit > Paste Without Formatting. (Paste Without Formatting is dimmed if you paste text from another
application when Text Only is selected in Clipboard Handling Preferences.)
• Choose Edit > Paste Without Grid Format.
You can also drag text from another application and drop it into an InDesign document, or you can insert a text file or
word-processing file into an InDesign document directly from Windows Explorer or Mac OS Finder. The text will be
added to a new frame. Shift-dragging removes the formatting. The option you select in the Clipboard Handling section of
the Preferences dialog box determines whether information such as index markers and swatches is preserved.

Adjust spacing automatically when pasting text
When you paste text, spaces can be automatically added or removed, depending on the context. For example, if you cut
a word and then paste it between two words, a space appears before and after the word. If you paste that word at the
end of a sentence, before the period, a space is not added.
Note: This feature is used primarily for working with Roman text. Also, this feature is available only when the Roman text
to be pasted is set to a Roman language in the Character panel.
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Type (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Type (Mac OS).
2 Select Adjust Spacing Automatically When Cutting And Pasting Words, and then click OK.

Paste text to a frame grid
You can paste text that retains its source formatting attributes. When you copy text with modified attributes from one
frame grid and paste to a different frame grid, the text will be pasted with only those changed attributes preserved. You
can also paste without grid formatting.
1 Cut or copy text in another application or in an InCopy document.
2 In the frame grid, display the text insertion point or select a block of text.
3 Do one of the following:

• To paste text that conforms to the grid format, choose Edit > Paste.
• To paste text without grid formatting, choose Edit > Paste Without Grid Format.
You can always apply grid formatting later by choosing Edit > Apply Grid Format. The grid format attributes specified
in the Named Grids panel will be applied to the text.

Last updated 6/13/2015

192
Text

Apply grid format to text
You can apply the grid format to any text that doesn’t conform to the grid format.
1 Select the text.
2 Choose Edit > Apply Grid Format.

Change the text direction
1 Select the text frame.
2 Do either of the following:

• Choose Type > Writing Direction > Horizontal or Vertical.
• Choose Type > Story to show the Story panel. Select Horizontal or Vertical for Story Direction.
In Galley view and Story view, text appears as horizontal, even if Vertical is selected. In Layout View, text is vertical if
Vertical is selected.
A vertical text frame or frame grid is converted to a horizontal one, or a horizontal text frame or frame grid is converted
to a vertical one. Changing this causes the entire story to be changed, and all frames threaded to the selected frames
will be affected.
Note: To change the direction of individual characters in a frame, use the Tate-chu-yoko feature, or use the Character
Rotation feature in the Character panel.

Drag and drop text
You can use the mouse to drag and drop text in the Story Editor or in the Layout View. You can even drag text from the
Story Editor to the layout window (or vice versa), or into some dialog boxes such as Find/Change. Dragging the text
from a locked or checked-in story copies the text rather than moves it. You can also copy text or create a new frame
when dragging and dropping text.
You can use the mouse to drag and drop text in Galley View, Story View, or Layout View. You can even drag text into
some dialog boxes, such as Find/Change. Dragging text from a locked or checked-in story copies the text rather than
moves it. You can also copy text when dragging.
Jeff Witchel provides a video tutorial about drag and drop at Using InDesign Drag and Drop Text.
1 To enable drag and drop, choose Edit > Preferences > Type (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Type (Mac OS),

select Enable In Layout View, Enable In Story Editor (InDesign), or Enable In Galley/Story View (InCopy), and then
click OK.
2 Select the text that you want to move or copy.
3 Hold the pointer over the selected text until the drag and drop icon

appears, and then drag the text.

As you drag, the selected text remains in place, but a vertical bar indicates where the text will appear when you
release the mouse button. The vertical bar appears in any text frame that you drag the mouse over.
4 Do any of the following:

• To drop the text in a new location, position the vertical bar where you would like the text to appear and release
the mouse button.
• To drop the text in a new frame, hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) after you start dragging, and
then release the mouse button before releasing the key.

Last updated 6/13/2015

193
Text

• To drop the text without formatting, hold down Shift after you start dragging, and then release the mouse button
before releasing the key.
• To copy the text, hold down Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) after you start dragging, and then release the
mouse button before releasing the key.
You can also use a combination of these modifier keys. For example, to copy unformatted text to a new frame, hold
down Alt+Shift+Ctrl (Windows) or Option+Shift+Command (Mac OS) after you start dragging.
If the text you drop doesn’t have the proper spacing, select the Adjust Spacing Automatically option in Type Preferences.

Transpose characters
If you transpose two adjacent characters as you type, you can correct them with the Transpose command. For example,
if you typed 1243 instead of 1234, the Transpose command switches the 4 and the 3.
1 Place the insertion point between the two characters you want to transpose.
2 Choose Edit > Transpose.

Note: The Transpose command applies only to characters and numbers within stories. It cannot move InCopy note anchors,
tables, spaces, or other nonprinting characters. You cannot use Transpose in a locked story.

View hidden characters
When you’re editing text, it’s often useful to see nonprinting characters, such as spaces, tabs, and paragraph symbols.
These characters are visible only in a document window; they won’t output or print.

❖ Do one of the following:

• Choose Type > Show Hidden Characters. A check mark appears next to the menu command.
• Click the Show Hidden Characters button

on the horizontal toolbar.

Edit text on a master page
In InDesign documents, a master page is a kind of template that applies to multiple pages. Master pages typically specify
only common layout elements that appear on all pages of the document, such as the margins, page numbers, headers,
and footers. You can use InCopy to edit the text on an InDesign master page if the text is a linked file. However, you
cannot change any of the frame attributes controlled by the master, and you cannot edit master-page text from any other
(regular) pages in the document.

Last updated 6/13/2015

194
Text

Note: If you can’t click an insertion point into a nonlocked text frame on a regular page, that text might be on a master
page. Check with the person who set up the frames and with your design team.
1 Choose View > Layout View if your document is not already in Layout view.
2 Choose the master page from the page box at the lower left of the document window.

3 On the master page, select the text that you want to edit, and make the changes.

To edit text on a master page, the master page must include managed stories that are checked out.

Undo actions
You can undo or redo up to several hundred of the most recent actions. The exact number of actions you can undo is
limited by the amount of RAM available and the kinds of actions you have performed. The record of recent actions is
erased when you save, close, quit, or exit, so they can no longer be undone. You can also cancel an operation before it
completes, or revert to a previously saved version.
❖ Do one of the following:

• To undo the most recent change, choose Edit > Undo [action]. (You cannot undo certain actions, such as
scrolling.)
• To redo an action you just undid, choose Edit > Redo [action].
• To undo all changes made since the last time you saved the project, choose File > Revert Content.
• To stop a change that InCopy hasn’t finished processing (for example, if you see a progress bar), press the Escape
key.
• To close a dialog box without applying changes, click Cancel.

Jump to a position marker
A position marker is like a bookmark, and it is used to mark a location in a document. This is useful if you need to return
to that location quickly or frequently. A document can have only one position marker.
1 Place the insertion point where you want to insert the marker.
2 Choose Edit > Position Marker > Insert Marker. (If you’ve already inserted a marker, choose Replace Marker.)

To jump to the marker from anywhere in the document, choose Edit > Position Marker > Go To Marker.
To clear the marker, choose Edit > Position Marker > Remove Marker. The marker is removed automatically when you
close and reopen the document.

Add column, frame, and page breaks
Control column, frame, and page breaks by inserting special break characters in the text.
1 Using the Type tool, click to place the insertion point where you want the break to occur.
2 Choose Type > Insert Break Character, and then choose a break option from the submenu.

Last updated 6/13/2015

195
Text

You can also create breaks by using the Enter key on the numeric keypad. For a column break, press Enter; for a frame
break, press Shift+Enter; and for a page break, press Ctrl+Enter (Windows) or Command+Return (Mac OS).
To remove a break character, choose Type > Show Hidden Characters so that you can see nonprinting characters, and
then select and delete the break character.
Note: If you create a break by changing paragraph settings (as in the Keep Options dialog box), the break precedes the
paragraph that contains the setting. If you create a break using a special character, the break occurs immediately after the
special character.

Break options
The following options appear on the Type > Insert Break Character menu:
Column break

Flows text to the next column in the current text frame. If the frame has only one column, the text goes to the next
threaded frame.
Frame break

Flows text to the next threaded text frame, regardless of the current text frame’s column setup.
Page break

Flows text to the next page with a text frame threaded to the current text frame.
Odd page break

Flows text to the next odd-numbered page with a text frame threaded to the current text frame.
Even page break

Flows text to the next even-numbered page with a text frame threaded to the current text frame.
Paragraph Return

Inserts a paragraph return (the same as pressing Enter or Return).
Forced Line Break

Forces a line to break where the character is inserted, starting a new line without starting a new paragraph (the same as
pressing Shift+Enter or Shift+Return). A forced line break is also called a soft return.
Discretionary Line Break

Indicates where a line of text should break if the line needs to break. A discretionary line break is similar to a
discretionary hyphen, only no hyphen is added where the line breaks.
Related break options are available in the Keep Options dialog box and in the Paragraph Style Options dialog box.

Use conditional text
Conditional text is a way to create different versions of the same document. After you create conditions, you apply them
to ranges of text. You can then create different versions of documents by showing and hiding conditions. For example,
if you’re creating a computer manual, you can create separate conditions for Mac OS and Windows. Before you print
the Mac OS version of the user guide, you can show all text to which the “Mac” condition is applied and hide all text to
which the “Windows” condition is applied. You can then reverse the condition states for printing the user guide for
Windows.

Last updated 6/13/2015

196
Text

A All conditions shown B Conditional indicators

A “Mac” condition hidden B Hidden condition symbols

Conditions can be applied only to text. You can make anchored objects conditional, but only by selecting the anchored
object marker. You can apply conditions to text within table cells, but you cannot apply conditions to table cells,
columns, or rows. You cannot apply conditions to text in locked InCopy stories.
For a video tutorial on using conditional text, see www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4026_id.

Planning conditional documents
When planning a project with conditional text, examine the nature of the material and look at how several people can
take turns working with it if the document is handed off. Plan to treat conditional text consistently to make the
document easier to use and maintain. Use the following guidelines.
Number of versions Define how many versions your finished project will contain. For example, if you’re creating a

manual that describes a program that runs on both Windows and Mac OS platforms, you might want to produce at least
two versions: a Windows version and a Mac OS version. If you want to produce these versions with editorial comments
sprinkled in the text during the review process, you’ll want even more versions: Mac OS with comments, Mac OS
without comments, Windows with comments, and Windows without comments.
For documents with many conditions, you can define condition sets that can be applied to the document for quick
versioning.
Number of condition tags required Decide how many condition tags you need to produce the desired versions. A

version of a document is defined by a unique set of condition tags. For example, a version of a finished Windows manual
might be defined by having a Windows condition tag showing, a Mac OS condition tag hidden, and a Comments
condition tag hidden. In this example, you would need to decide whether to use one condition tag for Windows

Last updated 6/13/2015

197
Text

comments and another for Mac OS comments, or whether to use a single condition tag for both Windows and Mac OS
comments.
Organization of content Evaluate the extent to which the document can be conditional and how you can organize the
material to simplify development and maintenance. For example, you might be able to organize a book so that
conditional text is limited to a few documents. Or you might choose to keep versions of a particular chapter in separate
files rather than in conditional text, and then use a different book file for each version of the book.

In some instances, such as when working with multiple languages, you may want to create separate layers that you can
show or hide rather than using conditions, with each layer including text from a different language.
Tagging strategy Determine the smallest unit of conditional text. For example, if a document will be translated to

another language, a whole sentence should be the smallest amount of text you make conditional. Because word order
often changes during translation, using conditional text for part of a sentence could complicate translation.
Inconsistency in applying conditions to spaces and punctuation can result in extra spacing or misspelled words. Decide
whether to make spaces and punctuation conditional. If conditional text begins or ends with punctuation, make the
punctuation conditional too. This makes the text easier to read when you're viewing more than one version.
To avoid word spacing problems, such as having an unconditional space followed by a conditional space, set standards
for handling spaces following conditional text (either always conditional or always unconditional).
To avoid confusion, decide the order in which conditional text will appear and use this order throughout the document.
Indexes and cross-references When indexing a document, pay attention to whether index markers are placed inside or
outside conditional text. Keep in mind that index markers in hidden conditional text are not included in the generated
index.

If you create a cross-reference to conditional text, make sure that the source text has the same condition. For example,
if you add a cross-reference in a “Windows” paragraph and the text anchor appears in a “Mac” condition, the crossreference is unresolved when the “Mac” condition is hidden. “HT” appears next to the cross-reference in the Hyperlinks
panel.
If you create a cross-reference to a paragraph in which some text is conditional and then change the visibility settings
of that condition, update the cross-reference.

Create conditions
Conditions you create are saved in the current document. If no documents are open when you create a condition, that
condition appears in all new documents you create.
You can make conditional text easy to identify by specifying condition indicators, such as wavy red underlines.
In managed InCopy files, you can apply existing conditions, but you cannot create or delete conditions. You can hide
or show conditional text in InCopy, but the changes do not appear in InDesign when the managed file is checked in. In
InCopy standalone documents, you can create, apply, and change the visibility of conditions as in InDesign.
1 Choose Window > Type & Tables > Conditional Text to display the Conditional Text panel.
2 Choose New Condition from the Conditional Text panel menu, and type a name for the condition.
3 In the Indicator group, specify the appearance of the indicator to which the condition is applied.

By default, indicators (such as wavy red lines) are set to appear in the document but not be printed or output. You
can choose an option from the Indicators menu in the Conditional Text panel to hide indicators or to print and
output them, which can be useful for review purposes.
4 Click OK.

Last updated 6/13/2015

198
Text

Apply conditions to text
You can apply multiple conditions to the same text. By default, condition indicators identify conditional text. However,
if indicators are hidden, you can use the Conditional Text panel to determine which conditions have been applied to
the current text. A solid check mark indicates the condition is applied to the current text. A dim check mark indicates
that the condition is applied only to part of the selection.
1 Select the text to which you want to apply the condition.
2 In the Conditional Text panel (Windows > Type & Tables > Conditional Text), do any of the following:

• To apply a condition, click the condition, or click the box next to the condition name.
• To apply a condition and remove other conditions applied to the text, Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac
OS) a condition.
• To remove a condition, click the box next to the condition name to remove the check mark. Or, click
[Unconditional] to remove all conditions from the selected text.
Note: You cannot apply keyboard shortcuts to specific conditions. However, you can apply conditions using Quick Apply.

Show or hide conditions
When you hide a condition, all text to which that condition is applied is hidden. Hiding conditions often causes the
page numbering to change in a document or book. You can use the Smart Text Reflow feature to add and remove pages
automatically as you hide and show conditions.
Hidden conditional text is generally ignored in the document. For example, hidden text is not printed or exported,
index markers in hidden conditional text are not included in a generated index, and hidden conditional text is not
included when searching or spell-checking text.
When you hide a condition, the hidden text is stored in a hidden condition symbol
. If you select text that contains
a hidden condition symbol and try to delete it, InCopy prompts you to confirm that you want to delete the hidden
conditional text. You cannot apply other conditions, styles, or formatting to hidden conditional text.
If text has several conditions applied to it and at least one of those conditions is shown while another is hidden, the text
is not hidden.

• To show or hide individual conditions, click the visibility box next to a condition name. The eye icon indicates the
condition is shown.
• To show or hide all conditions, choose Show All or Hide All from the Conditional Text panel menu.

Use condition sets
A condition set captures the visibility settings for all conditions so that you can quickly apply different document
renditions. For example, suppose you have a complex document with platform conditions for Mac OS, Windows XP,
Vista, UNIX , language conditions for English, French, German, and Spanish, and editorial conditions such as Editorial
Review and Internal Comments. For reviewing the Vista version in French, you can create a set that shows only the
Vista, French, and Editorial Review conditions, and hides all the rest.
While sets aren’t necessary to do this, they help you quickly and reliably change different condition visibility settings.
1 Apply conditions to text as necessary.
2 If the Set menu doesn’t appear in the Conditional Text panel, choose Show Options from the Conditional Text panel

menu.
3 In the Conditional Text panel, make the conditions visible or hidden as needed.
4 Choose Create New Set from the Set menu, specify a name for the set, and click OK.

Last updated 6/13/2015

199
Text

The new set becomes the active set.
5 Do any of the following:

• To apply the condition set to a document, choose the condition set name from the Set menu.
• To override a condition set, select the set to make it active, and change the visibility setting of any condition. A
plus sign (+) appears next to the condition set. Choose the condition set again to remove overrides. Choose
Redefine “[Condition Set]” to update the condition set with the new visibility settings.
• To delete a condition set, select the condition set, and then choose Delete “[Condition Set].” Deleting a condition
set does not delete the set’s conditions, nor does it remove the conditions from wherever they are applied.

Manage conditions
❖ Do any of the following:
Delete a condition Select a condition and click the Delete Condition icon at the bottom of the Conditional Text
panel. Specify a condition to replace the deleted condition and click OK. The condition you specify is applied to all
text to which the deleted condition was applied.

To delete multiple conditions, Shift-click to select contiguous conditions, or Ctrl-click (Windows) or Commandclick (Mac OS) to select non-contiguous conditions, and then click the Delete Condition icon.
Remove a condition from text Removing a condition tag from text is different from deleting a tag from a document.

When you remove a tag from text, the tag remains in the document so it can be applied again later.
To remove a condition from text, select the text and click the box next to the condition to remove the check mark,
or click [Unconditional] to remove all conditions from the selected text.
Load (import) conditions Choose Load Conditions (to load only conditions) or Load Conditions And Sets from the

Conditional Text panel menu. Select the InDesign document from which you want to import the conditions, and
click Open. Loaded conditions and sets replace any condition or set that has an identical name.
You cannot load conditions from an InCopy file in InDesign, but you can load conditions from an InDesign file in
both InDesign and InCopy.
Loaded sets ignore the visibility settings of the conditions currently in the Conditional Text panel.
Synchronize conditions in a book To make sure you’re using the same conditions in all documents in a book, create
the conditions you want in the style source document, select Conditional Text Settings in the Synchronize Options
dialog box, and then synchronize the book.
Show or hide condition indicators Choose Show or Hide from the Indicators menu in the Conditional Text panel to

show or hide condition indicators. If you’re showing one version and want to see which areas are conditional, show
the condition indicators. If you find the condition indicators distracting while viewing the layout, hide the condition
indicators. Choose Show And Print if you want the condition indicators to be printed and output.
Change a condition name In the Conditional Text panel, click a condition, pause, and then click the condition name

to select it. Type a different name.
Edit condition indicators In the Conditional Text panel, double-click a condition, or select a condition and choose

Condition Options from the panel menu. Specify indicator settings, and click OK.

Last updated 6/13/2015

200
Text

Find and change conditional text
Use the Find/Change dialog box to find text to which one or more conditions have been applied and replace it with one
or more other conditions.
1 Show any conditional text you want included in the search.

Hidden text is excluded from the search.
2 Choose Edit > Find/Change.
3 If the Find Format and Change Format boxes don’t appear at the bottom of the dialog box, click More Options.
4 Click the Find Format box to display the Find Format Settings dialog box. Under Conditions, select [Any Condition]

to search for text in which any conditon is applied, [Unconditional] to search for text in which no condition is
applied, or select the specific condition or conditions you want to search for. Click OK.
This feature finds text that perfectly matches the selected conditions. For example, if you select both Condition 1
and Condition 2, text to which only one of the conditions are applied isn’t found, nor is text found to which these
two conditions and another is applied.
5 Click the Change Format box to display the Change Format Settings dialog box. Specify the different formatting

option, such as a condition or a character style, and then click OK.
If you select the Conditions section in the Change Format Settings dialog box, the [Any Condition] makes no
changes to the found conditional text. This option is useful if you want to apply different formatting, such as a
character style. Select [Unconditional] to remove all conditions from the found text. If you select a specific
condition, specify whether you want it to replace any condition applied to the found text or be added to it.
6 Click Find, and then use the Change, Change/Find, or Change All buttons to replace the condition.

More Help topics
Keys for navigating through and selecting text
Keys for working with text
Import grid formats from other documents
Use tate-chu-yoko
Rotate half-width characters in vertical text
Keys for working with text
Ways to control paragraph breaks
Use Smart Text Reflow

Find/Change
Find/Change overview
The Find/Change dialog box contains tabs that let you specify what you want to find and change.

Last updated 6/13/2015

201
Text

A Find/Change tabs B Find a tab character C Replace with an em dash D Search options E Metacharacters menu

Text Search for and change specific occurrences of characters, words, groups of words, or text formatted a certain way.

You can also search for and replace special characters such as symbols, markers, and white space characters. Wildcard
options help to broaden your search.
GREP Use advanced, pattern-based search techniques to search for and replace text and formatting.
Glyph Search for and replace glyphs using Unicode or GID/CID values, especially useful to search for and replace
glyphs in Asian languages.
Object Search for and replace formatting effects and attributes in objects and frames. For example, you can find objects

with a 4-pt stroke and replace the stroke with a drop shadow.
Transliterate You can also convert the character type of Asian-language text. For example, you can search for half-

width katakana and replace it with full-width katakana in Japanese text.
For a video tutorial on finding and changing text, objects, and expressions, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0080.

Find and change text
If you want to list, find, and replace fonts in your document, you might want to use the Find Font command instead of
the Find/Change command.

Last updated 6/13/2015

202
Text

Find and change text
1 To search a range of text or a story, select the text or place the insertion point in the story. To search more than one

document, open the documents.
2 Choose Edit > Find/Change, and then click the Text tab.
3 Specify the range of your search from the Search menu, and click icons to include locked layers, master pages,

footnotes, and other items in the search.
4 In the Find What box, describe what you want to search for:

•

Type or paste the text you want to find.

• To search for or replace tabs, spaces, or other special characters, select a representative character (metacharacter)
from the pop-up menu to the right of the Find What box. You can also choose wildcard options such as Any Digit
or Any Character.

• Use a predefined query to find and replace text. (See Find/change items using queries.)
5 In the Change To box, type or paste the replacement text. You can also select a representative character from the

pop-up menu to the right of the Change To box.
6 Click Find.
7 To continue searching, click Find Next, Change (to change the current occurrence), Change All (a message indicates

the total number of changes), or Change/Find (to change the current occurrence and search for the next one).
8 Click Done.

If you don’t get the search results you expected, make sure that you clear any formatting you may have included in a
previous search. You may also need to expand your search. For example, you may be searching only a selection or a
story instead of the document. Or, you may be searching for text that appears on an item, such as a locked layer,
footnote, or hidden conditional text, that is currently excluded from the search.
If you change your mind about replacing text, choose Edit > Undo Replace Text (or Undo Replace All Text).
To find the next occurrence of a previously searched-for phrase without having to open the Find/Change dialog box,
choose Edit > Find Next. In addition, previous search strings are stored in the Find/Change dialog box. You can select
a search string from the menu to the right of the option.

Last updated 6/13/2015

203
Text

Find and change formatted text
1 Choose Edit > Find/Change.
2 If the Find Format and Change Format options don’t appear, click More Options.
3 Click the Find Format box, or click the Specify Attributes To Find icon

to the right of the Find Format Settings

section.
4 On the left side of the Find Format Settings dialog box, select a type of formatting, specify the format attributes, and

then click OK.
Some OpenType formatting options appear in both the OpenType Options and Basic Character Formats (Position
menu) sections. For information on OpenType and other formatting attributes, search for the related topic in
InCopy Help.
Note: To search for (or replace with) formatting only, leave the Find What or Change To box blank.
5 If you want to apply formatting to the text found, click the Change Format box, or click the Specify Attributes To

in the Change Format Settings section. Then select a type of formatting, specify the format
Change icon
attributes, and click OK.
6 Use the Find and Change buttons to format the text.

If you specify formatting for your search criteria, info icons appear above the Find What or Change To boxes. These
icons indicate that formatting attributes have been set and that the find or change operation will be restricted
accordingly.
To quickly remove all formatting attributes in the Find Format Settings or Change Format Settings sections, click the
Clear button.

Common Find/Change techniques
Wildcard searches Specify wildcards, such as Any Digit or Any White Space, to broaden your search. For example,

typing “s^?ng” in the Find What box searches for words beginning with an “s” and ending with “ng,” such as “sing,”
“sang,” “song,” and “sung.” You can either type wildcard characters or choose an option from the Wildcards submenu in
the pop-up menu next to the Find What text field.
Clipboard for metacharacter searches To search for metacharacters such as em dashes or bullet characters, you may

want to select the text first and paste it into the Find What box to spare the trouble of entering metacharacters. InCopy
automatically converts pasted special characters to their metacharacter equivalent.
Replace with clipboard contents You can replace search items with either formatted or unformatted content copied to

the clipboard. You can even replace text with a graphic you copied. Simply copy the item, and then, in the Find/Change
dialog box, choose an option from the Other submenu from the pop-up menu to the right of the Change To box.
Find and remove unwanted text To remove unwanted text, define the text you want to remove in the Find What box

and leave the Change To box empty (make sure that no formatting is set in this box).
XML tagging You can apply XML tags to text you search for.

Notes on finding and changing text in InCopy
• If the Track Changes command is turned on when you are changing or replacing text, all added and deleted text is
tracked.
• All finding and changing procedures work essentially the same way in Galley, Story, and Layout views, whether you
work with a linked or stand-alone story. If you work with a linked story, you’re limited to character and paragraph
styles defined in InDesign. When you work in Galley or Story view, you cannot see all of the typographical effects
you apply. You can see these effects only in Layout view.

Last updated 6/13/2015

204
Text

• In Galley view or Story view, the Find/Change command omits all collapsed stories. However, if you choose Change
All, collapsed stories are affected. For best results, use Find/Change in Layout View.
• The Include Note Content in Find/Change Operations in Notes preferences determines whether notes are searched.
If this option is selected, you can use the Find/Change command to search notes in Galley and Story views, not in
Layout view. Closed notes and footnotes are omitted from the search.

Search options for finding and changing text
Search menu Contains options that determine the range of the search.

Documents
Search the entire document or All Documents to search all open documents.
Story
Search all text in the currently selected frame, including text in other threaded text frames and overset text. Select
Stories to search stories in all selected frames. This option appears only if a text frame is selected or an insertion point
is placed.
To End Of Story
Search from the insertion point. This option appears only if an insertion point is placed.
Selection
Search only selected text. This option appears only if text is selected.
Include Locked Layers

Searches for text on layers that have been locked using the Layer Options dialog box. You cannot replace text on locked
layers.
Include Locked Stories

Searches for text in stories that have been checked out as part of an InCopy workflow. You cannot replace text in locked
stories.
Include Hidden Layers

Searches for text on layers that have been hidden using the Layer Options dialog box. When text on a hidden layer is
found, you can see highlighting where the text appears, but you cannot see the text. You can replace text on hidden
layers.
Text in a hidden condition is always omitted from searching.
Include Master Pages

Searches for text on master pages.
Include Footnotes

Searches footnote text.
Case Sensitive

Searches for only the word or words that exactly match the capitalization of the text in the Find What box. For example,
a search for PrePress won’t find Prepress, prepress, or PREPRESS.
Whole Word

Last updated 6/13/2015

205
Text

(Roman text only) Disregards search characters if they are part of a Roman word. For example, if you are searching for
any as a whole word, InDesign disregards many.
Whole Word

Disregards search characters if they are part of another word. For example, if you search for any as a whole word,
InDesign disregards many.
Kana Sensitive

Distinguishes between hiragana and katakana. For example, if you search for Tango in hiragana, InDesign disregards
Tango in katakana.
Full-Width/Half-Width Sensitive

Distinguishes between half-width and full-width characters. For example, if you search for ka in half-width katakana,
InDesign disregards ka in full-width katakana.

Search using GREP expressions
On the GREP tab of the Find/Change dialog box, you can construct GREP expressions to find alphanumeric strings
and patterns in long documents or many open documents. You can enter the GREP metacharacters manually or choose
them from the Special Characters For Search list. GREP searches are case-sensitive by default.
InDesign Secrets provides a list of GREP resources at InDesign GREP.
1 Choose Edit > Find/Change, and click the GREP tab.
2 At the bottom of the dialog box, specify the range of your search from the Search menu, and click icons to include

locked layers, master pages, footnotes, and other items in the search.
3 In the Find What box, do any of the following to construct a GREP expression:

• Enter the search expression manually. (See Metacharacters for searching.)
• Click the Special Characters For Search icon to the right of the Find What option and choose options from the
Locations, Repeat, Match, Modifiers, and Posix submenus to help construct the search expression.
4 In the Change To box, type or paste the replacement text.
5 Click Find.
6 To continue searching, click Find Next, Change (to change the current occurrence), Change All (a message indicates

the total number of changes), or Change/Find (to change the current occurrence and search for the next one.
You can also use GREP Styles to apply a character style to text that conforms to a GREP expression. In fact, the GREP
Styles dialog box is a good way to test your GREP expression. Add the examples you want to find to a paragraph, and
then specify a character style and GREP expression in the GREP Styles dialog box. When you turn on Preview, you can edit
the expression until it affects all your examples properly.

Tips for constructing GREP searches
Here are some tips for constructing GREP expressions.

• Many searches under the GREP tab are similar to those under the Text tab, but be aware that you need to insert
different codes depending on which tab you’re using. In general, the Text tab metacharacters begin with a ^ (such
as ^t for a tab) and GREP tab metacharacters begin with a \ (such as \t for a tab). However, not all metacharacters
follow this rule. For example, a paragraph return is ^p in the Text tab and \r in the GREP tab. For a list of the
metacharacters used for the Text and GREP tabs, see Metacharacters for searching.

Last updated 6/13/2015

206
Text

• To search for a character that has symbolic meaning in GREP, enter a backslash (\) before the character to indicate
that the character that follows is literal. For example, a period ( . ) searches for any character in a GREP search; to
search for an actual period, enter “\.”
• Save the GREP search as a query if you intend to run it often or share it with someone else. (See Find/change items
using queries.)
• Use parentheses to divide your search into subexpressions. For example, if you want to search for “cat” or “cot,” you
can use the c(a|o)t string. Parentheses are especially useful to identify groupings. For example, searching for “the
(cat) and the (dog)” identifies “cat” as Found Text 1 and “dog” as Found Text 2. You can use the Found Text
expressions (such as $1 for Found Text 1) to change only part of the found text.

GREP search examples
Follow these examples to learn how to take advantage of GREP expressions.
Example 1: Finding text within quotation marks
Suppose you want to search for any word enclosed in quotation marks (such as “Spain”), and you want to remove the
quotation marks and apply a style to the word (so that it becomes Spain instead of “Spain”). The expression (")(\w+)(")
includes three groupings, as indicated by parentheses ( ). The first and third groupings search for any quotation mark,
and the second grouping searches for one or more word characters.
You can use the Found Text expressions to refer to these groupings. For example, $0 refers to all found text, and $2 refers
to only the second grouping. By inserting $2 in the Change To field and specifying a character style in the Change
Format field, you can search for a word within quotation marks, and then replace the word with a character style.
Because only $2 is specified, the $1 and $3 groupings are removed. (Specifying $0 or $1$2$3 in the Change To field
would apply the character style to the quotation marks as well.)

A Finds all word characters enclosed in quotation marks B The character style is applied to the second grouping (the word) while the first and
third groupings (open and close quotes) are removed C Character style specified

This example searches only for single words enclosed in quotation marks. If you want to search for phrases enclosed in
parentheses, add wildcard expressions, such as (\s*.*\w*\d*), which looks for spaces, characters, word characters, and
digits.

Last updated 6/13/2015

207
Text

Example 2: Phone numbers
InDesign includes a number of search presets that you can choose from the Queries menu. For example, you can choose
the Phone Number Conversion query, which looks like this:
$?(\d\d\d)$?[-. ]?(\d\d\d)[-. ]?(\d\d\d\d)
Phone numbers in the United States can appear in a variety of formats, such as 206-555-3982, (206) 555-3982,
206.555.3982, and 206 555 3982. This string looks for any of these variations. The first three digits (\d\d\d) of the phone
number may or may not be enclosed in parentheses, so a question mark appears after the parentheses: $? and $?. Note
that the backslash \ indicates that the actual parenthesis is being searched for and that it’s not part of a subexpression.
The brackets [ ] locate any character within them, so in this case, [-. ] finds either a hyphen, a period, or a space. The
question mark after the brackets indicate that the items within it are optional in the search. Finally, the digits are
enclosed in parentheses, which signify groupings that can be referred to in the Change To field.
You can edit the grouping references in the Change To field to suit your needs. For example, you could use these
expressions:
206.555.3982 = $1.$2.$3
206-555-3982 = $1-$2-$3
(206) 555-3982 = ($1) $2-$3
206 555 3982 = $1 $2 $3
Additional GREP examples
Experiment with the examples in this table to learn more about GREP searches.
Expression

Search string

Sample text

Matches (in bold)

Class of characters

[abc]

Maria cuenta bien.

Mariacuentabien.

[]

Finds the letter a, b, or c.

Beginning of paragraph

^~_.+

“We saw—or at least we think we
saw—a purple cow.”

This searches the beginning of the
paragraph (^) for an em dash (~_) —Konrad Yoes
followed by any character ( . ) one
or more times (+).

“We saw—or at least we think we
saw—a purple cow.”

Negative lookahead

InDesign (?!CS.*?)

(?!pattern)

The negative lookahead matches
the search string only if it is not
followed by the specified pattern.

Positive lookahead

InDesign (?=CS.*?)

(?=pattern)

The positive lookahead matches
the search string only if it is
followed by the specified pattern.

—Konrad Yoes

InDesign, InDesign 2.0, InDesign
CS, and InDesign CS2

Use similar patterns for negative
lookbehinds (?

Third Space

Quarter Space

Sixth Space

Flush Space

Hair Space

Nonbreaking Space

Nonbreaking Space (fixed width)

Thin Space

Figure Space

Punctuation Space

Last updated 6/13/2015

211
Text

Character:

Text tab metacharacter:

GREP tab metacharacter:

^ Clipboard Contents, Formatted

^ Clipboard Contents, Unformatted

Any Double Quotation Mark

Any Single Quotation Mark

Straight Double Quotation Mark

Double Left Quotation Mark

Double Right Quotation Mark

Straight Single Quotation Mark

Single Left Quotation Mark

Single Right Quotation Mark

Standard carriage return

Column Break

Frame Break

Page Break

Odd Page Break

Even Page Break

Discretionary Line Break

Right Indent Tab

Indent to Here

End Nested Style Here

Nonjoiner

* Running header (paragraph style) variable

* Running header (character style) variable

* Custom text variable

* Last page number variable

* Chapter number variable

* Creation date variable

* Modification date variable

* Output date variable

* File name variable

^l (lowercase L)

~l (lowercase L)

* Any Digit

* Any character that is not a digit

* Any Letter

[\l\u]

* Any Character

. (inserts period in Change To)

Last updated 6/13/2015

212
Text

Character:

Text tab metacharacter:

GREP tab metacharacter:

* White Space (any space or tab)

\s (Inserts space in Change To)

* Any character that is not a white space

* Any word character

* Any character that is not a word character

* Any uppercase letter

* Any character that is not an uppercase letter

* Any lowercase letter

* Any character that is not a lowercase letter

^ All Found Text

Found Text 1-9

$1 (specifies the number of the grouping
found, such as $3 for the third grouping;
groupings are enclosed in parentheses)

* Kanji

* Beginning of Word

* End of Word

* Word Boundary

* Opposite of Word Boundary

* Beginning of Paragraph

* End of Paragraph [location]

* Zero or One Time

* Zero or More Times

* One or More Times

* Zero or One Time (Shortest Match)

* Zero or More Times (Shortest Match)

* One or More Times (Shortest Match)

* Marking Subexpression

()

* Non-marking Subexpression

(?: )

* Character Set

[]

* Or

* Positive Lookbehind

(?<= )

* Negative Lookbehind

(? Find/Change.
2 Click the Transliterate tab.
3 At the bottom of the dialog box, specify the range from the Search menu, and click icons to determine whether items

such as locked layers, master pages, and footnotes are included in the search.
4 Specify the character type in Find What.
5 Specify the replacement character type in Change To. Depending on the character type specified in Find What, some

options in Change To may be unavailable. For example, if you select full-width hiragana in the Find What field, you
cannot select full-width roman symbols in the Change To field.
6 Click the Find Next button, and then click the Change button.

Find and change objects
You can use the Find/Change command to find and replace the attributes and effects applied to objects, graphics
frames, and text frames. For example, to give drop shadows a uniform color, transparency, and offset distance, you can
use the Find/Change command to search for and replace drop shadows throughout a document.
1 Choose Edit > Find/Change.

Last updated 6/13/2015

214
Text

2 Click the Object tab.
3 Click the Find Object Format box, or click the Specify Attributes To Find icon

4 On the left side of the Find Object Format Options dialog box, select a type of formatting, specify the format

attributes, and then click OK.
Make sure that the categories you want to search for are in the appropriate state. You can use one of three states for
each Effects category: turned on, turned off, or ignored. For example, setting Drop Shadow to On includes drop
shadow formatting in the search; setting Drop Shadow to Off searches for objects in which drop shadow formatting
is turned off; setting Drop Shadow to Ignore leaves drop shadows out of the search.
5 If you want to apply formatting to the object found, click the Change Object Format box, or click the Specify

in the Change Format Settings section. Then select a type of formatting, specify the
Attributes To Change icon
format attributes, and click OK.
6 Click the Find and Change buttons to format the objects.

Find and change glyphs
The Glyph section of the Find/Change dialog box is especially useful for replacing glyphs that share the same unicode
value with other similar glyphs, such as alternate glyphs.
InDesign Secrets provides a clear example about finding and changing glyphs at Finding and Changing Glyphs.
1 Choose Edit > Find/Change.
2 At the bottom of the dialog box, specify a range from the Search menu, and click icons to determine whether items

such as locked layers, master pages, and footnotes are included in the search.
3 Under Find Glyph, select the Font Family and Font Style in which the glyph is located.

The Font Family menu displays only those fonts that are applied to text in the current document. Fonts in unused
styles do not appear.
4 Do one of the following to enter the glyph you want to find in the Glyph box:

• Click the button beside the Glyph box, and then double-click a glyph on the panel. This panel works like the
Glyphs panel.
• Choose Unicode or GID/CID, and enter the code for the glyph.
You can use other methods to enter the glyph you want to find in the Glyph box. Select a glyph in the document
window and choose Load Selected Glyph In Find from the context menu, or select a glyph in the Glyphs panel and
choose Load Glyph In Find from the context menu.
5 Under Change Glyph, enter the replacement glyph by using the same techniques you use to enter the glyph you’re

searching for.
6 Click Find.
7 To continue searching, click Find Next, Change (to change the most recently found glyph), Change All (a message

indicates the total number of changes), or Change/Find (to change the current occurrence and search for the next
one).
8 Click Done.

Last updated 6/13/2015

215
Text

Find and change fonts
Use the Find Font command to search for and list the fonts used throughout your document. You can then replace any
fonts (except those in imported graphics) with any other fonts available on your system. You can even replace a font
that’s part of a text style. Note the following:

• A font name is listed once for its use in the layout and listed each time in imported graphics. For example, if you use
the same font three times in the layout and three times in imported graphics, it will be listed in the Find Font dialog
box four times—once for all layout instances, and three more times for each imported graphic. If fonts are not
completely embedded in graphics, the font name may not be listed in the Find Font dialog box.
• Find Font is not available in a Story Editor window.
• The Find Font dialog box displays icons to indicate the kinds of fonts or font conditions, such as Type 1 fonts
imported images
, TrueType fonts
, OpenType fonts
, and missing fonts
.

• You can find and change composite fonts, but you cannot change component fonts that are part of composite fonts.
• Use the Type > Find Font command to help ensure consistent output by analyzing font usage on pages and in
imported graphics. To find and change specific text attributes, characters, or styles, use the Edit > Find/Change
command instead.
1 Choose Type > Find Font.
2 Select one or more font names in the Fonts In Document list.
3 Do one of the following:

• To find the first occurrence in the layout of the font selected in the list, click Find First. The text using that font
moves into view. The Find First button is unavailable if the selected font is used in an imported graphic or if you
selected multiple fonts in the list.
• To select an imported graphic that uses a font marked in the list by an imported image icon
, click Find
Graphic. The graphic also moves into view. The Find Graphic button isn’t available if the selected font is used
only in the layout or if you selected multiple fonts in the Fonts In Document list.
4 To see details about a selected font, click More Info. To hide the details, click Less Info. The Info area is blank if you

selected multiple fonts in the list.
A font may be listed as Unknown if the file of the selected graphic doesn’t supply information about it. Fonts in
bitmap graphics (such as TIFF images) won’t appear in the list at all because they aren’t true characters.
5 To replace a font, select the new font you want to use from the Replace With list, and do one of the following:

• To change just one occurrence of the selected font, click Change. This option is not available if multiple fonts are
selected.
• To change the font in that occurrence, and then find the next instance, click Change/Find. This option is not
available if multiple fonts are selected.
• To change all instances of the font selected in the list, click Change All. If you want any paragraph or character
style that includes the font being searched for to be redefined, select Redefine Style When Changing All.
• To change all instances of the font selected in the list, click Change All. If you want any paragraph style, character
style, or named grid that includes the font being searched for to be redefined, select Redefine Style And Named
Grid When Changing All.
When there are no more occurrences of a font in your file, its name is removed from the Fonts In Document list.
Note: To change fonts in imported graphics, use the program that originally exported the graphic, and then replace the
graphic or update the link using the Links panel.
6 If you clicked Change, click Find Next to locate the next instance of the font.

Last updated 6/13/2015

216
Text

7 Click Done.

You can open the Find Font dialog box while preflighting a document. In the Preflight dialog box, switch to the Fonts
tab and click Find Font.
To view the system folder in which a font appears, select the font in the Find Font dialog box and choose Reveal In
Explorer (Windows) or Reveal In Finder (Mac OS).

Find/change items using queries
You can find and change text, objects, and glyphs by using or constructing a query. A query is a defined find-and-change
operation. InDesign offers several preset queries for changing punctuation formats and other useful actions, such as
changing telephone number formats. By saving a query you constructed, you can run it again and share it with others.

Search using queries
1 Choose Edit > Find/Change.
2 Choose a query from the Query list.

The queries are grouped by type.
3 Specify a range to search on the Search menu.

The search range is not stored with the query.
4 Click Find.
5 To continue searching, click Find Next, Change (to change the most recently found text or punctuation mark),

Change All (a message indicates the total number of changes), or Change/Find (to change text or punctuation marks
and continue your search).
After you select a search query, you can adjust the settings to fine-tune your search.

Save queries
Save a query in the Find/Change dialog box if you want to run it again or share it with others. The names of queries you
save appear in the Query list in the Find/Change dialog box.
1 Choose Edit > Find/Change.
2 Select Text, GREP, or a different tab to undertake the search you want.
3 Below the Search menu, click icons to determine whether items such as locked layers, master pages, and footnotes

are included in the search.
These items are included in the saved query. However, the range of the search isn’t saved with the query.
4 Define the Find What and Change To fields. (See Metacharacters for searchingand Search using GREP expressions.)
5 Click the Save Query button in the Find/Change dialog box and enter a name for the query.

If you use the name of an existing query, you are asked to replace it. Click Yes if you want to update the existing query.

Delete queries
❖ Select it on the Query list and click the Delete Query button.

Last updated 6/13/2015

217
Text

Load queries
Customized queries are stored as XML files. The names of customized queries appear in the Query list in the
Find/Change dialog box.
❖ To load a query that was given to you so that it appears in the Query list, copy the query file to the appropriate

location:
Mac OS Users\[username]\Library\Preferences\Adobe InCopy \[Version]\[Language]\Find-Change

Queries\[query type]
Windows XP Documents and Settings\[username]\Application Data\Adobe\InCopy \[Version]\[Language]\Find-

Change Queries\[query type]
Windows Vista and Windows 7 Users\[username]\AppData\Roaming\Adobe\InCopy \[Version]\[Language]\Find-

Change Queries\[query type]

More Help topics
Find/Change video
Create GREP styles

Footnotes
Create footnotes
A footnote consists of two linked parts: the footnote reference number that appears in text, and the footnote text that
appears at the bottom of the column. You can create footnotes or import them from Word or RTF documents.
Footnotes are automatically numbered as they are added to a document. Numbering restarts in each story. You can
control the numbering style, appearance, and layout of footnotes. You cannot add footnotes to tables or to footnote text.
The width of the footnote text is based on the width of the column containing the footnote reference marker. Footnotes
cannot space columns in a text frame.
You cannot create endnotes in InDesign. However, Bob Bringhurst provides a workaround for creating endnotes at
Endnotes in InDesign. Endnotes in converted Microsoft Word documents are formatted as text, not footnotes.
For a video tutorial on creating footnotes, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0218.
1 Place the insertion point where you want the footnote reference number to appear.
2 Choose Type > Insert Footnote.
3 Type the footnote text.

Last updated 6/13/2015

218
Text

A Reference number B Footnote text

As you type in Layout view, the footnote area expands while the text frame remains the same size. The footnote area
continues to expand upward until it reaches the line with the footnote reference. At that point, the footnote is split to
the next page, if possible. If the footnote cannot be split, and if more text is added than can fit in the footnote area, the
line containing the footnote reference is moved to the next page, or an overset icon appears. In such a case, you should
considering changing the text formatting.
When the insertion point is in a footnote, you can choose Type > Go To Footnote Reference to return to where you were
typing. If you use this option frequently, consider creating a keyboard shortcut.

Change footnote numbering and layout
Changes you make to footnote numbering and layout affect existing footnotes and all new ones.
Note: In InCopy, change footnote numbering and layout options only for standalone documents. The InDesign document’s
footnote settings will override any changes you make to a linked (managed) file in InCopy.
1 Choose Type > Document Footnote Options.
2 In the Numbering And Formatting tab, select options that determine the numbering scheme and formatting

appearance of the reference number and footnote text.
3 Click the Layout tab, and select options that control the look of the footnote section on the page.
4 Click OK.

Footnote numbering and formatting options
The following options appear in the Numbering And Formatting section of the Footnote Options dialog box:
Numbering Style Choose the numbering style for footnote reference numbers.
Start At Specify the number used for the first footnote in the story. Each story in a document begins with the same Start

At number. If you have multiple documents in a book with continued page numbering, you may want to start the
footnote numbering in each chapter to continue where the last chapter left off.
The Start At option is especially useful for documents in a book. Footnote numbering is not continued across
documents in a book.
Restart Numbering Every If you want numbering to restart within the document, select this option and choose Page,

Spread, or Section to determine when footnote numbering is restarted. Some numbering styles, such as asterisks (*),
work best when reset every page.
Show Prefix/Suffix In Select this option to show prefixes or suffixes in the footnote reference, the footnote text, or both.

Prefixes appear before the number (such as [1) and suffixes appear after the number (such as 1]). This option is
especially useful for placing footnotes within characters, such as [1]. Type a character or characters or select an option

Last updated 6/13/2015

219
Text

for Prefix, Suffix, or both. To select special characters, click the icons next to the Prefix and Suffix controls to display a
menu.
If you think the footnote reference number is too close to the preceding text, adding one of the space characters as a
prefix might improve the appearance. You can also apply a character style to the reference number.
Position This option determines the appearance of the footnote reference number, which is superscript by default. If

you prefer to format the number using a character style (such as a character style that includes OpenType superscript
settings), choose Apply Normal, and specify the character style.
This option determines the appearance of the footnote reference number, which is Ruby by default. Choosing Apply
Normal is useful if you want to format the reference number’s position using a character style.
Character Style You may want to choose a character style to format the footnote reference number. For example,

instead of using superscript, you might want to use a character style at a normal position with an elevated baseline. The
menu displays the character styles available in the Character Styles panel.
Paragraph Style You may want to choose a paragraph style that formats the footnote text for all footnotes in the
document. The menu displays the paragraph styles available in the Paragraph Styles panel. By default, the [Basic
Paragraph] style is used. Note that the [Basic Paragraph] style may not have the same appearance as the default font
settings for the document.
Separator The separator determines the white space that appears between the footnote number and the start of the
footnote text. To change the separator, first select or delete the existing separator, and then choose a new separator. You
can include multiple characters. To insert white space characters, use the appropriate metacharacter, such as ^m for em
space.

Footnote layout options
The following options appear in the Layout section of the Footnote Options dialog box:
Minimum Space Before First Footnote This option determines the minimum amount of space between the bottom of

the column and the first footnote line. You cannot use a negative value. Any Space Before setting in the footnote
paragraph is ignored.
Space Between Footnotes This option determines the distance between the last paragraph of one footnote and the first
paragraph of the next footnote in a column. You cannot use a negative value. The Space Before/Space After values in a
footnote’s paragraph apply only if the footnote includes multiple paragraphs.
First Baseline Offset This option determines the distance between the start of the footnote area (where the footnote

divider appears by default) and the first line of footnote text.
For information on the First Baseline options, see Change text frame properties .
Place End Of Story Footnotes At Bottom Of Text Select this option if you want the last column’s footnotes to appear just

below the text in the last frame of the story. If this option is not selected, any footnote in the last frame of the story
appears at the bottom of the column.
Allow Split Footnotes Select this option if you want footnotes to break across a column when the footnote exceeds the

amount of space available for it in that column. If splitting is not allowed, the line containing the footnote reference
number moves to the next column, or the text becomes overset.
If Allow Split Footnotes is turned on, you can still prevent an individual footnote from splitting by placing the insertion
point in the footnote text, choosing Keep Options from the Paragraph panel menu, and selecting the Keep Lines Together
and All Lines In Paragraph options. If the footnote contains multiple paragraphs, use the Keep With Next X Lines option
in the first paragraph of the footnote text. You can choose Type > Insert Break Character > Column Break to control where
the footnote is split.

Last updated 6/13/2015

220
Text

Rule Above Specify the location and appearance of the footnote divider line that appears above the footnote text. A
divider line (also called a “separator line”) also appears above any footnote text continued in a separate frame. The
options you select apply to either the First Footnote In Column or Continued Footnotes, whichever is selected in the
menu. These options are similar to those that appear when you specify a paragraph rule. If you want to remove the
footnote divider line, deselect Rule On.

Delete footnotes
❖ To delete a footnote, select the footnote reference number that appears in text, and then press Backspace or Delete.

If you delete only the footnote text, the footnote reference number and footnote structure remain.

Work with footnote text
As you edit footnote text, note the following:

• When the insertion point is in footnote text, choosing Edit > Select All selects all the footnote text for that footnote,
but no other footnote or text.
• Use the arrow keys to navigate among footnotes.
• Footnote numbering is not continued across documents in a book. If you don’t want numbering to restart in each
document with the book, you need to change the Start At value manually in each document after the editing is final.
• In Story Editor, you can click the footnote icon to expand or collapse a footnote. You can expand or collapse all
footnotes by choosing View > Story Editor > Expand All Footnotes or Collapse AllFootnotes.
• In Galley view or Story view, you can click the footnote icon to expand or collapse footnotes. You can expand or
collapse all footnotes by right-clicking (Windows) or Ctrl-clicking (Mac OS) a footnote and choosing Expand All
Footnotes or Collapse All Footnotes.
• You can select and apply character and paragraph formatting to footnote text. You can also select and change the
appearance of the footnote reference number, but the recommended method is using the Document Footnote
Options dialog box.
• When you cut or copy text that includes the footnote reference number, the footnote text is also added to the
clipboard. If you copy the text to a different document, the footnotes in that text use the characteristics of the new
document’s numbering and layout appearance.
• If you accidentally delete the footnote number at the start of the footnote text, you can add it back by placing the
insertion point at the beginning of the footnote text, right-clicking (Windows) or Control-clicking (Mac OS), and
choosing Insert Special Character > Markers > Footnote Number.
• Text wrap has no effect on footnote text.
• If you clear overrides and character styles on a paragraph that includes a footnote reference marker, the footnote
reference numbers lose the attributes you applied in the Document Footnote Options dialog box.

Last updated 6/13/2015

221
Text

More Help topics
Place (import) text
Place (import) text
Creating Footnotes video
Overprint rules above footnotes

Glyphs and special characters
Glyphs panel overview
Enter glyphs by way of the Glyphs panel. The panel initially shows glyphs in the font where the cursor is located, but
you can view a different font, view a type style in the font (for example, Light, Regular, or Bold), and make the panel
display a subset of glyphs in the font (for example, math symbols, numbers, or punctuation symbols).

A Show subset of glyphs B Tool tip C Font list D Font style

By moving the pointer over a glyph, you can read its CID/GID value, Unicode value, and name in a tool tip.

Open the Glyphs panel
❖ Choose Type > Glyphs or Window > Type & Tables > Glyphs.

Change the Glyphs panel view
• Click the cycle widget (it’s located to the left of the word “Glyphs” on the Glyphs panel) to change views of the panel.
Clicking the widget presents these views in succession: the collapsed panel, the entire panel, and the panel without
recently used glyphs.
• Click the Zoom In or Zoom Out buttons in the lower-right corner of the Glyphs panel.
• Resize the Glyphs panel by dragging the lower-right corner.

Last updated 6/13/2015

222
Text

Filter the glyphs that appear
❖ Do one of the following on the Show list to determine which glyphs appear on the Glyphs panel:

• Choose Entire Font to display all glyphs available in the font.
• Choose an option below Entire Font to narrow the list to a subset of glyphs. For example, Punctuation displays
only punctuation glyphs; Math Symbols narrows the choices to mathematical symbols.

Sort glyphs in the Glyphs panel
❖ Choose By CID / GID or By Unicode to determine how glyphs are sorted in the Glyphs panel.

Insert glyphs and special characters
A glyph is a specific form of a character. For example, in certain fonts, the capital letter A is available in several forms,
such as swash and small cap. You can use the Glyphs panel to locate any glyph in a font.
OpenType fonts such as Adobe Caslon™ Pro provide multiple glyphs for many standard characters. Use the Glyphs
panel when you want to insert these alternate glyphs in your document. You can also use the Glyphs panel to view and
insert OpenType attributes such as ornaments, swashes, fractions, and ligatures.

Insert special characters
You can insert common characters such as em dashes and en dashes, registered trademark symbols, and ellipses.
1 Using the Type tool, position the insertion point where you want to insert a character.
2 Choose Type > Insert Special Character, and then select an option from any of the categories in the menu.

If special characters that you use repeatedly do not appear on the list of special characters, add them to a glyph set that
you create.

Insert a glyph from a specified font
1 Using the Type tool, click to place the insertion point where you want to enter a character.
2 Choose Type > Glyphs to display the Glyphs panel.
3 To display a different set of characters in the Glyphs panel, do any of the following:

• Select a different font and type style, if available. From the Show menu, choose Entire Font. Or, if you selected an
OpenType font, choose from a number of OpenType categories.
• Choose a custom glyph set from the Show menu. (See Create and edit custom glyph sets.)
4 Scroll through the display of characters until you see the glyph you want to insert. If you selected an OpenType font,

you can display a pop-up menu of alternate glyphs by clicking and holding the glyph box.
5 Double-click the character you want to insert. The character appears at the text insertion point.

Insert a recently used glyph
InCopy tracks the previous 35 distinct glyphs you inserted and makes them available under Recently Used in the first
row of the Glyphs panel (you have to expand the panel to see all 35 glyphs on the first row).
❖ Do one of the following:

• Double-click a glyph under Recently Used.
• Choose Recent Glyphs on the Show list to display all recently used glyphs in the main body of the Glyphs panel,
and then double-click a glyph.

Last updated 6/13/2015

223
Text

Clear recently used glyphs
• To clear a selected glyph from the Recently Used section, right-click (Windows®) or Control-click (Mac OS) a glyph
in the Recently Used section, and then choose Delete Glyph From Recently Used.
• To clear all recently used glyphs, choose Clear All Recently Used.

Replace a character with an alternate glyph
When a character includes alternate glyphs, it appears in the Glyphs panel with a triangle icon in the lower-right corner.
You can click and hold the character in the Glyphs panel to display a pop-up menu of the alternate glyphs, or you can
display alternate glyphs in the Glyphs panel.

1 Choose Type > Glyphs to display the Glyphs panel.
2 Select Alternates For Selection from the Show list.
3 Using the Type tool, select a character in your document.
4 Do one of the following to replace the selected character in the document:

• Double-click a glyph in the Glyphs panel.
• Select a glyph on the menu.

Display OpenType glyph attributes in the Glyphs panel
For easy selection, the Glyphs panel allows you to display characters for only the selected OpenType attributes. You can
select various options from the Show menu in the Glyphs panel.
Note: Do not confuse these options with those that appear on the Glyphs panel menu, which let you apply forms to selected
text. (See Apply OpenType font attributes .)

1 In the Glyphs panel, choose an OpenType font from the font list.
2 Choose an option from the Show menu.

Last updated 6/13/2015

224
Text

The options displayed vary depending on which font is selected. For information on applying OpenType font attributes,
see Apply OpenType font attributes . For more information on OpenType fonts, see www.adobe.com/go/opentype.

Highlight alternate glyphs in the text
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Composition (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Composition (Mac OS).
2 Select Substituted Glyphs, and then click OK. Substituted glyphs in the text are highlighted in nonprinting yellow.

Create and edit custom glyph sets
A glyph set is a named collection of glyphs from one or more fonts. Saving commonly used glyphs in a glyph set prevents
you from having to look for them each time you need to use them. Glyph sets are not attached to any particular
document; they are stored with other InDesign preferences in a separate file that can be shared.
You can determine whether the font is remembered with the added glyph. Remembering fonts is useful, for example,
when you are working with dingbat characters that may not appear in other fonts. If a glyph’s font is remembered, but
the font is missing, the font’s square appears in pink in the Glyphs panel and the Edit Glyph Set dialog box. If a font is
not remembered with an added glyph, a “u” appears next to the glyph, indicating that the font’s unicode value
determines the appearance of the glyph.

Create a custom glyph set
1 Choose Type > Glyphs.
2 Do one of the following:

• From the Glyphs panel menu, choose New Glyph Set.
• Open the context menu on the Glyphs panel and choose New Glyph Set.
3 Type the name of the glyph set.
4 Choose the insert order in which glyphs will be added to the glyph set, and click OK:
Insert At Front Each new glyph is listed first in the set.
Append At End Each new glyph is listed last in the set.
Unicode Order All glyphs are listed by the order of their unicode values.

5 To add glyphs to the custom set, select the font containing the glyph at the bottom of the Glyphs panel, click the

glyph to select it, and then choose the name of the custom glyph set from the Add To Glyph Set menu on the Glyphs
panel menu.

View a custom glyph set
❖ Do one of the following on the Glyphs panel:

• Choose the glyph set on the Show list.
• On the Glyphs panel menu, choose View Glyph Set, and then the name of the glyph set.

Edit custom glyph sets
1 Choose Edit Glyph Set from the Glyph panel menu, and then choose the custom glyph set.
2 Select the glyph you want to edit, do any of the following, and then click OK:

• To bind the glyph to its font, select Remember Font With Glyph. A glyph that remembers its font ignores the font
applied to the selected text in the document when the glyph is inserted into that text. It also ignores the font
specified in the Glyph panel itself. If you deselect this option, the Unicode value of the current font is used.

Last updated 6/13/2015

225
Text

• To view additional glyphs, choose a different font or style. If the glyph is not defined with a font, you cannot select
a different font.
• To remove a glyph from the custom glyph set, choose Delete From Set.
• To change the order in which glyphs are added to the set, choose an Insert Order option. Unicode Order is not
available if Insert At Front or Append At End was selected when the glyph set was created.

Delete glyphs from custom glyph sets
1 In the Glyphs panel, choose the Custom Glyph Set from the Show menu.
2 Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac OS) a glyph, and then choose Delete Glyph From Set.

Delete custom glyph sets
1 Do one of the following:

• From the Glyphs panel menu, choose Delete Glyph Set.
• From the context menu, choose Delete Glyph Set.
2 Click the name of a custom glyph set.
3 Click Yes to confirm.

Save and load glyph sets
Custom glyph sets are stored in files kept in the Glyph Sets folder, a subfolder of the Presets folder. You can copy glyph
set files to other computers and in so doing make custom glyph sets available to others. Copy glyph set files to and from
these folders to share them with others:
Mac OS Users\[username]\Library\Preferences\Adobe InCopy \[Version]\[Language]\Glyph Sets
Windows XP Documents and Settings\[username]\Application Data\Adobe\InCopy \[Version]\[Language]\Glyph Sets
Windows Vista and Windows 7 Users\[username]\AppData\Roaming\Adobe\InCopy \[Version]\[Language]\Glyph

Sets

Use quotation marks
You can specify different quotation marks for different languages. These quotation mark characters appear
automatically during typing if the Use Typographer’s Quotes option is selected in the Type section of the Preferences
dialog box.

Specify which quotation marks to use
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Dictionary (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Dictionary (Mac OS).
2 Choose a language from the Language menu.
3 Do any of the following, and then click OK:

• For Double Quotes, select a pair of quotation marks, or type the pair of characters you want to use.
• For Single Quotes, select a pair of quotation marks, or type the pair of characters you want to use.

Insert straight quotation marks
❖ Do one of the following:

• Choose Type > Insert Special Character > Quotation Marks > Straight Double Quotation Marks or Straight
Single Quotation Mark (Apostrophe).
Last updated 6/13/2015

226
Text

• Deselect the Use Typographer’s Quotes option in the Type section of the Preferences dialog box, and then type
the quotation mark or apostrophe.
• Press Shift+Ctrl+Alt+' (Windows) or Shift+Command+Option+' (Mac OS) to switch between turning on and
off the Use Typographer’s Quotes preferences option.
The character frequently used to indicate feet, arcminutes, or minutes of time is the prime mark. It looks like a slanted
apostrophe. The character frequently used to indicate inches, arcseconds, or seconds of time is the double prime mark.
These symbols are different from apostrophes and double quotation marks. Some fonts include the prime and double prime
marks. Use the Glyphs panel to insert these marks. If the font doesn’t have a prime or double prime mark, insert the straight
quotation mark, and italicize it.

Insert white space characters
A white space character is a blank space that appears between characters. You can use white-space characters for many
different purposes, such as preventing two words from being broken at the end of a line.
1 Using the Type tool, position the insertion point where you want to insert a certain amount of white space.
2 Choose Type > Insert White Space, and then select one of the spacing options (such as Em Space) in the context

menu.
Representative symbols of the white-space characters appear when you choose Type > Show Hidden Characters.

White space options
The following options appear on the Type > Insert White Space menu:
Ideographic Space

This is a space that is based on a full-width character in Asian languages. It wraps to the next line as with other fullwidth characters.
Em Space

Equal in width to the size of the type. In 12-point type, an em space is 12 points wide.
En Space

One-half the width of an em space.
Nonbreaking Space

The same flexible width as pressing the spacebar, but it prevents the line from being broken at the space character.
Nonbreaking Space (Fixed Width)

A fixed width space prevents the line from being broken at the space character, but does not expand or compress in
justified text. The fixed width space is identical to the Nonbreaking Space character inserted in InCopy CS2.
Third Space

One-third the width of an em space.
Quarter Space

One-fourth the width of an em space.
Sixth Space

One-sixth the width of an em space.

Last updated 6/13/2015

227
Text

Flush Space

Adds a variable amount of space to the last line of a fully justified paragraph, useful for justifying text in the last line.
(See Change Justification settings.)
Hair Space

One-twenty-fourth the width of an em space.
Thin Space

One-eighth the width of an em space. You may want to use a thin space on either side of an em dash or en dash.
Figure Space

Same width as a number in the typeface. Use a figure space to help align numbers in financial tables.
Punctuation Space

Same width as an exclamation point, period, or colon in the typeface.

About Adobe SING Glyphlet Manager
The Adobe SING Glyphlet Manager is a utility for installing and searching for glyphlets. It is not included in Adobe
Creative Suite 5.

More Help topics
OpenType fonts
Create hanging punctuation

Last updated 6/13/2015

228

Chapter 7: Styles

Working with styles
Duplicate styles or style groups
❖ Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac OS) a style or style group in the Styles panel, and then choose

Duplicate Style.
A new style or group appears in the Styles panel, with the same name followed by “copy.” If you duplicated a group
of styles, the style names within the new group remain the same.
You can also duplicate styles by copying them to another group.

Group styles
You can organize styles by grouping them into separate folders in the Character Styles, Paragraph Styles, Object Styles,
Table Styles, and Cell Styles panels. You can even nest groups within groups. Styles do not need to be in a group; you
can add them to a group or to the root level of the panel.

Create a style group
1 In the Styles panel:

• To create the group at the root level, deselect all styles.
• To create a group within a group, select and open a group.
• To include existing styles in the group, select the styles.
2 Choose New Style Group from the Styles panel menu, or choose New Group From Styles to move the selected styles

into the new group.
3 Type the name of the group and click OK.
4 To move a style into the group, drag the style over the style group. When the style group is highlighted, release the

mouse button.

Copy styles to a group
When you copy a style to a different group, the styles are not linked. Even though they have the same name, editing one
style does not change the attributes of the other style.
1 Select the style or group you want to copy.
2 Choose Copy To Group from the Styles panel menu.
3 Select the group (or [Root] level) that you want to copy the styles or group to, and then click OK.

If the group already contains style names identical to those being copied, incoming styles are renamed.

Last updated 6/13/2015

229
Styles

Expand or collapse style groups
• To expand or collapse only one group, click the triangle icon next to it.
• To expand or collapse the group and all its subgroups, Ctrl-click (Windows) or Command-click (Mac OS) the
triangle icon.

Delete style groups
Deleting a style group deletes the group and everything inside it, including styles and other groups.
1 Select the group you want to delete.
2 Choose Delete Style Group from the Styles panel menu, and then click Yes.
3 For each style in the group, specify a replacement style or choose [None], and then click OK.

If you want to use the same replacement style for all styles, select Apply To All.
If you cancel the replacement of any style, the group is not deleted. You can recover deleted styles by choosing Edit >
Undo Delete Styles.

Move and reorder styles
By default, styles you create appear at the bottom of the style group or panel.

• To alphabetize all groups and styles within groups, choose Sort By Name from the Styles panel menu.
• To move a single style, drag it to a new location. A black line indicates where the style will be moved to; a highlighted
group folder indicates that the style will be added to that group.

Paragraph and character styles
About character and paragraph styles
A character style is a collection of character formatting attributes that can be applied to text in a single step. A paragraph
style includes both character and paragraph formatting attributes, and can be applied to a paragraph or range of
paragraphs. Paragraph styles and character styles are found on separate panels. Paragraph and characters styles are
sometimes called text styles.
A named grid format can be applied to a frame grid in the Frame Grid format settings. (See Named Grids panel
overview .) You can also use create an object style with grid characteristics. (See About object styles .)
When you change the formatting of a style, all text to which the style has been applied will be updated with the new
format.
You can create, edit, and delete styles in stand-alone Adobe InCopy documents or in InCopy content that is linked to
an Adobe InDesign CS4 document. When the contents are updated in InDesign, new styles are added to the InDesign
document, but any style modifications made in InCopy will be overridden by the InDesign style. For linked content, it
is usually best to manage your styles in InDesign.
For a video tutorial on making a paragraph style, see www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4277_id. For a video tutorial on using
text styles, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0076.

Last updated 6/13/2015

230
Styles

Thomas Silkjaer provides samples of styles at Free InDesign Style Template.
[Basic Paragraph] styles
By default, each new document contains a [Basic Paragraph] style that is applied to text you type. You can edit this style,
but you can’t rename or delete it. You can rename and delete styles that you create. You can also select a different default
style to apply to text.
Character style attributes
Unlike paragraph styles, character styles do not include all the formatting attributes of selected text. Instead, when you
create a character style, InDesign makes only those attributes that are different from the formatting of the selected text
part of the style. That way, you can create a character style that, when applied to text, changes only some attributes, such
as the font family and size, ignoring all other character attributes. If you want other attributes to be part of the style, add
them when editing the style.
Next Style
You can automatically apply styles as you type text. If, for example, your document’s design calls for the style “body text”
to follow a heading style named “heading 1,” you can set the Next Style option for “heading 1” to “body text.” After
you’ve typed a paragraph styled with “heading 1,” pressing Enter or Return starts a new paragraph styled with “body
text.”
If you use the context menu when applying a style to two or more paragraphs, you can cause the parent style to be
applied to the first paragraph and the Next Style to be applied to the additional paragraphs. (See Apply styles.)
To use the Next Style feature, choose a style from the Next Style menu when you’re creating or editing a style.
Jeff Witchel provides a video tutorial about using the Next Style feature at Using the Next Style feature.

Styles panel overview
Use the Character Styles panel to create, name, and apply character styles to text within a paragraph; use the Paragraph
Styles panel to create, name, and apply paragraph styles to entire paragraphs. Styles are saved with a document and
display in the panel each time you open that document.
When you select text or position the insertion point, any style that has been applied to that text is highlighted in either
of the Styles panels, unless the style is in a collapsed style group. If you select a range of text that contains multiple styles,
no style is highlighted in the Styles panel. If you select a range of text to which multiple styles are applied, the Styles
panel displays “(Mixed).”

Open the Paragraph Styles panel
❖ Choose Type > Paragraph Styles, or click the Paragraph Styles tab, which appears by default on the right side of the

application window.

Open the Character Styles panel
❖ Choose Type > Character Styles, or click the Character Styles tab on the right side of the application window.

Add paragraph and character styles
If the styles you want already exist in another InDesign, InCopy, or word-processing document, you can import those
styles for use in your current document. If you are working with a stand-alone story, you can also define character and
paragraph styles in InCopy.

Last updated 6/13/2015

231
Styles

Define paragraph or character styles
1 If you want to base a new style on the formatting of existing text, select that text or place the insertion point in it.

If a group is selected in the Styles panel, the new style will be part of that group.
2 Choose New Paragraph Style from the Paragraph Styles panel menu, or choose New Character Style from the

Character Styles panel menu.
3 For Style Name, type a name for your new style.
4 For Based On, select which style the current style is based on.

Note: The Based On option lets you link styles to each other, so that changes in one style ripple through the styles that
are based on it. By default, new styles are based on [No Paragraph Style] for paragraph styles or [None] for character
styles, or on the style of any currently selected text.
5 For Next Style (Paragraph Styles panel only), specify which style is applied after the current style when you press

Enter or Return.
6 To add a keyboard shortcut, position the insertion point in the Shortcut box, and make sure Num Lock is turned

on. Then hold down any combination of Shift, Alt, and Ctrl (Windows), or Shift, Option, and Command (Mac OS),
and press a number on the numeric keypad. You cannot use letters or non-keypad numbers for defining style
shortcuts. If your keyboard does not have a Num Lock key, you cannot add keyboard shortcuts to styles.
7 If you want the new style to be applied to the selected text, select Apply Style To Selection.
8 To specify the formatting attributes, click a category (such as Basic Character Formats) on the left, and specify the

attributes you want to add to your style.
When specifying a Character Color in the Style Options dialog box, you can create a new color by double-clicking
the fill or stroke box.
9 For character styles, attributes you do not specify are ignored; when the style is applied, text will retain the paragraph

style formatting for that attribute. To remove an attribute setting from a character style:

• From a setting’s menu, choose (Ignore).
• In a text box, delete the option text.
• In a check box, click until you see a small box (Windows) or a hyphen (-) (Mac OS).
• For a character color, hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) and click the color swatch.
10 When you’ve finished specifying the formatting attributes, click OK.

Styles you create appear only in the current document. If no document is open, the styles you create will appear in all
new documents.

Base one paragraph or character style on another
Many document designs feature hierarchies of styles sharing certain attributes. The headings and subheads, for
example, often use the same font. You can easily create links between similar styles by creating a base, or parent, style.
When you edit the parent style, the child styles will change as well. You can then edit the child styles to distinguish them
from the parent style.
To create a style that’s nearly identical to another style, but without the parent-child relationship, use the Duplicate Style
command and then edit the copy.
1 Create a new style.
2 In the New Paragraph Style or New Character Style dialog box, select the parent style in the Based On menu. The

new style becomes the child style.

Last updated 6/13/2015

232
Styles

By default, new styles are based on [No Paragraph Style] or [None], or on the style of any currently selected text.
3 Specify formatting in the new style to distinguish it from the style on which it’s based. For example, you might want

to make the font used in a subheading slightly smaller than the one used in the heading (parent) style.
If you make changes to the formatting of a child style and decide you want to start over, click Reset To Base. That restores
the child style’s formatting to be identical to the style on which it’s based. Then you can specify new formatting. Similarly,
if you change the Based On style of the child style, the child style definition is updated to match its new parent style.

Import styles from other documents
You can import paragraph and character styles from another InDesign document (any version) into the active
document. During import, you can determine which styles are loaded and what should occur if a loaded style has the
same name as a style in the current document. You can also import styles from an InCopy document.
You can import paragraph styles and character styles from an InDesign or InCopy document into a stand-alone InCopy
document or InCopy content that is linked to InDesign. You can determine which styles are loaded, and what should
occur if a loaded style has the same name as a style in the current document.
Note: If you import styles into linked content, new styles are added to the InDesign document when the content is updated,
and any style with a name conflict is overridden by the InDesign style with the same name.
1 In the Character Styles or Paragraph Styles panel, do one of the following:

• Choose Load Character Styles or Load Paragraph Styles in the Styles panel menu.
• Choose Load All Text Styles in the Styles panel menu to load both character and paragraph styles.
2 Double-click the InDesign document containing the styles you want to import.
3 In the Load Styles dialog box, make sure that a check mark appears next to the styles you want to import. If any

existing style has the same name as one of the imported styles, choose one of the following options under Conflict
With Existing Style, and then click OK:
Use Incoming Style Definition Overwrites the existing style with the loaded style and applies its new attributes to all
text in the current document that used the old style. The definitions of the incoming and existing styles are displayed
at the bottom of the Load Styles dialog box so that you can view a comparison.
Auto-Rename Renames the loaded style. For example, if both documents have a Subheading style, the loaded style

is renamed “Subheading copy” in the current document.
You can also use the Books feature to share styles. (See Synchronize book documents .)

Map styles to export tags | CC, CS6, CS5.5

Introduction to export tags
Use Export Tagging to define how text with InDesign styles is marked up in HTML, EPUB, or tagged PDF output.
You can also specify CSS class names to add to the exported content. In EPUB/HTML export, CSS classes can be used
to differentiate between slight variations in styling. It is not required that you enter a class name - InDesign
automatically generates one based on the Style Name.
You cannot preview Export Tagging within the InDesign layout, as it only impacts the exported EPUB, HTML, or PDF
file.
Edit All Export Tags lets you efficiently view and modify the mappings in a single dialog box.

Last updated 6/13/2015

233
Styles

Define style-tag mapping
1 For the style to map, open the paragraph, character, or Object Style Options dialog box.
2 Click Export Tagging in the left pane, and do one of the following:

• Choose a Tag to map for EPUB and HTML output.
• Specify a Class to map for EPUB and HTML output. Class names are used to generate style definitions for default
tags.
• If you want to include this style in the CSS, select the Emit CSS checkbox. If you don’t select the checkbox, no
CSS class will be generated for this style. If you have two or more styles having the same class assigned, InDesign
displays an error/warning message while exporting. This option is available only in InDesign CC.
• Choose a Tag to map for PDF output. This option is available only for paragraph styles.

Edit all export tags
You can view and modify all export tags together in a single window.
1 Select Edit All Export Tags in the Paragraph, Character, or Object style panel menu.
2 Click EPUB and HTML, or PDF.
3 Click the tag corresponding to the style. It gets converted to a list; choose the new value.

Convert Word styles to InDesign styles
While importing a Microsoft Word document into InDesign or InCopy, you can map each style used in Word to a
corresponding style in InDesign or InCopy. By doing so, you specify which styles format the imported text. A disk icon
appears next to each imported Word style until you edit the style in InDesign or InCopy.
1 Do one of the following:

• To add the Word document to existing text in InDesign or InCopy, choose File > Place. Select Show Import
Options, and then double-click the Word document.
• To open the Word document in a stand-alone InCopy document, start InCopy, choose File > Open, and then
double-click the Word file.
2 Select Preserve Styles And Formatting From Text And Tables.
3 Select Customized Style Import, and then click Style Mapping.
4 In the Style Mapping dialog box, select the Word style, and then select an option from the menu under InCopy style.

You can choose the following options:

• If there is no style name conflict, choose New Paragraph Style, New Character Style, or choose an existing InCopy
style.
• If there is a style name conflict, choose Redefine InCopy Style to format the imported style text with the Word
style. Choose an existing InCopy style to format the imported style text with the InCopy style. Choose Auto
Rename to rename the Word style.
5 Click OK to close the Style Mapping dialog box, and then click OK to import the document.

Last updated 6/13/2015

234
Styles

Apply styles
By default, applying a paragraph style won’t remove any existing character formatting or character styles applied to part
of a paragraph, although you have the option of removing existing formatting when you apply a style. A plus sign (+)
appears next to the current paragraph style in the Styles panel if the selected text uses a character or paragraph style and
also uses additional formatting that isn’t part of the applied style. Such additional formatting is called an override or
local formatting.
Character styles remove or reset character attributes of existing text if those attributes are defined by the style.

Apply a character style
1 Select the characters to which you want to apply the style.
2 Do one of the following:

• Click the character style name in the Character Styles panel.
• Select the character style name from the drop-down list in the Control panel.
• Press the keyboard shortcut you assigned to the style. (Make sure that Num Lock is on.)

Apply a paragraph style
1 Click in a paragraph, or select all or part of the paragraphs to which you want to apply the style.
2 Do one of the following:

• Click the paragraph style name in the Paragraph Styles panel.
• Select the paragraph style name from the menu in the Control panel.
• Press the keyboard shortcut you assigned to the style. (Make sure that Num Lock is on.)
3 If any unwanted formatting remains in the text, choose Clear Overrides from the Paragraph Styles panel.

Apply sequential styles to multiple paragraphs
The Next Style option specifies which style will be automatically applied when you press Enter or Return after applying
a particular style. It also lets you apply different styles to multiple paragraphs in a single action.
For example, suppose you have three styles for formatting a newspaper column: Title, Byline, and Body. Title uses Byline
for Next Style, Byline uses Body for Next Style, and Body uses [Same Style] for Next Style. If you select an entire article,
including the title, the author’s byline, and the paragraphs in the article, and then apply the Title style using the special
“Next Style” command in the context menu, the article’s first paragraph will be formatted with the Title style, the second
paragraph will be formatted with the Byline style, and all other paragraphs will be formatted with the Body style.

1 Select the paragraphs to which you want to apply the styles.

Last updated 6/13/2015

235
Styles

2 In the Paragraph Styles panel, right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac OS) the parent style, and then choose

Apply [Style Name] Then Next Style.
If the text includes formatting overrides or character styles, the context menu also lets you remove overrides, character
styles, or both.

Edit character and paragraph styles
One of the advantages of using styles is that when you change the definition of a style, all of the text formatted with that
style changes to match the new style definition.
Note: If you edit styles in InCopy content that’s linked to an InDesign document, the modifications are overridden when
the linked content is updated.

Edit a style using the dialog box
1 Do one of the following:

• If you don’t want the style to be applied to selected text, right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac OS) the
style name in the Styles panel, and choose Edit [style name].
• In the Styles panel, double-click the style name, or select the style and choose Style Options in the Styles panel
menu. Note that this applies the style to any selected text or text frame or, if no text or text frame is selected, sets
the style as the default style for any text you type in new frames.
2 Adjust settings in the dialog box, and then click OK.

Redefine a style to match selected text
After you apply a style, you can override any of its settings. If you decide you like the changes you made, you can
redefine the style so that it matches the formatting of the text you changed.
Note: If you redefine styles in InCopy content linked to an InDesign document, the modifications are overridden when the
linked content is updated.
1 Using the Type tool

, select the text formatted with the style you want to redefine.

2 Make changes to the paragraph or character attributes as necessary.
3 Choose Redefine Style in the Styles panel menu.

Delete character or paragraph styles
When you delete a style, you can select a different style to replace it, and you can choose whether to preserve the
formatting. When you delete a style group, you delete all styles within the group. You are prompted to replace each style
in the group one at a time.
1 Select the style name in the Styles panel.
2 Do one of the following:

• Choose Delete Style in the panel menu or click the Delete icon

at the bottom of the panel.

• Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac OS) the style, and then choose Delete Style. This method is
especially useful for deleting a style without applying it to text.
3 In the Delete Paragraph Style dialog box, select the style to replace it.

Last updated 6/13/2015

236
Styles

If you select [No Paragraph Style] to replace a paragraph style or [None] to replace a character style, select Preserve
Formatting to keep the formatting of text to which the style is applied. The text preserves its formatting but is no
longer associated with a style.
4 Click OK.

To delete all unused styles, choose Select All Unused in the Styles panel menu, and then click the Delete icon. When you
delete an unused style, you are not prompted to replace the style.

Override character and paragraph styles
When you apply a paragraph style, character styles and other previous formatting remain intact. After you apply a style,
you can override any of its settings by applying formatting that’s not part of the style. When formatting that is not part
of a style is applied to text with that style applied, it is called an override or local formatting. When you select text with
an override, a plus sign (+) appears next to the style name. In character styles, an override is displayed only if the applied
attribute is part of the style. For example, if a character style only changes text color, applying a different font size to the
text does not appear as an override.
You can clear character styles and formatting overrides when you apply a style. You can also clear overrides from a
paragraph to which a style has been applied.
If a style has a plus sign (+) next to it, hold the mouse pointer over the style to view a description of the override
attributes.

Preserve or remove overrides when applying paragraph styles
• To apply a paragraph style and preserve character styles, but remove overrides, hold down Alt (Windows) or Option
(Mac OS) as you click the name of the style in the Paragraph Styles panel.
• To apply a paragraph style and remove both character styles and overrides, hold down Alt+Shift (Windows) or
Option+Shift (Mac OS) as you click the name of the style in the Paragraph Styles panel.
Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac OS) the style in the Paragraph Styles panel, and then choose an option
from the context menu. You can then clear overrides, character styles, or both while applying the style.

Clear paragraph style overrides
1 Select the text containing the overrides. You can even select multiple paragraphs with different styles.
2 In the Paragraph Styles panel, do any of the following:

• To remove paragraph and character formatting, click the Clear Overrides icon
from the Paragraph Styles panel.

, or choose Clear Overrides

• To remove character overrides, but preserve paragraph formatting overrides, hold down Ctrl (Windows) or
Command (Mac OS) as you click the Clear Overrides icon.
• To remove paragraph-level overrides, but preserve character-level overrides, in the Paragraph Styles panel, hold
down Shift+Ctrl (Windows) or Shift+Command (Mac OS) as you click the Clear Overrides icon.
Note: When you clear overrides, paragraph-level overrides are removed from the entire paragraph, even if only part of
the paragraph is selected. Character-level overrides are removed only from the selection.
Clearing overrides does not remove character style formatting. To remove character style formatting, select the text
containing the character style, and then click [None] in the Character Styles panel.

Last updated 6/13/2015

237
Styles

Break the link between text and its style
When you break the link between text and its style, the text retains its current formatting. However, future changes to
that style will not be reflected in the text that was separated from the style.
1 Select the text that is marked with the style that you want to break from.
2 Choose Break Link To Style from the Styles panel menu.

If no text is selected when you choose Break Link To Style, any new text you type uses the same formatting as the
selected style, but no style is assigned to that text.

Convert style bullets and numbering to text
When you create a style that adds bullets or numbering to paragraphs, these bullets and numbers may be lost if the text
is copied or exported to a different application. To avoid this problem, convert the style bullets or numbering to text.
Note: If you convert style bullets in an InCopy story linked to an InDesign layout, the change may be overridden when the
content is updated in InDesign.
1 In the Paragraph Styles panel, select the style that contains the bullets and numbering.
2 In the Paragraph Styles panel menu, choose Convert “[style]” Bullets and Numbering to Text.

If you convert bullets and numbering to text in a style on which another style is based (a parent style), the bullets and
numbering in the child style are also converted to text.
After you convert numbering to text, you may need to update numbers manually if you edit the text.

Find and replace character and paragraph styles
Use the Find/Change dialog box to find instances of a particular style and replace it with another.
1 Choose Edit > Find/Change.
2 For Search, select Document to change the style throughout the document.
3 Leave the Find What and Change To options blank. If the Find Format and Change Format boxes don’t appear at

the bottom of the dialog box, click More Options.
4 Click the Find Format box to display the Find Format Settings dialog box. Under Style Options, select the character

or paragraph style you want to search for, and then click OK.
5 Click the Change Format box to display the Change Format Settings dialog box. Under Style Options, select the

replacement character or paragraph style, and then click OK.
6 Click Find, and then use the Change, Change/Find, or Change All buttons to replace the style.

More Help topics
Group styles
Create nested styles
Create named grid formats
Duplicate styles or style groups
EPUB Contents options
Place (import) text
Place (import) text

Last updated 6/13/2015

238
Styles

Paste text
Use Quick Apply
Group styles
Create a paragraph style for running lists
Find and change text
Find and change fonts

Drop caps and nested styles
There are three main ways to use Drop Caps and Nested Styles feature: to apply a character style to a drop cap, to apply
a nested style to text at the beginning of a paragraph, and to apply a nested line style to one or more lines in a paragraph.

Apply a character style to a drop cap
You can apply a character style to the drop-cap character or characters in a paragraph. For example, if you want a dropcap character to have a different color and font than the rest of the paragraph, you can define a character style that has
these attributes. Then you can either apply the character style directly to a paragraph, or you can nest the character style
in a paragraph style.
Note: You cannot create new styles in InCopy content linked to an InDesign layout.

1 Create a character style that has the formatting you want to use for the drop-cap character.
2 Do one of the following:

• To apply the drop cap to a single paragraph, choose Drop Caps And Nested Styles from the Paragraph panel
menu.
• To nest the character style in a paragraph style, double-click the paragraph style, and then click Drop Caps And
Nested Styles.
3 Specify the number of drop-cap lines and characters, and then choose the character style.
4 If the drop cap is aligned too far away from the left edge, select Align Left Edge.

Selecting this option uses the original left side bearing of the drop-cap character rather than the larger value. It’s
particularly useful for drop caps formatted in sans serif fonts.
5 If the drop cap character overlaps the text below it, select Scale For Descenders.
6 To control how text that wraps around the drop cap is adjusted relative to the frame grid, choose an option from the

menu.
Ignore Frame Grid The drop cap and text are not adjusted, so text may not align to the frame’s grid.

Last updated 6/13/2015

239
Styles

Pad To Frame Grid The drop cap is not scaled and the text is aligned to the grid, so there may be extra white space

between the drop cap and text that wraps around it.
Scale Up To Grid This option scales the drop cap to be wider for horizontal text or taller for vertical text so that the
text aligns with the grid.
Scale Down To Grid This option scales the drop cap to be narrower for horizontal text for shorter for vertical text so

that the text aligns with the grid.
7 Click OK.

If you want to apply a different nested style to any characters after the drop cap, use the New Nested Style option. (See
Create nested styles.)

Create nested styles
You can specify character-level formatting for one or more ranges of text within a paragraph or line. You can also set
up two or more nested styles to work together, one taking over where the previous one ends. For paragraphs with
repetitive and predictable formatting, you can even loop back to the first style in the sequence.
Nested styles are especially useful for run-in headings. For example, you can apply one character style to the first letter
in a paragraph and another character style that takes effect through the first colon (:). For each nested style, you can
define a character that ends the style, such as a tab character or the end of a word.
Note: You can create new styles in a stand-alone InCopy document, but not in content linked to an InDesign layout.

Last updated 6/13/2015

240
Styles

Michael Murphy provides an article on nested styles at InDesign's Nested Styles Auto-Format Multiple Paragraphs. He
also provides a series of video tutorials that starts at Nested Style Sheets.

Create one or more nested styles
1 Create one or more character styles that you want to use to format text.
2 Do one of the following:

• To add nested styles to a paragraph style, double-click the paragraph style, and then click Drop Caps And Nested
Styles.
• To add nested styles to a single paragraph, choose Drop Caps And Nested Styles from the Paragraph panel menu.
Note: For best results, apply nested styles as part of paragraph styles. If you apply nested styles as local overrides to a
paragraph, subsequent editing or formatting changes in the nested style can produce unexpected character formatting
in the styled text.
3 Click New Nested Style one or more times.

Last updated 6/13/2015

241
Styles

4 Do any of the following for each style, and then click OK:

• Click the character style area, and then select a character style to determine the appearance of that section of the
paragraph. If you haven’t created a character style, choose New Character Style and specify the formatting you
want to use.
• Specify the item that ends the character style formatting. You can also type the character, such as a colon (:) or a
specific letter or number. You cannot type a word.
• Specify how many instances of the selected item (such as characters, words, or sentences) are required.
• Choose Through or Up To. Choosing Through includes the character that ends the nested style, while choosing
Up To formats only those characters that precede this character.
• Select a style and click the up button or down button to change the order of the styles in the list. The order
of the styles determines the sequence in which the formatting is applied. The formatting defined by the second
style begins where the formatting of the first style concludes. If you apply a character style to the drop cap, the
drop-cap character style acts as the first nested style.

Create nested line styles
You can apply a character style to a specified number of lines in a paragraph. As with nested styles, you can set up two
or more nested line styles to work together, and you can create a repeating sequence.
Attributes applied by nested line styles can co-exist with attributes applied by nested styles. For example, a nested line
style can apply a color while a nested style can apply italics. If both set conflicting settings of the same attribute, such
as red and blue, the nested style takes precedence over the nested line style.
1 Create one or more character styles that you want to use to format text.
2 Do one of the following:

• To add nested line styles to a paragraph style, double-click the paragraph style, and then click Drop Caps And
Nested Styles.
• To add nested line styles to a single paragraph, choose Drop Caps And Nested Styles from the Paragraph panel
menu.
3 Click New Nested Line Style one or more times.
4 Click the character style area, and then select a character style to determine the appearance of that section. If you

haven’t created a character style, choose New Character Style and specify the formatting you want to use.
5 Specify the number of paragraph lines you want the character style to affect.

Select a style and click the up button or down button to change the order of the styles in the list. The order
determines the sequence in which the formatting is applied.
6 Click OK.

Loop through nested styles
You can repeat a series of two or more nested styles throughout a paragraph. A simple example would be to alternate
red and green words in a paragraph. Or, in nested line styles you could alternate red and green lines in a paragraph. The
repeating pattern remains intact even if you add or remove words in the paragraph.
1 Create the character styles you want to use.
2 Edit or create a paragraph style, or place the insertion point in the paragraph you want to format.
3 In the Drop Caps And Nested Styles section or dialog box, click New Nested Style (or New Nested Line Style) at least

twice and choose settings for each style.

Last updated 6/13/2015

242
Styles

4 Do either of the following:

• For nested styles, click New Nested Style again, choose [Repeat] in the character style area, and specify how many
nested styles will be repeated.
• For nested line styles, click New Nested Line Style again, choose [Repeat] in the character style area, and specify
how many lines will be repeated.
In some cases, you may want to skip the first style or styles. For example, an events calendar paragraph may include
“This Week’s Events” followed by days of the week and their events. In this case, you could create five nested styles:
one for “This Week’s Events,” one each for the day, event, and event time, and a final style with a [Repeat] value of
3, thereby excluding the first nested style from the loop.
The [Repeat] item should be the last in the list. Any nested style below [Repeat] is ignored.

5 Click OK.

Nested style character style options
To determine how a nested character style ends, select any of the following:
If you don’t want the character to be included in the nested style formatted, choose Up To instead of Through when you
define the nested style.
Sentences Periods, question marks, and exclamation points indicate the end of a sentence. If a quotation mark follows
the punctuation, it is included as part of the sentence.

Last updated 6/13/2015

243
Styles

Words Any space or white space character indicates the end of a word.
Alphabet The endpoint for Arabic numerals is defined by a space. For double-byte characters, it is the same as for

letters.
Characters Any character other than zero-width markers (for anchors, index markers, XML tags and so on) is

included.
Note: If you select Characters, you can also type a character, such as a colon or a period, to end the nested style. If you type
multiple characters, any of those characters will end the style. For example, if your run-in headings end with a hyphen,
colon, or question mark, you can type -:? to end the nested style where any of these characters appears.
Letters Any character that does not include punctuation, white space, digits, and symbols.
Digits The Arabic numerals 0–9 are included.
End Nested Style Character Extends the nested style up to or through the appearance of the End Nested Style character
you insert. To insert this character, choose Type > Insert Special Character > Other > End Nested Style Here.
Tab Characters Extends the nested style up to or through the tab character (not the tab setting).
Forced Line Break Extends the nested style up to or through the forced line break. (Choose Type > Insert Break

Character > Forced Line Break.)
Indent To Here Character Extends the nested style up to or through the Indent To Here character. (Choose Type >

Insert Special Character > Other > Indent To Here.)
Em Spaces, En Spaces, or Non-breaking Spaces Extends the nested style up to or through the space character. (Choose

Type > Insert White Space > [space character].)
Anchored Object Marker Extends the nested style up to or through an inline graphic marker, which appears where an

inline graphic is inserted.
Auto Page Number / Section Marker Extends the nested style up to or through the page number or section name

marker.

End a nested style
In most cases, a nested style ends where the condition of the defined style is met, such as after three words or where a
period appears. However, you can also end a nested style before the condition is met using the End Nested Style Here
character.
1 Place the insertion point where you want the nested style to end.
2 Choose Type > Insert Special Character > Other > End Nested Style Here.

This character ends the nested style at that point, regardless of the nested style definition.

Remove the formatting of a nested style
• In the Drop Caps And Nested Styles dialog box, or in the Drop Caps And Nested Styles section of the Paragraph
Style Options dialog box, select the nested style and click Delete.
• Apply a different paragraph style.

Last updated 6/13/2015

244
Styles

Create GREP styles
GREP is an advanced, pattern-based search technique. You can use GREP styles to apply a character style to text that
conforms to the GREP expression you specify. For example, suppose you want to apply a character style to all the phone
numbers in text. When you create a GREP style, you select the character style and specify the GREP expression. All
paragraph text that matches the GREP expression is formatted with the character style.

A Character style B GREP expression

For a video tutorial on creating GREP styles, see www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4028_id.
David Blatner provides real-world examples of GREP styles at 5 Cool Things You Can Do with GREP Styles. Cari
Jansen provides a four-part series about GREP styles that begins at Introducing GREP Styles.
1 Do one of the following:

• To apply GREP styling to individual paragraphs, select the paragraphs and choose Grep Styles from the
Paragraph or Control panel menu.
• To apply GREP styling to individual paragraphs, select the paragraphs and choose Grep Styles from the
Paragraph panel menu.
• To use GREP styles in a paragraph style, create or edit a paragraph style, and click the GREP Styling tab on the
left side of the Paragraph Style Options dialog box.
2 Click New GREP Style.
3 Click to the right of Apply Style, and then specify a character style. If you haven’t created a character style to use,

choose New Character Style and specify the formatting you want to use.
4 Click to the right of To Text and do any of the following to construct a GREP expression:

• Enter the search expression manually. (See Metacharacters for searching.)
• Click the Special Characters For Search icon to the right of the To Text field. Choose options from the Locations,
Repeat, Match, Modifiers, and Posix submenus to help construct the GREP expression.
5 Click OK.

Last updated 6/13/2015

245
Styles

More Help topics
Use drop caps
Search using GREP expressions
GREP styles video

Last updated 6/13/2015

246

Chapter 8: Typography

Bullets and numbering
Create bulleted or numbered lists
In bulleted lists, each paragraph begins with a bullet character. In numbered lists, each paragraph begins with an
expression that includes a number or letter and a separator such as a period or parenthesis. The numbers in a numbered
list are updated automatically when you add or remove paragraphs in the list. You can change the type of bullet or
numbering style, the separator, the font attributes and character styles, and the type and amount of indent spacing.
You cannot use the Type tool to select the bullets or numbers in a list. Instead, edit their formatting and indent spacing
using the Bullets And Numbering dialog box, the Paragraph panel, or the Bullets And Numbering section of the
Paragraph Styles dialog box (if the bullets or numbers are part a style).

A quick way to create a bulleted or numbered list is to type the list, select it, and then click the Bulleted List or
Numbered List button in the Control panel. These buttons let you turn the list on or off and switch between bullets and
numbers. You can also make bullets and numbering part of a paragraph style and construct lists by assigning styles to
paragraphs.
Note: Automatically generated bullet and number characters aren’t actually inserted in the text. Therefore, they cannot be
found during a text search or selected with the Type tool unless you convert them to text. In addition, bullets and numbering
don’t appear in the story editor window (except in the paragraph style column).
For a video tutorial on creating bulleted and numbered lists, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0077.

Last updated 6/13/2015

247
Typography

InDesign Docs provides a series of articles about using bullets and numbering to create outlines, multi-level lists, figure
captions, and numbered steps.
1 Select the set of paragraphs that will become the list, or click to place the insertion point where you want the list to

begin.
2 Do any of the following:

• Click the Bulleted List button
or the Numbered List button
in the Control panel (in Paragraph mode).
Hold down Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) while clicking a button to display the Bullets And Numbering
dialog box.
• Choose Bullets And Numbering from the Paragraph panel or Command panel. For List Type, choose either
Bullets or Numbers. Specify the settings you want, and then click OK.
• Apply a paragraph style that includes bullets or numbering.
3 To continue the list in the next paragraph, move the insertion point to the end of the list and press Enter or Return.
4 To end the list (or list segment, if the list is to be continued later in the story), click the Bulleted List or Numbered

List button in the Control panel again, or choose Bullets And Numbering from the Paragraph panel menu.

Format a bulleted or numbered list
1 Using the Type tool

, select the bulleted or numbered paragraphs you want to reformat.

2 Do any of the following to open the Bullets And Numbering dialog box:

• Choose Bullets And Numbering from the Control panel menu (in Paragraph mode) or the Paragraph panel
menu.
• Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Mac OS) either the Bulleted List button
.

or the Numbered List button

3 In the Bullets And Numbering dialog box, do any of the following:

• Change the bullet character.
• Change the numbered list options.
• Choose a style for the numbers or bullets from the Character Style list.
4 To change the position of the bullet or number, specify any of the following:
Alignment Left-aligns, centers, or right-aligns the bullets or numbers within the horizontal space allotted for
numbers. (If this space is narrow, the difference between the three options is negligible.)
Left Indent Specifies how far the lines after the first line are indented.
First Line Indent Controls where the bullet or number is positioned.

Increase the First Line Indent value if you want the punctuation in long lists to be aligned. For example, if you want
“9.” and “10.” to be aligned on the period, change the Alignment to Right and gradually increase the first line indent
until the numbers align (make sure Preview is turned on).
To create the hanging indent effect, specify a positive Left Indent value (such as 2p0), and then specify an equal
negative value (such as -2p0) for First Line Indent.

Last updated 6/13/2015

248
Typography

Note: The Left Indent, First Line Indent, and Tab Position settings in the Bullets And Numbering dialog box are
paragraph attributes. For that reason, changing these settings in the Paragraph panel also changes bulleted and
numbered list formats
Tab Position Activates the tab position to create space between the bullet or number and the start of the list item.

By default, bullets and numbers inherit some of their text formatting from the first character in the paragraph to which
they’re attached. If the first character in one paragraph is different from the first characters in other paragraphs, the
numbering or bullet character may appear inconsistent with the other list items. If this is not the formatting you desire,
create a character style for numbers or bullets and apply it to your list by using the Bullets And Numbering dialog box.

Change bullet characters
If you don’t want to use one of the existing bullet characters, you can add other bullet characters to the Bullet Character
grid. A bullet character that is available in one font may not be available in another font. You can choose whether the
font is remembered with any bullet character you add.
If you want to use a bullet found in a specific font (such as the pointing hand from Dingbats), be sure to set the bullet
to remember that font. If you use a basic bullet character, it’s probably best not to remember the font, because most fonts
have their own version of that bullet character. Depending on whether you select the Remember Font With Bullet
option, a bullet you add can reference either a Unicode value and a specific font family and style, or just a Unicode value.
Note: Bullets that reference only the Unicode value (without a remembered font) appear with a red “u” indicator.

Last updated 6/13/2015

249
Typography

A Bullet without remembered font B Bullet with remembered font

Change the bullet character
1 On the Control panel menu or Paragraph panel menu, select Bullets And Numbering.
2 In the Bullets And Numbering dialog box, select Bullets from the List Type menu.
3 Select a different bullet character, and then click OK.

Add a bullet character
1 In the Bullets And Numbering dialog box, select Bullets from the List Type menu, then click Add.
2 Select the glyph that you want to use as the bullet character. (Different font families and font styles contain different

glyphs.)
3 If you want the new bullet to remember the currently chosen font and style, select Remember Font With Bullet.
4 Click Add.

Note: The list of bullet characters is stored in the document, like paragraph and character styles. When you paste or load
paragraph styles from another document, any bullet character used in those styles appears in the Bullets And Numbering
dialog box, along with the other bullets defined for the current document.

Remove a bullet character
1 In the Bullets And Numbering dialog box, select Bullets from the List Type menu.
2 Select the bullet character you want to remove, and click Delete. (The first preset bullet character cannot be deleted.)

Change numbered list options
In a numbered list, the numbers are updated automatically when you add or remove paragraphs in the list. Paragraphs
that are part of the same list are numbered sequentially. These paragraphs do not have to be consecutive to one another
as long as you define a list for the paragraphs.
You can also create a multi-level list, in which list items are numbered in outline form and are indented by different
degrees.
1 Open the Bullets And Numbering dialog box.
2 Under Numbering Style, select the type of numbering you want to use from the Format menu.
3 In the Number box, use the default expression—period (.) and tab space (^t)—or construct a number expression of

your own. To enter a number expression, delete the period after the number metacharacter (^#) and do one of the
following:

• Type a character (such as a closing parenthesis) or more than one character in place of the period.

Last updated 6/13/2015

250
Typography

You can also input a full-width separator instead of a half-width period separator, which is especially useful for
vertical text.

• Choose an item (such as Em Dash or Ellipses) from the Insert Special Character menu.
• Type a word or character before the number metacharacter. For example, to number questions in a list, you can
type the word Question.
4 Choose a character style for the expression. (The style you choose applies to the entire number expression, not just

to the number.)
5 For Mode, choose one of the following options:
Continue From Previous Number Numbers lists sequentially.
Start At Starts numbering at a number or other value that you enter in the text box. Enter a number, not a letter,
even if your list uses letters or Roman numerals for numbering.

6 Specify any other options, and then click OK.

Defining lists
A defined list can be interrupted by other paragraphs and lists, and can span different stories and different documents
in a book. For example, use defined lists to create a multi-level outline, or to create a running list of numbered table
names throughout your document. You can also define lists for separately numbered or bulleted items that are mixed
together. For example, in a list of questions and answers, define one list for numbering the questions and another for
numbering the answers.
Defined lists are often used to track paragraphs for numbering purposes. When you create a paragraph style for
numbering, you can assign the style to a defined list, and paragraphs are numbered in that style according to where they
appear in the defined list. The first paragraph to appear is given number 1 (“Table 1”), for example, and the next
paragraph is given number 2 (“Table 2”), even if it appears several pages later. Because both paragraphs belong to the
same defined list, they can be numbered consecutively no matter how far apart they are in the document or book.
Define a new list for each type of item you want to number—step-by-step instructions, tables, and figures, for example.
By defining multiple lists, you can interrupt one list with another and maintain number sequences in each list.
If list items appear in unthreaded frames on the same page, items are numbered in the order in which the text frames
are added to the page. To reorder the items, cut and paste the text frames one by one in the order in which you want
them to be listed.

Last updated 6/13/2015

251
Typography

For a video tutorial on creating bulleted and numbered lists, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0077.

Define a list
1 Choose Type > Bulleted And Numbered Lists > Define Lists.
2 Click New in the Define Lists dialog box.
3 Enter a name for the list, choose whether you want to continue numbering across stories, and continue numbering

from previous documents in your book.
4 Click OK twice.

After you define a list, you can use it in a paragraph style, such as a style for tables, figures, or ordered lists, as well as
apply it by way of the Control panel and Paragraph panel.
Note: Some lists are defined automatically. For example, when you import a numbered list from a Microsoft Word
document, InDesign defines a list automatically for your document.

Edit a defined list
1 Choose Type > Bulleted And Numbered Lists > Define Lists.
2 Select a list and click Edit.
3 Enter a new name for the list or change your selection of Continue Numbers options.

Paragraph styles that are assigned to the list are reassigned to the list under its new name.

Last updated 6/13/2015

252
Typography

Delete a defined list
1 Choose Type > Bulleted And Numbered Lists > Define Lists.
2 Select a list.
3 Click Delete, and then select a different list or the [Default] list to replace your list with.

Create a paragraph style for running lists
To create a running list—a list that is interrupted by other paragraphs or that spans multiple stories or documents—
create a paragraph style and apply the style to paragraphs that you want to be part of the list. For example, to create a
running list of the tables in your document, create a paragraph style called Tables, make a defined list part of the style,
and then apply the Tables paragraph style to all paragraphs you want in your Table list.
InDesign Docs provides a series of articles about using bullets and numbering to create figure captions and numbered
steps.
1 Choose New Paragraph Style from the Paragraph Styles panel menu.
2 Enter a style name.
3 On the left side of the New Paragraph Style dialog box, click Bullets And Numbering.
4 For List Type, select Bullets or Numbering.
5 If you are creating a style for numbered lists, choose a defined list from the List menu, or choose New List and define

the list.
6 Specify the bullet or numbering characteristics.
7 Use the Bullet or Number Position section of the New Paragraph Style dialog box to change the indent spacing. For

example, to create a hanging indent, type 2p for Left Indent and -2p for First Line Indent.
8 Specify other paragraph style attributes for the style, and then click OK.

Create multi-level lists
A multi-level list is a list that describes hierarchical relationships between the list paragraphs. These lists are also called
outline lists because they resemble outlines. The list’s numbering scheme (as well as indentations) show rank as well as
how items are subordinate to one another. You can tell where each paragraph fits in the list with respect to the
paragraphs before and after it. You can include up to nine levels in a multi-level list.

Last updated 6/13/2015

253
Typography

To create a multi-level list, define the list and then create a paragraph style for each level you want. For example, a list
with four levels requires four paragraph styles (each one assigned the same defined list). As you create each style, you
define its numbering format and paragraph formatting.
Bob Bringhurst provides a series of articles about using bullets and numbering to create outlines, multi-level lists, figure
captions, and numbered steps.
1 Choose New Paragraph Style from the Paragraph Styles panel menu.
2 Enter a style name.
3 If you already created a style for your multi-level list, choose the style you will assign to levels above this one from

the Based On menu; otherwise, choose No Paragraph Style or Basic Paragraph.
4 On the left side of the New Paragraph Style dialog box, click Bullets And Numbering.
5 Choose Numbers from the List Type menu.
6 Choose a list you defined from the List menu. If you haven’t yet defined your list, you can choose New List from the

menu and define it now.
7 In the Level box, enter a number that describes which level of the multi-level list you’re creating a style for.
8 From the Format menu, choose the type of numbering you want to use.
9 In the Number box, enter metacharacters or select metacharacters from the menus to describe the number

formatting you want for list items at this level.

• To include numbering prefixes from higher levels, enter text or click at the start of the Number box and choose
Insert Number Placeholder and then select a Level option (for example, Level 1), or enter ^ and then the list level
(for example, enter ^1). In a list with first levels numbered 1, 2, 3, and so on, and second levels numbered a, b, c,
and so on, including the first-level prefix in the second level renders second-level numbers as 1a, 1b, 1c; 2a, 2b,
2c; 3a, 3b, 3c.
• To create a number expression, enter punctuation, enter metacharacters, or select options on the Insert Special
Character list.
10 Select Restart Numbers At This Level After to renumber beginning at 1 when a paragraph at this level appears after

a paragraph at a higher level; deselect this option to number paragraphs at this level consecutively throughout the
list without regard for where the paragraphs appear in the list hierarchy.

Last updated 6/13/2015

254
Typography

To restart numbers after a specific level or range of levels, type the level number or range (such as 2-4) in the Restart
Numbers At This Level After field.
11 In the Bullet or Number Position area, choose Indent or Tab Position options to indent list items at this level farther

than list items at higher levels. Indenting helps subordinate items in lists stand out.
12 Click OK.

In some cases, such as with numbered steps, you may want to restart numbering within the same story. To avoid
restarting the numbered list manually, create a separate style that’s identical to the Level 1 style with one exception. For
Mode, chose Start At, and then specify 1. Name this style something like “Level 1 Restart.”

Create running captions for figures and tables
Running captions number figures, tables, and other items consecutively in a document. For example, the first figure
caption starts with the words “Figure 1,” the second with “Figure 2,” and so on. To make sure that figures, tables, or
similar items are numbered consecutively, define a list for the item, and then create a paragraph style that includes the
list definition. You can also add descriptive words such as “Figure” or “Table” to the numbering scheme of the paragraph
style.
Bob Bringhurst provides an article about creating figure captions at Numbered Lists Part III - Figure Captions.
List items are numbered in the order in which they are added to the page. To reorder the items, cut and paste the items
one by one in the order in which you want them to be listed.
1 Create a new paragraph style and, in the Bullets And Numbering section of the Paragraph Style Options dialog box,

choose Numbers from the List Type menu.
2 Choose a defined list from the List menu (or choose New List to define a list).
3 Under Numbering Style, select the type of numbering you want to use from the Format menu.

For example, select the A, B, C, D... option to create a list for “Figure A,” “Figure B,” and so on.
4 In the Number box, enter a descriptive word and any spacing or punctuation (as needed) along with the numbering

metacharacters.
For example, to create a “Figure A” effect, enter the word “Figure” and a space before the numbering metacharacters
(such as Figure ^#.^t). This adds the word “Figure” followed by a sequential number (^#), a period, and a tab (^t).
Note: To include chapter numbers in running captions, choose Insert Number Placeholder > Chapter Number from the
Number list, or enter ^H where you want the chapter number to appear in the number scheme.
5 Finish creating the style and click OK.

After you create the style, apply it to text figure captions or table titles.
You can use the Table Of Contents feature to generate a list of tables or figures.

Restart or continue numbering for a list
InDesign offers commands for restarting a list and continuing a list:
Restarting a numbered list Place the insertion point in the paragraph and choose Restart Numbering from the context

menu or choose Type > Bulleted And Numbered Lists > Restart Numbering. In normal lists, this command assigns the
number 1 (or letter A) to a paragraph and makes it the first paragraph in a list. In multi-level lists, this command assigns
the first lower-level number to a nested paragraph.

Last updated 6/13/2015

255
Typography

Continuing a numbered list Choose Continue Numbering from the context menu or choose Type > Bulleted And
Numbered Lists > Continue Numbering. This command resumes numbering a list that was interrupted by
commentary, graphics, or nested list items. InDesign also offers commands for numbering lists that begin in one story
or book and cross into the next story or book.

Number a list from the previous or current story
Whether a list resumes numbering from the previous story or starts numbering anew in the current story depends on
how the list is defined.
1 Choose Type > Bulleted And Numbered Lists > Define Lists.
2 Select a list and click the Edit button.

Don’t choose the Default list because it can’t run across stories.
3 Select Continue Numbers Across Stories to resume numbering the list from the previous story, or deselect this

option to start the list in the current story at 1 (or A).
4 Click OK twice.

Number a list from the previous or current document in a book
Whether a list resumes numbering from the previous document in a book or starts numbering anew in the current
document depends on how the list is defined.
1 Choose Type > Bulleted And Numbered Lists > Define Lists.
2 Select a list and click the Edit button.
3 Select Continue Numbers From Previous Document In Book to resume numbering the list from the previous

document (you must choose Continue Numbers Across Stories to activate this option), or deselect this option to
start the list in the current document at 1 (or A).
4 Click OK twice.

To make sure that numbering is updated properly in a book, synchronize the documents in the book and choose Update
Numbering > Update All Numbers from the books panel menu.

Convert list bullets or numbers to text
1 Select the paragraphs containing the bulleted or numbered list.
2 Do one of the following:

• From the Paragraph panel menu, choose Convert Numbering To Text or Convert Bullets To Text.
• Right-click (Windows) or Command-click (Mac OS) the selection, and then choose Convert Numbering To Text
or Convert Bullets To Text.
Note: To remove the list numbers or bullets, click the Numbered List button or Bulleted List button to unapply list
formatting to the selected text.

More Help topics
Bulleted and Numbered Lists video
Add paragraph and character styles
Creating a table of contents

Last updated 6/13/2015

256
Typography

Captions
Convert style bullets and numbering to text

Formatting CJK characters
Apply shatai to text
In traditional typesetting technology, characters were slanted by using a lens to distort the glyphs when being set on
film. This oblique style is known as shatai. Shatai is distinct from a simple slant of the glyphs, because it also scales the
glyphs. You can adjust the magnification or angle of text you want to slant from the center point, without changing the
height of the glyph, using the shatai feature in InDesign.

A No scale applied B Magnification 30%, 45 shatai C Selecting the Adjust Tsume option D Selecting the Adjust Rotation option

1 Select text.
2 Select Shatai from the Character panel menu or Control panel menu.
3 Specify the following options, and click OK:

• Specify the degree of skew in Magnification (In traditional typesetting technology terms, 10% magnification is
lens 1, and 40% magnification is lens 4).
• Set the angle of obliqueness to 30, 45, or 60, in Angle.
• Select Adjust Rotation to rotate the glyphs, and display horizontal lines horizontally for horizontal text, and
vertical lines vertically for vertical text.
• Select Adjust Tsume to apply jidori.
You can fine tune the rotated oblique effect for individual characters, after applying shatai to text.

Rotate characters
1 Select the characters.
2 In the Character panel, type a value for Character Rotation

Specify a minus value to rotate the character to the

right (clockwise).

Adjust aki before and after characters
1 Select opening parenthesis or closing parenthesis with the type tool.

Last updated 6/13/2015

257
Typography

2 Choose the amount of aki you want to add from the Mojikumi Before Character

or Mojikumi After Character

pop-up menu, in the Character panel.
For example, if you specify 2bu, half a full-width space is added, and if you specify 4bu, a quarter of a full-width space
is added. This aki will not be adjusted when the line is set to full justification. Adjusting aki is especially useful to
override Mojikumi Akiryo Settings for certain characters.

Use tate-chu-yoko
Using tate-chu-yoko (also known as kumimoji or renmoji) is an option to make a part of the text horizontal, in vertical
text. It is easier to read half-width characters such as numbers, dates, and short foreign words in a vertical text frame,
by rotating the text.

You can move text left, right, up, and down when you turn on the Tate-chu-yoko option. You can also set Auto Tatechu-yoko for special half-width characters. Auto Tate-chu-yoko is set in the paragraph attributes.
Use tsume or tracking in the Character panel to adjust the character spacing for Tate-chu-yoko.

Apply tate-chu-yoko
1 Select the text to which you want to apply tate-chu-yoko.
2 Do one of the following:

• Choose Tate-chu-yoko from the Character panel menu or Control panel menu.
• Choose Tate-chu-yoko Settings from the Character panel menu or Control panel menu, choose Tate-chu-yoko
in the Tate-chu-yoko dialog box, and click OK.
If multiple instances of tate-chu-yoko appear next to each other, use the Non-joiner character to keep them separate.
Choose Type > Insert Special Character > Other > Non-joiner.

Remove tate-chu-yoko
1 Select the text to which you want to apply tate-chu-yoko.

Last updated 6/13/2015

258
Typography

2 Do one of the following:

• Choose and cancel Tate-chu-yoko from the Character panel menu or Control panel menu.
• Choose Tate-chu-yoko Settings from the Character panel menu, deselect Tate-chu-yoko in the Tate-chu-yoko
dialog box, and then click OK.

Change tate-chu-yoko settings
1 Choose Tate-chu-yoko Settings from the Character panel menu.
2 Specify a value for moving the text up or down in X Offset. If you specify a plus value, the text will move up, and if

you specify a minus value, it will move down.
3 Specify a value for moving the text left or right in Y Offset. If you specify a plus value, the text will move to the right,

and if you specify a minus value, it will move to the left.

Set Auto Tate-chu-yoko for specific paragraphs
1 Select the text to be set to Auto Tate-chu-yoko, or place the text insertion point in the paragraph.
2 Choose Auto Tate-chu-yoko from the Paragraph panel menu.
3 In KumiNumber, specify the number of successive half-width characters that you want to rotate to vertical

orientation. For example, if this is set to 2, the character string "123" will not rotate, while "12" will.
4 If you want to apply tate-chu-yoko to roman text, select Include Roman Characters, and click OK.

Add Ruby to text
In Japanese, Ruby (also known as furigana) is normally used to show the kanji yomi in hiragana. In Simplified Chinese,
Ruby is called Pinyin, while in Traditional Chinese, Ruby is called Chuyin. InDesign provides full support to Japanese
Ruby and limited support to Chinese Pinyin or Chuyin. You can adjust Ruby settings to specify Ruby location, size, or
color. Furthermore, when the ruby is longer than the parent you can specify the ruby distribution. You can also apply
tate-chu-yoko to Ruby.

When the parent to which you want to attach ruby covers two lines, the ruby will follow when the parent moves to the
next line.
Note: In some instances, such as when applying a style that includes a variable, Ruby characters may be removed.
1 Select the text to which you want to attach ruby. You cannot attach ruby when there are forced line breaks in the

selected text.
2 Select Ruby > Ruby from the Character panel menu or Control panel menu.
3 Enter the ruby characters in Ruby.
4 Change Ruby settings by clicking an option on the left side of the dialog box and specifying settings.
5 Click OK.

Last updated 6/13/2015

259
Typography

Ruby settings
The following options appear in the different panels of the Ruby dialog box.
Ruby Placement and Spacing

• From the Type menu, choose Per-Character or Group Ruby. When Per Character Ruby is selected, enter a half or
full width space when inputting Ruby characters to separate them in line with their parent characters. For
"hakunetsutou" for example, enter as "haku netsu tou" (example of a word composed of Japanese characters and its
phonetic spelling is given).

• From the Alignment menu, specify the position of the Ruby characters. You can check the position with the graphic
shown in the sample field.
• To attach ruby above horizontal text or to the right of vertical text, select Above/Right, and to attach below
horizontal text or to the left of vertical text, select Below/Left in Placement.
• Specify the spacing between the ruby and the parent in XOffset and YOffset. When you enter a minus value, the
ruby moves closer to the parent.
Ruby Font and Size

• Select a font family and font style in Font.
• Specify the size of the ruby characters in Size. The default ruby size is half the size of the parent.
• Specify the scale for the height and width of the ruby characters in Horizontal Scale and Vertical Scale.
• Select Use Open Type Pro Ruby Glyphs to use alternate glyphs for ruby (when possible). Specific kana characters
are available for some Open Type Pro fonts. When you select this option, the specific font for ruby characters, and
not the standard kana font, will be used.
• In KumiNumber, specify the number of successive half-width characters that you want to rotate to vertical
orientation. For example, if this is set to 2, the character string "123" will not rotate, while "12" will.
• Select Include Roman Characters to apply tate-chu-yoko to roman text.
• Select Scale to Fit to force the tate-chu-yoko to have the same dimensions (1 em x 1 em) in the ruby string, either
using an OpenType feature or scaling the glyphs.
Adjustment When Ruby Is Longer Than Parent

• With Overhang, when the total Ruby width is greater than that of their parent characters, the specified Ruby will
overflow widthways into the space above characters either side of the parents. For Japanese, character types
compatible with Overhang comply with the JISx4051-1995 specification.
• Specify the parent character spacing necessary for attaching ruby in Spacing. When you select a different option, the
graphics displayed in the sample field are updated.
• To automatically adjust the ruby character width, select Char Width Scaling, and specify the compression scale for
the width of the ruby characters.

Last updated 6/13/2015

260
Typography

• Select Auto Align at Line Edges to align the parent with the start and end of the line.
Ruby Color

• Select a color swatch in the list box.
• Specify the degree of tinting and line weight, as necessary.
• Select Overprint Fill or Overprint Stroke to set filling or stroke overprint for ruby characters.
(See Determining when to overprint manually .)

Apply kenten
Kenten (also known as Boten) are points which you attach to text you want to highlight. You can select the type of points
from existing kenten forms, or specify customized kenten characters. You can also specify the position, scale, and color
by adjusting the kenten settings.

Apply kenten
1 Choose the characters you want to highlight.
2 Choose a kenten character, such as Fisheye or White Circle, from Kenten in the Character panel menu or Control

panel menu.

Change kenten settings and color
1 Choose Kenten > Kenten from the Character panel menu or Control panel menu.
2 For Kenten Settings, specify the options below:
Kenten Type Select a kenten character, such as Fisheye or White Circ le. Choose Custom to specify a custom
character. You can enter characters directly, or you can specify a character code value for the specified character set.
Position Specify the spacing between the kenten and characters.
Location Select Above/Right to attach kenten above horizontal text or to the right of vertical text, and Below/Left

to attach below horizontal text or to the left of vertical text.
Size Specify the size of the kenten character.
Align Specify whether the kenten should be displayed in the center (Center) or to the left (Left) (above for vertical

text) of the character's embox.
H/Scale and V/Scale Specify the scale for the height and width of the kenten character.

3 To change the color of the kenten, choose Kenten Color from the list box, and then specify the options below:

• Select a color swatch from the list box.
• Specify the degree of tinting and line weight, as necessary.
• Select Overprint Fill or Overprint Stroke to set filling or stroke overprint for kenten characters.
(See Determining when to overprint manually .)

Last updated 6/13/2015

261
Typography

4 Click OK.

Align text of different sizes
You can specify how to align text to the largest characters in a line using the Character Alignment option, when
positioning characters of different sizes in 1 line. It is possible to align characters to the top, center or bottom of the
embox (right, center, and left for vertical frames), to the roman baseline, and to the top or bottom of the ICF box (right
or left for vertical frames). ICF (Ideographic Character Face) is the average height and width used by the font designer
to design the ideographic characters which comprise a font.

A Align different size letters above full space letters B Align different size letters in the middle of full space letters C Align different size letters
below full space letters

Note: The Character Alignment option is not effective, even if applied, when all characters are the same size in a line.
1 Select a range of text or lines for the characters you want to align, or select a text frame using the selection tool.
2 Choose one of the following options from Character Alignment in the Character panel menu or Control panel

menu.

• Roman Baseline aligns the small characters in a line to the large character baseline grid.
• Embox Top/Right, Center, or Embox Bottom/Left align the small characters in a line to the specified position of
the large characters embox. In vertical text frames, Embox Top/Right aligns the text to the right of the embox,
and Embox Bottom/Left aligns the paragraph to the left of the embox.
• ICF Top/Right and ICF Bottom/Left align the small characters in a line to the ICF specified by the large
characters. In vertical text frames, ICF Top/Right aligns the text to the right of the ICF, and ICF Bottom/Left to
the left of the ICF.

More Help topics
Change the text direction
Align paragraphs to a baseline grid

Using fonts
About fonts
A font is a complete set of characters—letters, numbers, and symbols—that share a common weight, width, and style,
such as 10-pt Adobe Garamond Bold.

Last updated 6/13/2015

262
Typography

Typefaces (often called type families or font families) are collections of fonts that share an overall appearance, and are
designed to be used together, such as Adobe Garamond.
A type style is a variant version of an individual font in a font family. Typically, the Roman or Plain (the actual name
varies from family to family) member of a font family is the base font, which may include type styles such as regular,
bold, semibold, italic, and bold italic.
For CJK-language fonts, the font style name is often determined by the variation in thickness (also called weight). For
example, the Japanese font Kozuka-Mincho Std includes six weights: Extra Light, Light, Regular, Medium, Bold and
Heavy. The font style name which is displayed depends on the font manufacturer. Each font style is a stand-alone file.
If the font style file has not been installed, that font style cannot be selected from Font Style.

Installing fonts
When you install InCopy or Adobe Creative Suite, fonts are automatically installed in the system fonts folder.

• Windows: On Windows the fonts are located in the “\Windows\Fonts” folder. For example, c:\Windows\Fonts\
• Mac OS: On Mac, the fonts are located in the “/Library/Fonts”
For information on installing and activating fonts to be used in all applications, see your system documentation or your
font manager documentation.
You can make fonts available in InCopy by copying the font files into the Fonts folder inside the InDesign application
folder on your hard drive. However, fonts in this Fonts folder are available only to InCopy .
If two or more fonts are active in InCopy and use the same family name but have different Adobe PostScript names, the
fonts are available in InCopy . Duplicate fonts are listed in the menus with their font technologies abbreviated in
parentheses. For example, a Helvetica TrueType font appears as “Helvetica (TT),” a Helvetica PostScript Type 1 font
appears as “Helvetica (T1),” and a Helvetica OpenType font appears as “Helvetica (OTF).” If two fonts have the same
PostScript name and one includes .dfont in its name, the other font is used.

Apply a font to text
When you specify a font, you can select the font family and its type style independently. When you change from one
font family to another, InCopy attempts to match the current style with the style available in the new font family. For
example, Arial Bold would change to Times Bold when you change from Arial to Times.
When you apply a bold or italic style to type, InCopy applies the typeface style specified by the font. In most cases, the
specific version of bold or italic is applied as expected. However, some fonts may apply a bold or italic variation that
isn’t exactly labeled bold or italic, respectively. For example, some font designers specify that when you apply bold to a
font, the semibold variation is applied.
When applying a Roman font to text containing both CJK and Roman characters, a message is displayed to indicate
that this operation will only apply to and override Roman text. By selecting text containing both CJK and Roman
characters, and pressing Ctrl+Alt (Windows) or Command+Option (Mac OS) while selecting and overriding the
Roman font you will apply Roman font to CJK characters, and garbled characters will be displayed.
Furthermore, when you apply a CJK font to text that includes Japanese and Roman characters, the CJK font is applied
to the entire text, including the Roman text (CJK fonts without Roman characters will not be applied).
In the Font List displayed in the Character panel and by selecting Type > Font, CJK fonts are displayed before Roman
fonts. In addition, when composite fonts have been created and specified, they are displayed above the CJK fonts.
1 Select the text you want to change.

Last updated 6/13/2015

263
Typography

2 Do any of the following:

• In the Character panel or Control panel, select a font in the Font Family menu or a style in the Type Style menu.
(In Mac OS, you can select type styles in the Font Family submenus.)
• In the Character panel or Control panel, click in front of the font family name or type style name (or double-click
its first word) and type in the first few characters of the name you want. As you type, InCopy displays font family
or type style names that match the characters you’ve typed.
• Choose a font in the Type > Font menu. Note that you choose both a font family and a type style when you use
this menu.

Specify a typeface size
By default, typeface size is measured in points (a point equals 1/72 of an inch). You can specify any typeface size from
0.1 to 1296 points, in 0.001-point increments.
Note: In Fireworks, the typeface size is measured in pixels by default.
1 Select the characters or type objects you want to change. If you don’t select any text, the typeface size applies to new

text you create.
2 Do one of the following:

• In the Character panel or Control bar set the Font Size option.
• Choose a size from the Type > Size menu. Choosing Other lets you type a new size in the Character panel.
You can change the unit of measurement for type in the Preferences dialog box. This option is not available in
Fireworks.

Previewing fonts
You can view samples of a font in the font family and font style menus in the Character panel and other areas in the
application from where you can choose fonts. The following icons are used to indicate different kinds of fonts:

• OpenType
• Type 1
• TrueType
• Multiple Master
• Composite
You can turn off the preview feature or change the point size of the font names or font samples in Type preferences.

OpenType fonts
OpenType fonts use a single font file for both Windows® and Macintosh® computers, so you can move files from one
platform to another without worrying about font substitution and other problems that cause text to reflow. They may
include a number of features, such as swashes and discretionary ligatures, that aren’t available in current PostScript and
TrueType fonts.
OpenType fonts display the

icon.

When working with an OpenType font, you can automatically substitute alternate glyphs, such as ligatures, small
capitals, fractions, and old style proportional figures, in your text.

Last updated 6/13/2015

264
Typography

A Ordinals B Discretionary ligatures C Swashes

OpenType fonts may include an expanded character set and layout features to provide richer linguistic support and
advanced typographic control. OpenType fonts from Adobe that include support for central European (CE) languages
include the word “Pro,” as part of the font name in application font menus. OpenType fonts that don’t contain central
European language support are labeled “Standard,” and have an “Std” suffix. All OpenType fonts can also be installed
and used alongside PostScript Type 1 and TrueType fonts.
For more information on OpenType fonts, see www.adobe.com/go/opentype.

Installing OpenType fonts
InCopy includes fonts from various OpenType families, including Adobe Garamond Pro, Adobe Caslon Pro, Trajan
Pro, Caflisch Script Pro, Myriad Pro, Lithos, and Adobe Jenson Pro.
In addition to Roman Open Type fonts such as Adobe Garamond Pro, Adobe Caslon Pro, Trajan Pro, Caflisch Script
Pro, Myriad Pro, Lithos, and Adobe Jenson Pro, InCopy comes with Japanese Open Type fonts including Kozuka
Mincho Pro and Kozuka Gothic Pro.
OpenType fonts are installed automatically when you install InCopy or Adobe Creative Suite 4. Additional OpenType
fonts are located in the Adobe Fonts folder in the Goodies folder on the application DVD. For information on installing
and using OpenType fonts, browse the application DVD or see the Adobe website.

Apply OpenType font attributes
Use the Character panel or Control panel to apply OpenType font attributes, such as fractions and swashes to text.
For more information on OpenType fonts, see www.adobe.com/go/opentype.

Apply OpenType font attributes
1 Select text.
2 In the Character panel or Control panel, make sure that an OpenType font is selected.
3 Choose OpenType from the Character panel menu, and then select an OpenType attribute, such as Discretionary

Ligatures or Fractions.
Features not supported in the current font appear in square brackets, such as [Swash].
You can also select OpenType font attributes when defining a paragraph or character style. Use the OpenType Features
section of the Style Options dialog box.

OpenType font attributes
When you use an OpenType font, you can select specific OpenType features from the Control panel or Character panel
menu when formatting text or when defining styles.

Last updated 6/13/2015

265
Typography

Note: OpenType fonts vary greatly in the number of type styles and kinds of features they offer. If an OpenType feature is
unavailable, it’s surrounded in square brackets (such as [Swash]) in the Control panel menu.
Discretionary Ligatures Font designers may include optional ligatures that shouldn’t be turned on in all circumstances.

Selecting this option allows these additional optional ligatures to be used, if they are present. For more information on
ligatures, see Apply ligatures to letter pairs.
Many compound character glyphs for Japanese katakana words, such as “me-toru” and for Kanji compounds, such as
“yuugenkaisha,” can be accessed using the discretionary ligature feature.
Fractions Numbers separated by a slash (such as 1/2) are converted to a fraction character, when fractions are available.
Ordinal Ordinal numbers such as 1st and 2nd are formatted with superscript letters (1st and 2nd) when ordinals are

available. Letters such as the superscript a and o in the Spanish words segunda (2a) and segundo (2o) are also typeset
properly.
Swash When available, regular and contextual swashes, which may include alternate caps and end-of-word

alternatives, are provided.
Titling Alternatives When available, characters used for uppercase titles are activated. In some fonts, selecting this

option for text formatted in both uppercase and lowercase letters can yield undesired effects.
Contextual Alternatives When available, contextual ligatures and connecting alternates are activated. Alternate

characters are included in some script typefaces to provide better joining behavior. For example, the letter pair “bl” in
the word “bloom” can be joined so that it looks more like handwriting. This option is selected by default.
All Small Caps For fonts that include real small caps, selecting this option turns characters into small caps. For more

information, see Change the case of type.
Slashed Zero Selecting this options displays the number 0 with a diagonal slash through it. In some fonts (especially

condensed fonts), it can be difficult to distinguish between the number 0 and the capital letter O.
Stylistic Sets Some OpenType fonts include alternate glyph sets designed for esthetic effect. A stylistic set is a group of

glyph alternates that can be applied one character at a time or to a range of text. If you select a different stylistic set, the
glyphs defined in the set are used instead of the font’s default glyphs. If a glyph character in a stylistic set is used in
conjunction with another OpenType setting, the glyph from the individual setting overrides the character set glyph.
You can see the glyphs for each set using the Glyphs panel.
Positional Forms In some cursive scripts and in languages such as Arabic, what a character looks like can depend on

its position inside a word. The character may change form when it appears at the start (initial position), middle (medial
position), or end (final position) of a word, and it may change form as well when it appears alone (isolated position).
Select a character and choose a Positional Forms option to format it correctly. The General Form option inserts the
common character; the Automatic Form option inserts a form of the character according to where the character is
located in the word and whether the character appears in isolation.
Superscript/Superior & Subscript/Inferior Some OpenType fonts include raised or lowered glyphs that are sized
correctly relative to the surrounding characters. If an OpenType font doesn’t include these glyphs for non-standard
fractions, consider using the Numerator and Denominator attributes.
Numerator & Denominator Some OpenType fonts convert only basic fractions (such as 1/2 or 1/4) to fraction glyphs,

not non-standard fractions (such as 4/13 or 99/100). Apply Numerator and Denominator attributes to these nonstandard fractions in such cases.
Tabular Lining Same widths are provided for full-height figures. This option is appropriate in situations where

numbers need to line up from one line to the next, as in tables.
Proportional Oldstyle Varying-height figures with varying widths are provided. This option is recommended for a
classic, sophisticated look in text that doesn’t use all caps.

Last updated 6/13/2015

266
Typography

Proportional Lining Full-height figures with varying widths are provided. This option is recommended for text that

uses all caps.
Tabular Oldstyle Varying-height figures with fixed, equal widths are provided. This option is recommended when you
want the classic appearance of old-style figures, but you need them to align in columns, as in an annual report.
Default Figure Style Figure glyphs use the default figure style of the current font.
Use Proportional Metrics Characters are composed using the proportional metrics of the font.
Use H or V Kana For fonts that include Kana for vertical or horizontal writing, Kana glyphs most appropriate for

horizontal or vertical settings are provided.
Roman Italics If the font contains italic glyphs, the proportional Roman glyph switches to italic type.

Apply OpenType glyph forms
The Glyphs panel includes a number of options, such as Expert Forms or JIS 90 Forms, that you can apply to selected
text.
1 Choose Type > Glyphs to open the Glyphs panel.
2 Select the character or characters to which you’d like to apply glyph forms.
3 Choose an option such as Expert Forms or JIS 90 from the Glyphs panel menu.

For more information on OpenType fonts, see www.adobe.com/go/opentype.

Composite fonts
In InDesign, you can mix parts of different fonts and use them as a composite font in InDesign or Adobe InCopy®.
Normally this technique is used to mix parts of a roman font and a CJK font. Composite fonts that you’ve created in
InDesign are displayed at the beginning of the font list in InCopy. You can apply these fonts to text, but you cannot
create or edit composite fonts in InCopy. For details, see InDesign Help.

Use composite fonts
You can mix parts of different fonts and use them as a composite font. Normally this technique is used to mix parts of
a Roman font and a CJK font. You can also add characters to a font. Composite fonts are displayed at the beginning of
the font list.

A Character categories B Input menu for each category change C Scale at the center of the character

Create composite fonts
1 Choose Type > Composite Font.

Last updated 6/13/2015

267
Typography

2 Click New, enter the name, specify the composite font on which the new composite font will be based, and then click

OK.
3 Select a category (roman or other), and specify the font attributes under the list box.

You can specify font attributes by clicking Show Sample to display the sample edit window, and clicking the button
on the right to choose Show or Hide for the colored lines that indicate the ICF box, embox, baseline and so on.
Furthermore, from the Horizontal Text and Vertical Text options, you can switch the text direction of the sample
text and display it horizontally or vertically.
4 Click Save to save the settings for the composite font created, and then click OK.

Composite font categories
Fonts are classified in the following categories:
Kanji (or Hangul) Kanji characters are used in Japanese and Chinese. Hangul characters are used in Korean. You cannot

edit the size, baseline, vertical scale, or horizontal scale for kanji or hangul.
Kana Specifies fonts used for hiragana and katakana. When you are making composite fonts using a language other

than Japanese, use the same font for Kana as you use in your base font.
Punctuation Specifies the font used for punctuation. You cannot edit the size, vertical scale, or horizontal scale for

punctuation.
Full Width Symbols Specifies the font used for symbols. You cannot edit the size, vertical scale, or horizontal scale for

symbols.
Roman Specifies the font used for half-width roman characters. This is normally a roman font.
Numbers Specifies the font used for half-width numbers. This is normally a roman font.

The font attributes that can be set for composite fonts are as follows:
Units Select the units for font attribute settings.
Size Set the size in relation to the font size used for input. The size may differ for different fonts, even when the same

font size is used. You can adjust the size, depending on the fonts used in the composite font.
Baseline Set a baseline for each font.
Vertical scale and horizontal scale Scale the font vertically and horizontally. You can only use these settings for kana,
half-width roman characters, and numbers.
Enlarge/Shrink from Center of Character Set whether to scale from the center of the character or the roman baseline,

when editing vertical and horizontal scales for kana. If you select this option, the characters will be scaled from the
center.

Make custom font settings in a composite font
You can set the font in character units by setting Custom for composite fonts.
1 Click Custom in the Composite Font Editor dialog box.
2 Do one of the following:

• If there is an existing character set, select it.
• Click the New button, enter a name for the character set, choose Custom Set From Based On, and click OK. The
following base sets are provided: Hiragana, Katakana, Punctuation, Symbols, Double Byte Numbers, Single Byte
Numbers, Single-Byte Gaiji 0-11. Using these, you can easily create character sets to meet your requirements. If
Based On is not needed, choose None and click OK.

Last updated 6/13/2015

268
Typography

If you have selected a base set, the characters stored in the selected set will be shown in the Custom Set Edit dialog
box. If None is selected, no characters will be displayed.
3 Use Font to specify the font to use with the Custom Set. If Single Byte Gaiji is specified as the base set, choose the

single byte Gaiji you would like to use.
4 To add a glyph directly, choose Direct Entry from the pop-up menu, enter the characters in the text box, and click

Add. You can also copy and paste characters directly into the dialog box from the IME panel.
5 To enter a code, specify the encoding type (such as Shift-JIS for Japanese) from the pop-up menu, enter the code or

hyphenated code range (such as 8169-8174 for Japanese), and click Add.
6 Select characters you want to delete. The Add button becomes a Delete button; the selected characters will be deleted

when you click Delete.
7 If multiple custom sets have been created, choose the edited character set from the Custom Set pop-up menu. You

can delete sets that are no longer needed by clicking Delete on the right side of the dialog box.
8 When you have completed editing, click Save to save the character and then click OK.
9 The custom set that was set in the Composite Font Edit dialog box will be displayed, allowing you to set the

composite font.
Note: When there are several custom characters in 1 composite font, the bottom set takes precedence over all the above sets.
MM (multiple master) fonts are not displayed in the Composite Font Edit dialog box.

Import composite fonts
1 Click Import in the Composite Font Editor dialog box.
2 Double-click the InDesign document containing the composite fonts you want to import.

Delete a composite font
1 Select the composite font you want to delete in the Composite Font Editor dialog box.
2 Click Delete Font, and then click Yes.

Use missing glyph protection
By default, InCopy protects you from typing characters that the current font does not support or from applying a font
to a selection of text when that font does not contain one or more of the glyphs selected. However, you can turn off
preference settings to remove this protection.
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Advanced Type (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Advanced Type (Mac OS).
2 Do any of the following and then click OK.
Protect While Typing Select this option so that you cannot type glyphs that the current font does not support.
Protect When Applying Fonts Select this option to avoid introducing unsupported glyphs when a different font,

such as a Roman font, is applied to Asian-language text.

Work with missing fonts
When you open or place documents that include fonts not installed on your system, an alert message appears,
indicating which fonts are missing. If you select text that uses a missing font, the Character panel or Control panel
indicates that this font is missing by displaying it in brackets in the font style pop-up menu.

Last updated 6/13/2015

269
Typography

InCopy substitutes missing fonts with an available font. When this happens, you can select the text and apply any other
available font. Missing fonts for which others have been substituted will appear at the top of the Type > Font menu in
a section marked “Missing Fonts.” By default, text formatted with missing fonts appears in pink highlighting.
If a TrueType font is installed and the document contains a Type 1 (T1) version of the same font, the font is displayed
as missing.
You can choose Type > Find Font to find and change missing fonts. If a missing font is part of a style, you can update
the font in that style by changing its style definition.

Make missing fonts available
❖ Do any of the following:

• Install the missing fonts on your system.
• Place the missing fonts in the Fonts folder, which is located in the InCopy application folder. Fonts in this folder
are available only to InCopy . See Installing fonts.
• Activate the missing fonts using a font-management application.
If you don’t have access to the missing fonts, use the Find Font command to search for and replace missing fonts.

Highlight substituted fonts in your document
If the Select Substituted Fonts preferences option is selected, text formatted with missing fonts appears in pink
highlighting so that you can easily identify text formatted with a missing font.
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Composition (Windows®) or InCopy > Preferences > Composition (Mac OS®).
2 Select Substituted Fonts, and then click OK.

Document installed fonts
Fonts in a Document Fonts folder that is in the same location as an InCopy document are temporarily installed when
the document is opened. The Package command can generate a Document Fonts folder when you want to share your
document or move it to a different computer.
Fonts in the Document Fonts folder are not the same as fonts available from the standard operating system font
locations. They are installed when the document is opened and supersede any font of the same PostScript name.
However, they supersede only fonts within the document. Fonts installed by one document are not available to other
documents. When you close the document, the fonts that were installed for the document are uninstalled. Document
installed fonts are listed in a submenu of the Font menu.
Some Type1 fonts are not available in the document. In addition, Mac OS fonts are not available when running
InDesign in Windows.
For a video on using document installed fonts, see http://tv.adobe.com/go/4955/.

Multiple master fonts
Multiple master fonts are customizable Type 1 fonts whose typeface characteristics are described in terms of variable
design axes, such as weight, width, style, and optical size.

Last updated 6/13/2015

270
Typography

Some multiple master fonts include an optical size axis, which lets you use a font specifically designed for optimal
readability at a particular size. Generally, the optical size for a smaller font, such as 10 point, is designed with heavier
serifs and stems, wider characters, less contrast between thick and thin lines, taller x height, and looser spacing between
letters than the optical size for a larger font, such as 72 point.
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Type (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Type (Mac OS).
2 Select Automatically Use Correct Optical Size, and click OK.

More Help topics
Insert glyphs and special characters
Find and change fonts
Package files

Text composition
Compose text
The appearance of text on your page depends on a complex interaction of processes called composition. Using the word
spacing, letterspacing, glyph scaling, and hyphenation options you’ve selected, InCopy composes your type in a way
that best supports the specified parameters.
InCopy offers two composition methods: Adobe Paragraph Composer (the default) and Adobe Single-line Composer
(both are available from the Control panel menu). You can select which composer to use from the Paragraph panel
menu, the Justification dialog box, or the Control panel menu.
InCopy supports four methods developed for typesetting, including Adobe Japanese Single-line Composer, Adobe
Japanese Paragraph Composer, Adobe Paragraph Composer, and Adobe Single-line Composer. Each Composer
evaluates possible breaks for Japanese and Roman text, and chooses those which best support the hyphenation and
justification options specified for a given paragraph. The Adobe Japanese Paragraph Composer is selected by the
default. For details on these options, see InCopy Help.
For a video tutorial on working with text, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0075.
InDesign Magazine provides an article about fixing composition problems at Mind the Gaps.

Composition methods
InCopy offers two composition methods: Adobe Paragraph Composer (the default) and Adobe Single-line Composer.
Both composition methods evaluate possible breaks, and choose those that best support the hyphenation and
justification options you’ve specified for a given paragraph.
The Adobe Paragraph Composer
Considers a network of breakpoints for an entire paragraph, and thus can optimize earlier lines in the paragraph in
order to eliminate especially unattractive breaks later on. Paragraph composition results in more even spacing with
fewer hyphens.
The Paragraph Composer approaches composition by identifying possible breakpoints, evaluating them, and assigning
a weighted penalty to them based on such principles as evenness of letterspacing, word spacing, and hyphenation.

Last updated 6/13/2015

271
Typography

You can use the Hyphenation dialog box to determine the relationship between better spacing and fewer hyphens. (See
Hyphenate text.)
The Adobe Single-line Composer
Offers a traditional approach to composing text one line at a time. This option is useful if you want to restrict
composition changes from late-stage edits.

Choose a composition method for a paragraph
❖ Do any of the following:

• From the Paragraph panel menu, choose Adobe Paragraph Composer (the default) or Adobe Single-line
Composer.
• From the Paragraph panel menu or the Control panel menu, choose Justification, and then choose an option
from the Composer menu.
Note: Additional composition engine plug-ins from other companies may be available, along with interfaces that let you
customize an engine’s parameters.

Set composition preferences
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Composition (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Composition (Mac OS).
2 To use on-screen highlighting to identify compositional problems, select Keep Violations And H&J Violations

(hyphenation and justification).
3 To justify text that wraps around an object, select Justify Text Next To An Object.
4 Under Mojikumi Compatibility Modes, determine whether you want to select Use New Vertical Scaling or Use CID-

Based Mojikumi.
5 Click OK.

Hyphenate text
The settings you choose for hyphenation and justification affect the horizontal spacing of lines and the aesthetic appeal
of type on your pages. Hyphenation options determine whether words can be hyphenated and, if they can, which breaks
are allowable.
Justification is controlled by the alignment option you choose, the word spacing and letterspacing you specify, and
whether or not you have used glyph scaling. You can also justify single words in narrow columns of fully justified text.
Eda Warren provides an article about avoiding composition problems at Mind the Gaps.

Adjust hyphenation manually
You can hyphenate words manually or automatically, or you can use a combination of the two methods. The safest way
to hyphenate manually is to insert a discretionary hyphen, which is not visible unless the word needs to be broken at the
end of a line. Placing a discretionary hyphen at the beginning of a word prevents it from being broken.
1 Using the Type tool

, click where you want to insert the hyphen.

2 Do one of the following:

• Choose Type > Insert Special Character > Hyphens And Dashes > Discretionary Hyphen.
• Press Ctrl+Shift+- (Windows) or Command+Shift+- (Mac OS) to insert a discretionary hyphen.

Last updated 6/13/2015

272
Typography

Note: Entering a discretionary hyphen in a word does not guarantee that the word will be hyphenated. Whether or not the
word breaks depends on other hyphenation and composition settings. However, entering a discretionary hyphen in a word
does guarantee that the word can be broken only where the discretionary hyphen appears.

Adjust hyphenation automatically
Hyphenation is based on word lists that can be stored either in a separate user dictionary file on your computer, or in
the document itself. To ensure consistent hyphenation, you may want to specify which word list to refer to, especially
if you will be taking your document to a service provider or if you work in a workgroup.
❖ To turn automatic hyphenation on or off for a paragraph, in the Paragraph panel or Control panel, select or deselect

the Hyphenation option. (You can also include this option in a paragraph style.)
When you set automatic hyphenation options, you can determine the relationship between better spacing and fewer
hyphens. You can also prevent capitalized words and the last word in a paragraph from being hyphenated.

Set automatic hyphenation options for a paragraph
1 Click in a paragraph or select the range of paragraphs you want to affect.
2 Choose Hyphenation from the Paragraph panel menu.
3 Select the Hyphenate option.
4 Make changes to the following settings as needed, and then click OK:
Words With At Least _ Letters Specify the minimum number of characters for hyphenated words.
After First _ Letters / Before Last _ Letters Specify the minimum number of characters at the beginning or end of a

word that can be broken by a hyphen. For example, by specifying 3 for these values, aromatic would be hyphenated
as aro- matic instead of ar- omatic or aromat- ic.
Hyphen Limit _ Hyphens Specify the maximum number of hyphens that can appear on consecutive lines. Zero
means unlimited hyphens.
Hyphenation Zone Specify the amount of white space allowed at the end of a line of unjustified text before

hyphenation begins. This option applies only when you’re using the Single-line Composer with nonjustified text.
Better Spacing / Fewer Hyphens To alter the balance between these settings, adjust the slider at the bottom of the

dialog box.
Hyphenate Capitalized Words To prevent capitalized words from being hyphenated, deselect this option.
Hyphenate Last Word To prevent last words in paragraphs from being hyphenated, deselect this option.
Hyphenate Across Column To prevent words from being hyphenated across a column, frame, or page, deselect this

option.

Prevent unwanted word breaks
By using nonbreaking hyphens, you can prevent certain words from breaking at all—for example, proper names or
words which, when broken, become unattractive fragments. By using nonbreaking spaces, you can also keep multiple
words from breaking—for example, clusters of initials and a last name (P. T. Barnum).

Prevent text from breaking
1 Select the text you want to keep on the same line.
2 Choose No Break from the Character panel menu or the Control panel menu.

Last updated 6/13/2015

273
Typography

Another way to prevent a word from breaking is to place a discretionary hyphen at the beginning of the word. Press
Ctrl+Shift+- (Windows) or Command+Shift+- (Mac OS) to insert a discretionary hyphen.

Create a nonbreaking hyphen
1 Using the Type tool

, click where you want to insert the hyphen.

2 Choose Type > Insert Special Character > Hyphens And Dashes > Nonbreaking Hyphen.

Create a nonbreaking space
1 Using the Type tool

, click where you want to insert the space.

2 Choose Type > Insert White Space> Nonbreaking Space (or any other white space character).

The Nonbreaking Space varies in width depending on point size, the justification setting, and word space settings,
whereas the Nonbreaking Space (Fixed Width) character maintains the same width regardless of context.

Change Justification settings
Use the Justification panel to precisely control how word spacing, letterspacing, and glyph scaling. Adjusting spacing is
especially useful with justified type, although you can also adjust spacing for unjustified type.
Word spacing, character spacing, and glyph scalings for justification settings, are ignored for CJK text. To set CJK text
character spacing, use the Mojikumi dialog box.

Adjust word and letterspacing in justified text
1 Insert the cursor in the paragraph you want to change, or select a type object or frame to change all of its paragraphs.
2 Choose Justification from the Paragraph panel menu.
3 Enter values for Word Spacing, Letter Spacing, and Glyph Spacing. The Minimum and Maximum values define a

range of acceptable spacing for justified paragraphs only. The Desired value defines the desired spacing for both
justified and unjustified paragraphs:
Word Spacing The space between words that results from pressing the spacebar. Word Spacing values can range

from 0% to 1000%; at 100%, no additional space is added between words.
Letter Spacing The distance between letters, including kerning or tracking values. Letter Spacing values can range
from -100% to 500%: at 0%, no space is added between letters; at 100%, an entire space width is added between
letters.
Glyph Scaling The width of characters (a glyph is any font character). Glyph Scaling values can range from 50% to

200%.
Spacing options are always applied to an entire paragraph. To adjust the spacing in a few characters, but not an
entire paragraph, use the Tracking option.
4 Set the Single Word Justification option to specify how you want to justify single-word paragraphs.

In narrow columns, a single word can occasionally appear by itself on a line. If the paragraph is set to full
justification, a single word on a line may appear to be too stretched out. Instead of leaving such words fully justified,
you can center them or align them to the left or right margins.

Set glyph scaling in justified text
1 Click an insertion point in a paragraph or select the paragraphs you want to affect.
2 Choose Justification from the Paragraph panel menu.

Last updated 6/13/2015

274
Typography

3 Type values for Glyph Scaling Minimum, Desired, and Maximum. Then click OK.

Glyph scaling can help in achieving even justification; however, values more than 3% from the 100% default value may
result in distorted letter shapes. Unless you’re striving for a special effect, it’s best to keep glyph scaling to subtle values,
such as 97–100–103.

Use a flush space with justified text
Using a flush space character adds a variable amount of space to the last line of a fully justified paragraph—between the
last word and an end-of-story character from a decorative font. Used with nonjustified text, the flush space appears as
a normal word space. In justified text, it expands to absorb all available extra space on the last line. Using a flush space
can make a dramatic difference in the way the entire paragraph is formatted by the Adobe Paragraph Composer.

1 Using the Type tool

, click directly in front of the end-of-story character.

2 Choose Type > Insert White Space > Flush Space.

Note: The effect of a flush space isn’t apparent until you apply the Justify All Lines option to the paragraph.

Highlight lines that are too loose or tight
Because composing a line of type involves factors in addition to word spacing and letterspacing (hyphenation
preferences, for example), InDesign cannot always honor your settings for word spacing and letterspacing. However,
compositional problems in lines of text can be highlighted in yellow; the darkest of three shades indicates the most
serious problems.
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Composition (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Composition (Mac OS).
2 Select H&J Violations and click OK.

More Help topics
Working with Text video
Justify text next to wrap objects
Change CJK composition preferences
Hyphenation and spelling dictionaries

Last updated 6/13/2015

275
Typography

Tabs and indents
Tabs dialog box overview
Tabs position text at specific horizontal locations in a frame. The default tab settings depend on the Horizontal ruler
units setting in the Units & Increments preferences dialog box.
Tabs apply to an entire paragraph. The first tab you set deletes all default tab stops to its left. Subsequent tabs delete all
default tabs between the tabs you set. You can set left, center, right, and decimal or special-character tabs.
You set tabs using the Tabs dialog box.

A Tab alignment buttons B Tab position C Tab Leader box D Align On box E Tab ruler F Snap above frame

When you do this in a vertical text frame, the Tabs dialog box also becomes vertical. When the Tabs dialog box direction
is not consistent with the text frame direction, click on the magnet icon to snap the rulers to the current text frame.

Open the Tabs dialog box
1 Using the Type tool, click in the text frame.
2 Choose Type > Tabs.

If the top of the frame is visible, the Tabs dialog box snaps to the current text frame and matches its width to the current
column.

Last updated 6/13/2015

276
Typography

When the top of a horizontal frame is displayed, the Tabs dialog box will snap to the top of the current text frame, and
the width will change to conform to the width of the current column. When there is a text insertion point in a vertical
frame, the Tabs dialog box will snap to the right side of the text frame, and the length displayed will conform to the
length of the current column.

Align the Tabs dialog box ruler with your text
1 In Layout View, scroll through your document to display the top of the content.
2 Scroll through your document to display the top of the text frame.
3 Click the magnet icon

on the Tabs dialog box. The Tabs dialog box snaps to the top of the column that includes
the selection or the insertion point.

Set tabs
You can set left, center, right, and decimal or special-character tabs. When you use the special-character tab, you can
set a tab to align to any character you choose, such as a colon or a dollar sign.
Bob Bringhurst provides an article about various tab and indent effects at Tabs and Indents Gallery.
1 To see the effect of changing tab settings, choose View > Layout View.
2 Using the Type tool

, click an insertion point in the paragraph.

3 Press the Tab key. Add tabs in the paragraphs where you want to add horizontal space. (You can also add tabs after

you create your tab settings.)

4 Choose Type > Tabs to display the Tabs dialog box.
5 To specify which paragraphs will be affected, select a paragraph or a group of paragraphs.

Note: In Galley view and Story view, adding a tab at the beginning of the paragraph indents the text the same amount,
regardless of the tab position. Layout view shows the actual distance of the tab.
6 For the first tab, click a tab-alignment button (left, right, center, or decimal) in the Tabs dialog box to specify how

text will align to the tab’s position.
7 Do one of the following:

• Click a location on the tab ruler to position a new tab.

Last updated 6/13/2015

277
Typography

• Type a position in the X box and press Enter or Return. If the X value is selected, press the up or down arrow key
to increase or decrease the tab value by 1 point, respectively.
8 For subsequent tabs with different alignments, repeat steps 3 and 4.

To insert a tab character in a table, choose Type > Insert Special Character > Other > Tab.

Repeat tabs
The Repeat Tab command creates multiple tabs based on the distance between the tab and the left indent or the
previous tab stop.
1 Click an insertion point in the paragraph.
2 In the Tabs panel, select a tab stop on the ruler.
3 Choose Repeat Tab from the panel menu.

A Tab-alignment buttons B Tab stop on the ruler C Panel menu

Move, delete, and edit tab settings
Use the Tabs dialog box to move, delete, and edit tab settings.

Move a tab setting
1 Using the Type tool

, click an insertion point in the paragraph.

2 In the Tabs dialog box, select a tab on the tab ruler.
3 Do one of the following:

• Type a new location for X and press Enter or Return.
• Drag the tab to a new location.
Last updated 6/13/2015

278
Typography

Delete a tab setting
1 Click an insertion point in the paragraph.
2 Do one of the following:

• Drag the tab off the tab ruler.
• Select the tab, and choose Delete Tab from the panel menu.
• To return to the default tab stops, choose Clear All from the panel menu.

Change a tab from one alignment to another
1 In the Tabs dialog box, select a tab on the tab ruler.
2 Click a tab-alignment button.

You can also hold down Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) while clicking the tab setting to cycle through the four
alignment options.

Specify characters for decimal tabs
You use decimal tabs to align text with a character you specify, such as a period or a dollar sign.
1 In the Tabs panel, create or select a decimal tab

on the tab ruler.

2 In the Align On box, type the character to which you want to align. You can type or paste any character. Make sure

that the paragraphs you’re aligning contain that character.

Add tab leaders
A tab leader is a repeated pattern of characters, such as a series of dots or dashes, between a tab and the following text.
1 In the Tabs panel, select a tab stop on the ruler.
2 Type a pattern of as many as eight characters in the Leader box, and then press Enter or Return. The characters you

entered repeat across the width of the tab.
3 To change the font or other formatting of the tab leader, select the tab character in the text frame, and use the

Character panel or Type menu to apply formatting.

Insert right indent tabs
In one step, you can add a right-aligned tab at the right indent, making it easier to prepare tabular text that spans an
entire column. Right indent tabs are slightly different from regular tabs. A right indent tab:

• Aligns all subsequent text to the right edge of the text frame. If the same paragraph includes any tabs after the right
indent tab, those tabs and their text are pushed to the next line.

Last updated 6/13/2015

279
Typography

• Is a special character located in the text, not in the Tabs dialog box. You add a right indent tab using a context menu,
not the Tabs dialog box. As a result, a right indent tab can’t be part of a paragraph style.
• Is different from the Right Indent value in the Paragraph panel. The Right Indent value keeps the entire right edge
of the paragraph away from the right edge of the text frame.
• Can be used with a tab leader. Right indent tabs use the tab leader of the first tab stop past the right margin, or, if
there isn't one, the last tab stop before the right margin.
1 Using the Type tool

, click on the line where you want to add the right indent tab.

2 Choose Type > Insert Special Character > Other > Right Indent Tab.

Set indents
Indents move text inward from the right and left edges of the frame. In general, use first-line indents, not spaces or tabs,
to indent the first line of a paragraph.
A first-line indent is positioned relative to the left-margin indent. For example, if a paragraph’s left edge is indented one
pica, setting the first-line indent to one pica indents the first line of the paragraph two picas from the left edge of the
frame or inset.
You can set indents using the Tabs dialog box, the Paragraph panel, or the Control panel. You can also set indents when
you create bulleted or numbered lists.
When setting CJK characters, you can use the mojikumi setting to specify the indent for the first line. However, for text
in which the first line indent was specified in the Paragraph panel, if you specify indents in mojikumi settings, you can
make the text indent the sum value of both indents.
Bob Bringhurst provides an article about various tab and indent effects at Tabs and Indents Gallery.

Set an indent using the Tabs dialog box
1 Using the Type tool

, click in the paragraph you want to indent.

2 Choose Type > Tabs to display the Tabs dialog box.
3 Do one of the following to the indent markers

in the Tabs dialog box:

• Drag the top marker to indent the first line of text. Drag the bottom marker to move both markers and indent
the entire paragraph.

• Select the top marker and type a value for X to indent the first line of text. Select the bottom marker and type a
value for X to move both markers and indent the entire paragraph.
For more information on using the Tabs dialog box, see Tabs dialog box overview.

Set indents using the Paragraph panel or the Control panel
1 Using the Type tool

, click in the paragraph you want to indent.

Last updated 6/13/2015

280
Typography

2 Adjust the appropriate indent values in the Paragraph panel or Control panel. For example, do the following:

• To indent the entire paragraph one pica, type a value (such as 1p) in the Left Indent box

• To indent only the first line of a paragraph one pica, type a value (such as 1p) in the First Line Left Indent box
.
• To create a hanging indent of one pica, type a positive value (such as 1p) in the Left Indent box and type a
negative value (such as -1p) in the First Line Left Indent box. See Set indents.

Reset indents
1 Click in the paragraph in which you want to reset indents to the zero mark.
2 Choose Reset Indents from the Tabs dialog box menu.

Create a hanging indent
In a hanging indent, all the lines in a paragraph are indented except for the first line. Hanging indents are especially
useful when you want to add inline graphics at the beginning of the paragraph.

1 Using the Type tool

, click in the paragraph you want to indent.

2 In the Tabs dialog box or the Control panel, specify a left indent value greater than zero.
3 To specify a negative first-line left indent value, do one of the following:

• In the Control panel, type a negative value for the first-line left indent

• In the Tabs dialog box, drag the top marker to the left, or select the marker and type a negative value for X.
In most cases, you’ll specify the negative equivalent of the value you entered in step 2; for instance, if you specified a
left indent of 2 picas, your first-line left indent will typically be –2 picas.

Right-indent the last line of a paragraph
You can use the Last Line Right Indent option to add a hanging indent on the right side of the last line in a paragraph.
This option is especially useful for right-aligning prices in a sales catalog.

Last updated 6/13/2015

281
Typography

1 Type your paragraphs. In the last line of each paragraph, place the insertion point before the text to be indented, and

choose Type > Insert Special Character > Other > Right Indent Tab.
2 Select the paragraphs.
3 To create a right indent for paragraphs, specify a value (such as 2p) in the Right Indent field of the Paragraph panel

or Control panel.
4 To offset the right indent value for the text that follows the tab, type a negative value (such as -2p) in the Last Line

Right Indent field of the Paragraph panel or Control panel.

Use Indent To Here
You can use the Indent To Here special character to indent lines in a paragraph independently of a paragraph’s left
indent value. The Indent To Here special character is different from the paragraph’s left indent in the following ways:

• Indent To Here is part of the text flow, as if it were a visible character. If text reflows, the indent moves with it.
• Indent To Here affects all lines after the line where you’ve added its special characters, so you can indent just some
of the lines in a paragraph.
• When you choose Type > Show Hidden Characters, the Indent To Here character

1 Using the Type tool

, click the insertion point where you would like to indent.

2 Choose Type > Insert Special Character > Other > Indent To Here.

More Help topics
Create bulleted or numbered lists

Last updated 6/13/2015

is visible.

282
Typography

Leading
About leading
This topic refers to how leading is implemented in Roman composition. For information on leading in CJK text, see
About leading in Asian text.
The vertical space between lines of type is called leading. Leading is measured from the baseline of one line of text to
the baseline of the line above it. Baseline is the invisible line on which most letters—that is, those without descenders—
sit.
The default auto-leading option sets the leading at 120% of the type size (for example, 12-point leading for 10-point
type). When auto-leading is in use, InCopy displays the leading value in parentheses in the Leading menu of the
Character panel.

A Leading B Text height C Larger text size of one word increases leading for that one line.

About leading in Asian text
The basis position for leading can be set through the Leading Basis Position setting in the Paragraph panel menu. With
the default setting (Embox Top/Right), the text line leading is measured from the top of its embox to the top of the next
line's embox. By selecting the line and increasing the leading value using the Embox top/Right setting, the space
between the selected line and the next line will grow, because the direction leading is measured from the current line
to the next line. All other Leading Basis Position settings measure leading from the current line to the previous line, so
changing the leading amount with those settings will increase the line aki above the current line.

Set leading from Leading in the Character panel or Control panel. This is set to Automatic by default. When Auto
Leading is set, the leading value is displayed in parentheses in Leading in the Character panel. This Automatic value
varies for text frames and text in frame grids. The Automatic Leading value can be set from the Justification menu item
in the Paragraph panel. The default setting for the automatic leading value for text in text frames in InCopy is 175% of
the set font size. For text in frame grids, it is 100%, which allows for the grid alignment to spread out the lines of the
text in the grid.

Last updated 6/13/2015

283
Typography

When grid alignment is set to None, set text leading in the text frame with the Leading value in the Character panel.
When grid alignment is set to anything other than None, leading will be applied according to the baseline grid settings.
Note: When copying text placed on the frame grid and pasting into a text frame, the text is pasted with the frame grid
attributes intact, so Automatic in Leading is set to 100%. If line spacing appears squeezed, set a value for Leading instead
of using the automatic setting.
To set Leading for text in frame grids use Line Gap in the Frame Grid Settings dialog box instead of the leading value.
The leading value for text in the frame grid is the sum of the Line Gap value and the grid size (font size). In other words,
if the grid size is 13Q and line gap is 10H, the actual leading value will be "23H".
Please note that for text placed in the frame grid, the default grid justification is set to Center. In this case, the value
between the grid center and the center of the next grid will be the leading value. When grid justification has been set
to None, leading will be applied from the location specified in the grid. When grid justification is set to None, leading
will be applied according to the value set in Leading in the Character panel.
Leading within a frame grid is complex. For placed text, the actual leading value changes depending on the Font Size,
Leading value and also the Gyoudori settings in the Paragraph panel. Take note of the following:

• If you leave the font size for the frame grid unchanged, but make the font size or leading value of placed text smaller
than the grid size in the Character panel, the text will be aligned to the grid according to the Grid Justification
settings.
• If you leave the font size (grid size) for a frame grid unchanged but use the Character panel to make the font size of
placed text larger than the grid size+line gap, gyoudori will be determined automatically, and you can align to the
grid in increments of 0.5 lines, therefore 1.5, 2, 2.5 and 3 and so on if Gyoudori is set to Automatic. If Gyoudori is
set to anything other than Automatic, text will be aligned to the grid according to this setting, and for a large font
size the characters will overlap.
• If you leave the font size (grid size) of the frame grid unchanged but use the Character panel to set the gyoudori of
placed text to a value larger than the grid size+line gap, leading will apply to the next line when leading is set to
Automatic. For example, if the frame grid size is 13Q and the line gap is set to 10H, when leading is set to 24H, text
will be placed on every other line. If set to 47H, text will be placed on every third line. For any leading setting other
than Automatic, the value set in Leading will be ignored.

Change leading
By default, leading is a character attribute, which means that you can apply more than one leading value within the same
paragraph. The largest leading value in a line of type determines the leading for that line. However, you can select a
preferences option so that leading applies to the entire paragraph, instead of to text within a paragraph. This setting
does not affect the leading in existing frames.

Change leading of selected text
1 Select the text you want to change.
2 Do any of the following:

• In the Character panel or Control panel, choose the leading you want from the Leading menu

• Select the existing leading value and type a new value.
• While creating a paragraph style, change the leading using the Basic Character Formats panel.

Last updated 6/13/2015

284
Typography

If InCopy ignores the leading change, it may be due to Vertical Justification or Align To Baseline Grid being selected.
Choose Object > Text Frame Options and make sure Vertical Justification is set to Top, and make sure Do Not Align
To Baseline Grid is selected in the Paragraph panel, Control panel, or paragraph style.
You can also adjust vertical space by aligning text to the baseline grid. When baseline grid is set, the baseline grid setting
takes precedence over the leading value.

Change the default leading percentage
1 Select the paragraphs that you want to change.
2 Choose Justification from the Paragraph panel menu or from the Control panel menu.
3 Choose Roman Justification from the Paragraph panel menu.
4 For Auto Leading, specify a new default percentage. The minimum value is 0%, and the maximum value is 500%.

Note: The Auto option in the Leading pop-up menu of the Control panel menu sets Auto Leading value in the Justification
dialog box as a ratio (%) of character size. The default is 175% for text frames and 100% for frame grids.

Apply leading to whole paragraphs
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Type (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Type (Mac OS).
2 Select Apply Leading To Entire Paragraph, and then click OK.

Note: When you use a character style to apply leading to text, the leading affects only the text to which the style is applied,
not the entire paragraph, regardless of whether the Apply Leading To Entire Paragraph option is selected.

Adjust line height based on character proportion
By changing the text orientation in a frame grid to its opposite (for horizontal text, it is vertical; for vertical text, it is
horizontal), the line height will be changed by default regardless of the grid size. For example, for 13Q characters placed
in a horizontal type 13Q frame grid, when setting the character's vertical proportion to 200%, regardless of grid size,
the line height will be doubled and become 26Q. If this function is turned off, the line height will be the same as the
character height and only the character proportion will be changed.
1 Select text for which you would like to change the line height based on character proportion.
2 From the Character panel menu or Control panel menu, select Adjust Line Height With Character Scale.

The line height is adjusted. As a character attribute, this feature is set for each character, but line height is applied to
an entire line containing the set characters.
To disable this feature, select the text for which the feature was enabled, and reselect Adjust Line Height with Character
Scale from the Character panel menu or Control panel menu, and turn it off.

Apply the leading basis position
If you set grid alignment to None, leading is applied from the top or right of the embox of the current line to the top or
right of the embox of the next line by default. Increasing the leading value causes the new value to be applied to all
selected lines.
1 Select the text and set Grid Alignment to None in the Paragraph panel menu or the Control panel menu.
2 Specify Leading in the Character panel. Specify a value other than Automatic and set to Static Value Leading.
3 Select the appropriate leading basis from Leading Basis Position in the Paragraph panel menu or the Control panel

menu.

Last updated 6/13/2015

285
Typography

To set even leading regardless of font size, you can use Embox Center to set leading from the center of the line.
For frame grids, to align to the grid line spacing for lines with different font sizes, set grid alignment to Center and set
Gyoudori to anything other than Automatic in the Paragraph panel.

Leading Basis Position options
From Leading Basis Position in the Paragraph panel menu or Control panel menu, select from the following options
for leading basis.
Embox Top/Right Leading will be based on the top of the embox for horizontal type or on the right of the embox for

vertical type. Leading is measured from the top or right of the current line to the top or right of the next line. These
settings are the default settings.
Embox Center Leading will be based from the center of the current line to the center of the previous line. If different

font sizes exist within the same paragraph, the space between the embox edges of each line will be uneven. When
Embox Center is selected, by setting fixed leading for text with differing font sizes, you can align line spacing for
surrounding lines because leading will occur based on the center of the current embox.
Roman Baseline Leading occurs based on the Roman Baseline. Leading is measured from the baseline of the current
line to the baseline of the previous line. This leading method is the same as that which is used in the Roman composer.
The Roman Baseline is different for each font. The character position may vary even within the same font size if the
fonts are different.
Embox Bottom/Left Leading occurs based from the bottom of the embox for horizontal type or from the left of the
embox for vertical type. Leading is measured from the left or bottom of the current line to the left or bottom of the
previous line.

Note: The same item is present in Grid Alignment in both the Paragraph panel menu and in the Control panel menu. These
items are the bases for aligning to the grid, and not bases for leading. Do not confuse these.

More Help topics
Frame grid properties
Align paragraphs to a baseline grid

Kerning and tracking
About kerning and tracking
Kerning is the process of adding or subtracting space between specific pairs of characters. Tracking is the process of
loosening or tightening a block of text.
Note: Values for kerning and tracking affect Japanese text but normally these options are used to adjust the aki between
roman characters.
Types of kerning
You can automatically kern type using metrics kerning or optical kerning. Metrics kerning uses kern pairs, which are
included with most fonts. Kern pairs contain information about the spacing of specific pairs of letters. Some of these
are: LA, P., To, Tr, Ta, Tu, Te, Ty, Wa, WA, We, Wo, Ya, and Yo.

Last updated 6/13/2015

286
Typography

InCopy uses metrics kerning by default so that specific pairs are automatically kerned when you import or type text.
To disable metrics kerning, select "0".
Optical kerning adjusts the spacing between adjacent characters based on their shapes. Some fonts include robust kernpair specifications. However, when a font includes only minimal built-in kerning or none at all, or if you use two
different typefaces or sizes in one or more words on a line, you may want to use the optical kerning option.
Optical kerning adjusts the spacing between adjacent characters based on their shapes, and is optimized for use with
Roman glyphs. Some fonts include robust kern-pair specifications. However, when a font includes only minimal builtin kerning or none at all, or if you use two different typefaces or sizes in one or more words on a line, you may want to
use the optical kerning option for the Roman text in your document.

You can also use manual kerning, which is ideal for adjusting the space between two letters. Tracking and manual
kerning are cumulative, so you can first adjust individual pairs of letters, and then tighten or loosen a block of text
without affecting the relative kerning of the letter pairs.
Word kerning isn’t the same as the Word Spacing option in the Justification dialog box; word kerning changes the
kerning value only between a specific word’s first character and the word space preceding that character.

A Original B Kerning applied between “W” and “a” C Tracking applied

How kerning and tracking are measured
You can apply kerning, tracking, or both to selected text. Tracking and kerning are both measured in 1/1000 em, a unit
of measure that is relative to the current type size. In a 6-point font, 1 em equals 6 points; in a 10-point font, 1 em equals
10 points. Kerning and tracking are strictly proportional to the current type size.
Tracking and manual kerning are cumulative, so you can first adjust individual pairs of letters, and then tighten or
loosen a block of text without affecting the relative kerning of the letter pairs.
When you click to place the insertion point between two letters, InCopy displays kerning values in the Character panel
and the Control panel. Metrics and optical kerning values (or defined kern pairs) appear in parentheses. Similarly, if
you select a word or a range of text, InCopy displays the tracking values in the Character panel and Control panel.

Last updated 6/13/2015

287
Typography

Apply kerning to text
You apply either of two types of automatic kerning: metrics kerning or optical kerning, or you can adjust the spacing
between letters manually.

Use metrics kerning
1 Set the text insertion point between the characters you want to pair kern, or select text.
2 In the Character panel or Control panel, select Metrics in the Kerning

menu.

3 In the Character panel or Control panel, select Metrics or Metrics - Roman Only in the Kerning

menu.

Note: If Metrics is applied to fonts (including some Japanese OpenType fonts) which do not contain pair kerning
information, spacing for each character will be set to “0” and character compression will not occur.
To avoid using the built-in kerning information of a font for selected text, choose “0” in the Kerning

menu.

Note: The default setting is Metrics – Roman Only. When Metrics - Roman Only is applied to Roman OpenType fonts,
kerning is the same as when Metrics is selected. When Metrics - Roman Only is applied to CJK OpenType fonts, only the
Roman characters will be kerned with kerning pairs as if Metrics were set. The CJK characters will not be kerned, as if '0'
were set. For this reason, choose '0' to turn off pair kerning.
Note: If you use font metrics kerning in a Japanese OpenType font, it is recommended that you choose OpenType > Use
Proportional Metrics from the Control panel menu. That way, you can avoid making unnecessary manual kerning
adjustments.

Use optical kerning
1 Set the text insertion point between characters you want to pair kern or select the text you want to kern.
2 In the Character panel or Control panel, select Optical in the Kerning

menu.

Note: Optical Kerning is designed on the basis of Roman character forms. You can use this feature with CJK fonts, but you
should always check the results of the operation.

Adjust kerning manually
1 Using the Type tool

, click to place an insertion point between two characters.

Note: If a range of text is selected, you can’t manually kern the text (you can choose only Metrics, Optical, or 0). Instead,
use tracking.
Note: If a range of text is selected, you can’t manually kern the text (you can choose only Metrics, Metrics - Roman Only,
Optical, or 0). Instead, use tracking.
2 Do any of the following:

• In the Character panel or the Control panel, type or select a numeric value in the Kerning menu.
• Press Alt+Left/Right Arrow (Windows) or Option+Left/Right Arrow (Mac OS) to decrease or increase the
kerning between two characters.
The amount of the word kerning adjustment is the same as the Kerning value in the Units & Increments Preferences
dialog box. When you press the shortcut and hold down the Ctrl or Command key, the kerning amount is the Kerning
preferences value multiplied by 5.

Change the default kerning increment value
❖ In the Units & Increments section of the Preferences dialog box, type a new value for the Kerning option and click

OK.

Last updated 6/13/2015

288
Typography

Turn off kerning for selected text
1 Select text.
2 In the Character panel or Control panel, type or choose 0 in the Kerning menu.

You can also press Alt+Ctrl+Q (Windows) or Option+Command+Q (Mac OS) to reset kerning and tracking. When
you do so, kerning is set to Metrics regardless of which kerning option was previously applied.

Adjust tracking
1 Select a range of characters.
2 In the Character panel or Control panel, type or select a numeric value for Tracking

Highlight text containing custom kerning and tracking
In some instances, you’ll want to be aware of text that has custom tracking and kerning applied. If you select the Custom
Tracking/Kerning preferences option, green highlighting appears over text with custom tracking or kerning.
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Composition (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Composition (Mac OS).
2 Select Custom Tracking/Kerning, and then click OK.

Adjust kerning between words
❖ With the Type tool

, select a range of text and do one of the following:

• To add space between selected words, press Alt+Ctrl+\ (Windows) or Option+Command+\ (Mac OS).
• To remove space between selected words, press Alt+Ctrl+Backspace (Windows) or Option+Command+Delete
(Mac OS).
• To multiply the kerning adjustment by 5, hold down Shift as you press the keyboard shortcut.

More Help topics
Adjust aki before and after characters
Keys for working with type
Keys for working with type

Aligning text
Align or justify text
Text can be aligned with one or both edges (or insets) of a text frame. Text is said to be justified when it is aligned with
both edges. You can choose to justify all text in a paragraph excluding the last line (Justify Left or Justify Right), or you
can justify text in a paragraph including the last line (Justify All). When you have only a few characters on the last line,
you may want to use a special end-of-story character and create a flush space.

Last updated 6/13/2015

289
Typography

Note: When you justify all lines of text and you are using the Adobe Paragraph Composer, InDesign shifts text to ensure
that the paragraph has consistent text density and is visually appealing. You can fine-tune spacing in justified text.
When you set center or justify for text in a frame grid, the text will no longer align exactly with the grid. You can also
specify paragraph alignment for all the paragraphs in the frame grid.
1 Select text.
2 Click one of the Alignment buttons (Align Left, Align Center, Align Right, Left Justify, Center Justify, Right Justify

and Full Justify) in the Paragraph panel or Control panel.
3 (Optional) Click Align Towards Spine or Align Away From Spine.

When you apply Align Towards Spine to a paragraph, text on a left-hand page is right-aligned, but when the same
text flows onto (or if the frame is moved to) a right-hand page, it becomes left aligned. Similarly, when you apply
Align Away From Spine to a paragraph, text on a left-hand page is left aligned, while text on a right-hand page is
right aligned.
In vertical frames, aligning to or away from the spine has no effect, since text alignment is parallel to the spine
direction.
If you want the left side of a line of text to be left-aligned and the right side to be right-aligned, position the insertion
point where you want to right-align the text, press Tab, and then right-align the rest of the line.

Align paragraphs to a baseline grid
When formatting paragraphs in a plain text frame, you might find it particularly useful to align paragraphs to the
baseline grid. By default, text in a frame grid is aligned to the embox center, but you can also change individual
paragraph grid alignment to align to the roman baseline, the frame grid embox, or the frame grid ICF.
The baseline grid represents the leading for body text in a document. You can use multiples of this leading value for all
elements of the page to ensure that text always lines up between columns and from page to page. For example, if the
body text in your document has 12-point leading, you could give your heading text 18-point leading and add 6 points
of space before the paragraphs that follow the headings.

A Text aligned to the embox center B Text aligned to the embox top C Text aligned to the ICF

Last updated 6/13/2015

290
Typography

Apart from specifying grid alignment, you can also specify whether or not to align only the first line of a paragraph to
the grid. Furthermore, when characters of different sizes are in the same line, you can specify how to align the small
characters to the larger ones. For more information, see Align text of different sizes.
Note: When the text is the same size as the default frame grid settings, the text position won’t change even if you change
the grid alignment. When you use a font or size different to the default frame settings for text in a frame grid, changing the
grid alignment has an effect.
Change settings for the baseline grid by using the Grids section of the Preferences dialog box.
To view the baseline grid, choose View > Grids & Guides > Show Baseline Grid. The baseline grids appear in the same
direction as the writing direction of the text frame.
Note: The baseline grid is visible only if the document zoom level is greater than the view threshold setting in Grids
Preferences. You may need to zoom in to view the baseline grid.

Align paragraphs to the baseline grid
1 Select text.
2 Choose Grid Alignment > Roman Baseline from the Paragraph panel menu.

Align only the first line to the baseline grid
1 Select the paragraphs you want to align.
2 Choose Only Align First Line to Grid from the Paragraph menu or Control panel menu.
3 In the Paragraph panel or Control panel, click Align to Baseline Grid

4 Choose an option other than None from Grid Alignment in the Paragraph panel or Control panel menu.

When the leading is set to a value greater than the baseline grid, automatic gyoudori occurs, snapping the line to the
next line in the grid. For example, when the leading is 16-point and the baseline grid is 14-point, the text will snap to
the grid line every second line.
To align text in the center of a baseline grid, above or below virtual body, or above or bottom of average printing surface,
select an option other than None from the Grid Alignment menu.

Align paragraphs to a baseline grid
The baseline grid represents the leading for body text in a document. You can use multiples of this leading value for all
elements of the page to ensure that text always lines up between columns and from page to page. For example, if the
body text in your document has 12-point leading, you could give your heading text 18-point leading and add 6 points
of space before the paragraphs that follow the headings.
Using a baseline grid ensures consistency in the location of text elements on a page. You can adjust the leading for the
paragraph to ensure that its baselines align to the page’s underlying grid. This is useful if you want the baselines of text
in multiple columns or adjacent text frames to align. Change settings for the baseline grid by using the Grids section of
the Preferences dialog box.
You can also align only the first line of a paragraph to the baseline grid, allowing the rest of the lines to follow the
specified leading values.
To view the baseline grid, choose View > Grids & Guides > Show Baseline Grid.
Note: The baseline grid is visible only if the document zoom level is greater than the view threshold setting in Grids
Preferences. You may need to zoom in to view the baseline grid.

Last updated 6/13/2015

291
Typography

Align paragraphs to the baseline grid
1 Select text.
2 In the Paragraph panel or Control panel, click Align To Baseline Grid

To ensure that the leading of your text does not change, set the baseline grid leading to the same leading value as your
text, or to a factor thereof.

Align only the first line to the baseline grid
1 Select the paragraphs you want to align.
2 Choose Only Align First Line To Grid from the Paragraph menu or Control panel menu.
3 In the Paragraph panel or Control panel, click Align To Baseline Grid

Create balanced headline text
You can balance ragged aligned text across multiple lines. This feature is especially useful for multiline headings, pullquotes, and centered paragraphs.

1 Click in the paragraph you want to balance.
2 In the Paragraph panel or Control panel, choose Balance Ragged Lines from the menu.

This feature takes effect only when the Adobe Paragraph Composer is selected.
This function is only available when Alignment is set to Align Left/Top, Center Justify or Align Right/Bottom and when
Adobe Paragraph Composer has been used.

Set Gyoudori
Gyoudori aligns a specified number of lines in the center of a paragraph. You can use gyoudori to highlight single line
paragraphs, such as headings or titles. If the paragraph has more than one line, you can choose Paragraph Gyoudori so
that the entire paragraph spans the number of lines.

Last updated 6/13/2015

292
Typography

1 From Gyoudori

in the Paragraph panel or Control panel, specify the number of lines you want to center justify.

2 To center the entire paragraph across the specified number of lines, choose Paragraph Gyoudori from the Paragraph

panel menu or Control panel menu.
Note: Gyoudori is set to the baseline grid value as standard in text frames.

Set paragraph gyoudori
When you apply gyoudori to a paragraph of more than one line, choosing Paragraph Gyoudori allows the entire
paragraph to span the specified number of gyoudori lines, often 2 paragraph lines on 3 grid lines. If this option is not
selected, each line in the paragraph spans the specified number of gyoudori lines, such as 2 paragraph lines on 6 grid
lines.

1 Select the paragraph to which you want to apply paragraph gyoudori.
2 Choose Paragraph Gyoudori from the Paragraph panel menu or the Control panel menu.
3 Adjust the leading of the gyoudori paragraph to suit your layout needs.

When Paragraph Gyoudori is used to center the paragraph on a number of grid lines, the line spacing of each line is
governed by the leading amount, not by the grid aki. It may be necessary to adjust the leading of each line to space them
out if the default 100% auto leading amount for frame grid text is used.

Create paragraphs that span or split columns
You can make a paragraph span across multiple columns in a text frame to create a straddle head effect. You can choose
whether a paragraph spans all columns or a specified number of columns. When a paragraph is set to span across
columns in a multicolumn text frame, any text before the spanning paragraph becomes balanced as a result.
You can also split a paragraph into multiple columns within the same text frame.
For a video tutorial on creating paragraphs that span or split columns, go to www.adobe.com/go/lrvid5151_id_en or
http://tv.adobe.com/go/4952/.

Last updated 6/13/2015

293
Typography

A Heading that spans columns B Split column

Span a paragraph across columns
1 Place the insertion point inside the paragraph.

You can also make this feature part of a paragraph style, such as a heading style.
2 Choose Span Columns from the Control panel menu or a Paragraph panel menu.
3 Choose Span Columns from the Paragraph Layout menu.
4 Choose the number of columns you want the paragraph to span from the Span menu. Choose All if you want the

paragraph to span across all the columns.
5 To add extra space before or after the span paragraph, specify Space Before Span and Space After Span values, and

then click OK.

Split a paragraph into columns
1 Place the insertion point inside the paragraph.

You can also make this feature part of a paragraph style, such as a heading style.
2 Choose Span Columns from the Control panel menu or a Paragraph panel menu.
3 Choose Split Columns from the Paragraph Layout menu.
4 Specify the following options, and then click OK:
Sub-columns Choose the number of columns you want the split the paragraph into.
Space Before Split / Space After Split Add space before or after the split paragraph.
Inside Gutter Determine the space between the split paragraphs.
Outside Gutter Determine the space between the outside of the split paragraphs and the margins.

Align or justify text vertically within a text frame
You can align or distribute lines of text in a frame along its vertical axis to help keep type vertically consistent among
frames and their columns.
Using frame alignment, you can align text vertically (horizontally when using vertical type) in a plain-text frame with
the frame as a base.
You can align text to the top, center, or bottom of the frame using each paragraph’s leading and paragraph spacing
values. You can also justify text vertically, which evenly spaces lines regardless of their leading and paragraph spacing
values.

Last updated 6/13/2015

294
Typography

Vertical text alignment and justification is calculated from the baseline positions of each line of text in the frame. Keep
the following in mind as you adjust vertical alignment:

• Align Top/Right is defined as the baseline of the first line of top-aligned text. The First Baseline Offset option in the
Text Frame Options dialog box affects this value. Align Bottom/Left is defined as the baseline of the last line of
bottom-aligned text.
• When the Grid Alignment option is applied to paragraphs with Align Top/Right, Center Justify, Align Bottom/Left,
all lines will be aligned to the baseline grid. With the Justified option, only the first and last lines will be aligned to
the baseline grid.
• If you adjust a text frame’s Top or Bottom Inset values in the Text Frame Options dialog box, you change the location
of the first or last baseline, respectively.
• The top of the frame is defined as the baseline of the first line of top-aligned text. The First Baseline Offset option
in the Text Frame Options dialog box affects this value.
• The bottom of the frame is defined as the baseline of the last line of bottom-aligned text. Footnote text is not
justified.
• When the Align to Baseline Grid option is applied to paragraphs with Top, Center, or Bottom alignment, all lines
will be aligned to the baseline grid. With the Justified option, only the first and last lines will be aligned to the
baseline grid.
• If you adjust a text frame’s Top or Bottom Inset values in the Text Frame Options dialog box, you change the location
of the first or last baseline, respectively.
1 Do one of the following:

• With the Selection tool, select a text frame.
• With the Type tool

, click in a text frame.

2 Choose Object > Text Frame Options.

Last updated 6/13/2015

295
Typography

3 In the Vertical Justification section of the Text Frame Options dialog box, choose Top/Right, Center, Bottom/Left,

or Justify.
4 In the Vertical Justification section of the Text Frame Options dialog box, choose one of the following options in the

Align menu:

• To vertically align text down from the top of the frame, choose Top. (This is the default setting.)
• To center lines of text in the frame, choose Center.
• To vertically align lines of text up from the bottom of the frame, choose Bottom.
• To evenly distribute lines of text vertically between the top and bottom of the frame, choose Justify.
5 If you choose Justify and you want to prevent the leading value from becoming disproportionately larger than the

paragraph spacing value, specify a Paragraph Spacing Limit value. The space between paragraphs is expanded up to
the value you specify; if the text still doesn’t fill the frame, the space between lines is adjusted until the frame is filled.
The paragraph spacing limit value is applied in addition to the Space Before or Space After values entered on the
Paragraph panel.

Note: Be careful about vertically justifying multi-column text frames. If the last column contains only a few lines, too
much white space may appear between the lines.
6 Click OK.

An easy way to adjust the Paragraph Spacing Limit value is to select Preview, and then click the up or down arrow next
to the Paragraph Spacing Limit value until paragraph spacing appears to be balanced with leading.

More Help topics
Change Justification settings
Change the grid display
Frame grid properties
Align text of different sizes
Grids
Set baseline grids for a text frame

Composing CJK characters

Last updated 6/13/2015

296
Typography

CJK composition
InCopy supports four methods developed for typesetting, including Adobe Japanese Single-line Composer, Adobe
Japanese Paragraph Composer, Adobe Paragraph Composer, and Adobe Single-line Composer. Each Composer
evaluates possible breaks in CJK and Roman text, and chooses those that best support the hyphenation and justification
options specified for a given paragraph.
The Adobe Paragraph Composer
Considers a network of breakpoints for an entire paragraph, and thus can optimize earlier lines in the paragraph in
order to eliminate especially unattractive breaks later on.
The Paragraph Composer approaches composition by identifying possible breakpoints, evaluating them, and assigning
a weighted penalty to them based on such principles as evenness of letterspacing, word spacing, and hyphenation, or
Roman words set to a language that supports hyphenation dictionaries.
You can use the Hyphenation dialog box to determine the relationship between better spacing and fewer hyphens.
Adobe Japanese Paragraph Composer
Adobe Japanese Paragraph Composer, like the Paragraph Composer, evaluates breaks (where to wrap to the next line)
in units of paragraphs. If characters are added to or deleted from a paragraph specified for this Composer, mojikumi
may be modified on the line before the edit point because the Composer re-evaluates mojikumi in the whole paragraph
in order to optimize it.
The Paragraph Composer approaches composition by identifying possible breakpoints, evaluating them, and assigning
a weighted penalty to them based on such principles as evenness of letterspacing, word spacing, and hyphenation.
Paragraph Composer evaluates breaks for the entire paragraph and fits mojikumi on the basis of character spacing,
word spacing, and rules for even hyphenation. For CJK text, this is calculated as the difference between the actual value
of mojikumi aki inserted for full justification or kinsoku processing and the optimum value set in the Mojikumi
Settings dialog box. When the aki necessary for full line justification is more than the maximum aki, or when the aki
necessary for kinsoku processing is less than the minimum aki, an H&J violation occurs.
The Adobe Single-line Composer
Offers a traditional approach to composing text one line at a time. This option is useful if you want to restrict
composition changes from late stage edits, and you don’t care about some lines in the paragraph being very loose while
others fit perfectly.
Adobe Japanese Single-line Composer
Adobe Japanese Single-line Composer applies mojikumi by evaluating line breaks one line at a time, in the same way
as Single-line Composer.

Change CJK composition preferences
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Composition (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Composition (Mac OS).

Last updated 6/13/2015

297
Typography

2 Under Mojikumi Compatibility Mode, do any of the following:

• Select Use New Vertical Scaling to use the InDesign CS2 method of vertical scaling. Roman text is typically
rotated on its side, whereas CJK text may be upright. In previous versions of InDesign, when you set glyph scaling
in the Character panel, the X Scale and Y Scale attributes cause different results depending on the orientation of
the characters being scaled. In CS2 or later versions of InDesign and InCopy, scaling affects all text in the line the
same way, regardless of whether it’s rotated or upright. If the text isn’t upright in vertical, the X Scaling and Y
Scaling will be exchanged, resulting in the Roman text being scaled in the same direction as the CJK upright text.
This option is turned on for new documents and turned off for documents from InDesign CS and earlier.
• Select Use CID-Based Mojikumi to determine the correct JIS X 4051 Mojikumi Class using the glyphs (jikei) of
the font used instead of Unicode. Selecting this option is especially useful when you’re using OpenType fonts.
This feature supports all CID fonts of AdobeJapan1-0 through AdobeJapan1-6. Unicode will be used with all
other fonts.
3 Click OK.

Use mojikumi
Mojikumi specifies text composition for spacing of Japanese and Chinese characters, roman characters, punctuation,
special characters, line start, line end and numbers. For Korean text, mojikumi may not be applicable. You can also
specify paragraph indents.
For Japanese text, the existing character spacing rules in InDesign follow the Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS)
specification, JISx4051-1995. You can also select from InDesign predefined mojikumi sets. Furthermore, you can create
specific mojikumi sets, and change the values for character spacing.
For Chinese text, you can use mojikumi display settings for Traditional Chinese and Simplified Chinese. If these
options do not appear in the Mojikumi Set list, you can select them in the Mojikumi Options section of the Preferences
dialog box.
InCopy includes 14 types of mojikumi presets for Japanese and 2 for Chinese. You can also modify the presets to be
displayed in Preferences, and you can determine whether CID-Based Mojikumi is used.
In InCopy, you can change the mojikumi settings of a paragraph, but you can’t create a custom mojikumi set or change
custom mojikumi settings as in InDesign. For details, see InDesign Help.
For more information on using mojikumi in InDesign, see www.adobe.com/go/learn_id_mojikumi_en.

Apply a mojikumi set to a paragraph
1 Select the target paragraph or frame. To change the default setting, confirm that no paragraph or frame is selected.
2 Choose a set from the Mojikumi pop-up menu in the Paragraph panel or Control panel.

To disable mojikumi settings, choose None from the Mojikumi pop-up menu.
Note: To determine which mojikumi settings appear in the Mojikumi pop-up menu, select the settings in the Mojikumi
Options section of the Preferences dialog box.

Change the display of mojikumi presets
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Mojikumi Options (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Mojikumi Options (Mac OS).
2 Select the items you wish to display in the Mojikumi pop-up menu and click OK.

The Mojikumi Preset section item names are shown in gray, and items that cannot be selected are mojikumi sets, which
are currently applied to paragraphs or default mojikumi sets.

Last updated 6/13/2015

299
Typography

Mojikumi Presets

Line end all 1/2 em

1 em indent line end uke 1/2 em

1 or 1/2 em indent line end uke 1/2 em

Last updated 6/13/2015
1 or 1/2 em indent line end all 1 em

300
Typography

Mojikumi Presets

1 em indent line end all no float

1 em indent line end uke no float

1 or 1/2 em indent line end uke no float

Last updated 6/13/2015
1 em indent line end all 1/2 em in mojibake

301
Typography

Mojikumi Presets

Line end uke no float

1 or 1/2 em indent line end period 1 em

1 em indent line end period 1 em

line end period 1 em

Last updated 6/13/2015

302
Typography

Mojikumi Presets

TradChinese default

SimpChinese default

Change mojikumi settings
You can edit the settings for spacing that you use a lot, such as the spacing between a period and following opening
parenthesis, in a mojikumi set you create.
For example, when you want to compress the character spacing for parentheses in the text, from Okoshi yakumono in
Yakumono, change the Middle Line setting for Open Parentheses, or Close Parentheses in Uke yakumono. The
following settings are available: 50% Fixed, 50%(0%-50%), 50%(25%-50%), 0% Fixed, 0%(0%-50%). For opening
parentheses, 50% Fixed leaves a half-width 50% aki before the parenthesis. In other words, it doesn’t compress the aki.
50%(0%-50%) puts a half-width aki before the parenthesis, but depending on mojikumi settings may not make an aki
at all. 50%(25%-50%) makes a half-width aki before the parenthesis, but depending on mojikumi settings may make an
aki which is half the size (25%) of a half-width character. 0% Fixed always compresses aki. 0%(0-50%) compresses aki,
but depending on mojikumi settings may allow a half-width aki. Choose 0% Fixed if you always want to compress
spacing before and after parentheses.

Last updated 6/13/2015

303
Typography

By clicking the triangular to the left of Open Parenthesis, Close Parenthesis, commas, periods, and middle punctuation
in each of Okoshi Yakumono, Uke Yakumono and Chuzuki Yakumono within Yakumono, items such as round
parentheses, corner brackets, Japanese commas, commas, Japanese periods, periods, nakaguro and colons are
displayed, allowing setting of aki for each character type. If you apply these settings, brackets won’t be compressed but
you can adjust aki for round parentheses.
Furthermore, if you display Detailed, you can edit all classes, set the processing order for each class, and indicate
differences between a specified mojikumi set and the current settings.
You can specify the desired value, minimum value, maximum value and order of priority to apply character spacing for
each option. The minimum and maximum values are applied when you adjust the spacing for text that is fully justified
by kinsoku. The more the Minimum and Maximum percentage values differ from the Desired percentage, the more
scope you can give to InDesign to increase or decrease spacing when justifying the line.
For more information on using mojikumi in InDesign, see www.adobe.com/go/learn_id_mojikumi_en.

Create a new mojikumi set
1 Do one of the following:

• Choose Type > Mojikumi Settings > Basic or Detailed.
• Choose Basic or Detailed from the Mojikumi Set menu in the Paragraph panel or Control panel.
2 Click New in the Mojikumi Settings dialog box.
3 Enter the name of the mojikumi set, specify the existing set on which the new one will be based, and click OK.
4 From Units, choose whether to use percentage (%) or Bu units, or to use Character Width/Bu.
5 Specify values for Begin Line, End Line and Middle Line for items in each section of Yakumono, Contiguous

Yakumono, Paragraph Mojikumi Indent and Between CJK and Roman. The Middle Line value is used to compress
lines for kinsoku (specify a value less than the Begin Line value). The End Line value is used to spread lines for fully
justified text (specify a value greater than the Middle Line value).
6 For item names in each section that has a triangle indicator, you can specify mojikumi settings in further detail for

each character. For example, to display items, click the triangle to the left of Open Parenthesis in Okoshi Yakumono
in the Yakumono section. The three items Open Bracket, Open Round Parenthesis, and Other Opening Parenthesis
are displayed, allowing you to set mojikumi settings for each character class.
7 When settings are complete, click Save or OK to save the settings. Click Cancel if you don't want to save the settings.

Depending on the character type, you can specify the same values for Begin Line, Middle Line, and End Line if you don't
want to change the spacing.

Last updated 6/13/2015

304
Typography

Edit detailed settings for mojikumi
1 Do one of the following:

• Select Type > Mojikumi Settings > Detailed.
• In the Paragraph panel or Control panel, choose Advanced Settings From Mojikumi.
• Click Detailed in the Mojikumi Settings dialog box.

2 Select a mojikumi set to edit from the Mojikumi pop-up menu or click New to create a new set. You can also import

a mojikumi set from another document by clicking Import.
3 From the Character Class pop-up menu at the bottom of the Mojikumi menu, select the character class to edit its

character aki settings. A list of settings that can be edited is included in the class. You can individually set Open
Parenthesis, Close Parenthesis, commas, periods or middle punctuation items, but you can also specify aki in more
detail for individual characters such as Japanese periods or Roman periods.
4 Choose Previous Class or Next Class from the Before & After pop-up menu, and set whether the class aki value is

to be entered before or after the entered character. To set the aki for a character following a Japanese period, for
example, choose Japanese Period from the Character Class popup menu, and select previous character class from
the Before & After pop-up menu.
5 For each item, set Minimum, Desired, and Maximum values. The Minimum value is used to compress lines for

kinsoku (specify a value less than the Desired value). The maximum value is used to spread lines for fully justified
text (specify a value greater than the Desired value).
6 For item names that have a triangle indicator, you can further specify mojikumi settings in detail for each character.

For example, click the triangle to the left of Open Parenthesis to display the items. The three items Open Bracket,
Open Round Parenthesis, Other Opening Parenthesis are displayed, allowing you to set mojikumi settings for each
character.

Last updated 6/13/2015

305
Typography

7 Specify the order of compression priority in Priority for each class, to determine the order of compression for each.

When you specify 1 for any character class, characters given greater values will be processed afterwards, in
increasing order of priority, and when you specify None they are processed last. You can assign the same value (1 to
9) in several aki options.
8 From the Indicate Differences menu, specify an option to indicate which mojikumi table is being compared. When

a different table is selected, any values that are different from that table are highlighted in blue.
9 Click Save, or click Cancel if you don’t want to save the settings.

Change the name of a custom mojikumi set
1 In the Mojikumi Settings dialog box, choose a custom mojikumi set from the Mojikumi pop-up menu, and click

Rename.
2 Enter the new name in the Rename dialog box and click OK.

You cannot rename default mojikumi sets.

Delete a custom mojikumi set
❖ In the Mojikumi Settings dialog box, choose a custom mojikumi set from the Mojikumi pop-up menu, and click

Delete Set.
All the text to which the mojikumi set was applied will return to default settings. You cannot delete predefined
mojikumi sets. You cannot delete default InDesign mojikumi sets.
When you compose Japanese text with a lot of half-width spaces or Roman parenthesis, problems that need to be
resolved relating to text composition increase. It is recommended that you avoid using Roman parenthesis, and use
full-width parenthesis for Japanese composition. Only use Roman parenthesis when using relatively long English
sentences in Japanese text, or when a more serious problem results if you don't use Roman parenthesis.

Use kinsoku settings
Kinsoku specifies line breaks for Asian text. Characters that cannot be placed at the beginning or end of a line are known
as kinsoku characters. For Japanese text, you can use hard kinsoku sets and soft kinsoku sets. Soft kinsoku sets omit
long vowel symbols and small hiragana characters. You can use these existing sets, or add or delete kinsoku characters
to create new sets. Chinese and Korean versions include special kinsoku sets.

Select kinsoku settings for a paragraph
1 Select a paragraph or frame.
2 In the Paragraph panel, choose an option from the Kinsoku Set list.

Create a new kinsoku set
1 Do one of the following.

• Select Type > Kinsoku Settings.
• In the Paragraph panel or Control panel, choose Settings from the Kinsoku pop-up menu, and display the
Kinsoku Settings dialog box.
2 Click New in the Kinsoku Settings dialog box. It is possible to import from other documents, but there is no import

button as with the Mojikumi Settings.
3 Enter the name of the kinsoku set, and specify the existing set on which the new one will be based.

Last updated 6/13/2015

306
Typography

4 To add a character to a field, select the field, and do one of the following:

• Enter a character in the Add Character box, and click Add to insert in the list box.
• In the Add Character pop-up menu, specify the code system (Shift JIS, JIS, Kuten, Big5, GB, Johab, or Unicode),
enter the code into the Add Character box and click Add.
5 To delete a character in the list box, select the character and press Backspace (Windows) or Delete (Mac OS).
6 To check the currently selected character code, from the Add Character pop-up menu select Shift JIS, JIS, Kuten,

Big5, GB, Johab, or Unicode. The code system is displayed in the Add Character text box.
7 Click Save to save the settings. Click Cancel if you do not want to save the settings.

Delete a kinsoku set
1 In the Kinsoku Shori Set dialog box, choose the kinsoku setting you want to delete from the Kinsoku Settings

pop-up menu.
2 Click Delete Set.

You cannot delete predefined kinsoku settings.

Specify whether to push in or push out kinsoku text
You can determine whether text is pushed in or pushed out to prevent kinsoku characters from beginning or ending
the line.
1 Select the paragraph or frame.
2 From the Paragraph panel menu or Control panel menu, choose an option from the Kinsoku Break Type menu:

• Choose Push In First to prioritize fitting kinsoku characters onto the same line.
• Choose Push Out First to prioritize moving kinsoku characters to the next line.
• Choose Push Out Only to always move kinsoku characters to the next line.
• Choose Prioritize Adjustment Amount to push in text when pushing out that text would result in greater
expansion of character space than pushing it in would compress the character space.

Force highlighting of kinsoku text
You may want to check where kinsoku has been applied, as several elements may affect the text composition. When you
set the option to highlight kinsoku text to on, kinsoku items are highlighted in blue-gray. Kinsoku items that have been
pushed in to keep on the same line are highlighted in red, and kinsoku items that have been pushed out so as not to be
on the previous line are highlighted in blue. You can edit and amend the composition of these highlighted items
manually.
1 Select Edit > Preferences > Composition (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Composition (Mac OS).
2 Select Kinsoku, and then click OK.

Turn bunri-kinshi on or off
When bunri-kinshi is on, the characters specified in the Bunri-kinshi Characters section of the Kinsoku Settings dialog
box will not be split across lines, and will not be spaced out during full justification.
1 Select the text you want to affect.
2 Choose Bunri-Kinshi from the Paragraph panel menu or Control panel menu.

Last updated 6/13/2015

307
Typography

Use rensuuji
Rensuuji protects numbers from breaking. Furthermore, this option processes punctuation spacing in number strings
according to JIS specifications.

1 Select the text you want to affect.
2 To turn rensuuji on, choose Rensuuji from the Paragraph panel menu or Control panel menu.

Absorb ideographic space
If a space falls at the end of the line, the space may wrap to the next line, causing an jagged appearance. You can select
an option to prevent a line from beginning with a space.
1 Select the text you want to affect.
2 Choose Absorb Ideographic Space At Line End in the Paragraph panel menu or Control panel menu to prevent a

line from beginning with a space.
You can also make this option part of a paragraph style. This option is located in the Japanese Composition Settings
section when creating or editing a style.

Turn off Roman word wrap
When the Arbitrary Hyphenation option is selected, Roman words can be broken without using Roman hyphenation
rules, and no hyphen character (-) appears at the end of the line. If this option is not selected, Roman hyphenation rules
are used for word breaks.
The Arbitrary Hyphenation option takes effect only if a CJK language is applied to the text. This option has no effect
on text to which Roman languages are applied.
1 Select the text you want to affect.
2 Choose Arbitrary Hyphenation in the Paragraph panel menu or Control panel menu.

You can also make this option part of a paragraph style. This option is located in the Japanese Composition Settings
section when creating or editing a style.

Apply kinsoku hanging
Hanging controls whether or not you hang Japanese punctuation marks such as periods or commas outside the margin,
and align to the edge of the text frame. Specify hanging characters in Hanging Punctuation in the Kinsoku Settings
dialog box.
1 Select the text you want to affect.

Last updated 6/13/2015

308
Typography

2 To turn on hanging, choose one of the following hanging methods from the Kinsoku Hang Type command in the

Paragraph panel menu or Control panel menu.
None No hanging.
Regular When the paragraph is set to justify or justify all lines, positioning is applied to include hanging characters.
Forced Forced When the paragraph is set to justify or align on both sides, the hanging characters are first forced to
hang before positioning is applied. Forced hanging is only applied when paragraph justification is applied.

Rotate half-width characters in vertical text
1 Select the text you want to affect.
2 From the Paragraph panel menu or Control panel menu, choose Roman rotation in Vertical Text.

The direction of half-width characters such as Roman text or numbers changes in vertical text. By setting Roman
Rotation in Vertical Text, you can rotate these characters vertically in the paragraph.
When you set this option to on, half-width characters are rotated individually.

Turn warichu on or off
Warichu can be set as inline note for the body text. Warichu usually consists of two lines enclosed within parentheses.

1 Select the text.
2 Do one of the following.

• Choose Warichu from the Character panel menu or Control panel menu.
• Choose Warichu Settings from the Character panel menu or Control panel menu, select Warichu in the Warichu
Settings dialog box, and then click OK.

Change warichu options
1 Select the text you want to affect.
2 Choose Warichu Settings from the Character panel menu or Control panel menu.

Last updated 6/13/2015

309
Typography

3 For Number Of Lines, specify how many lines of text will appear as warichu characters.
4 For Line Spacing, specify the distance between the lines of warichu characters.
5 For Warichu Size, select the size of warichu characters as a percentage of the size of the parent text.
6 To align Warichu characters, select an alignment option. For example, in a vertical frame grid, selecting Left/Top

aligns the beginning of the warichu characters at the top of the frame. In addition, if Auto is set, justification occurs
automatically based on the warichu size or the parent text. The alignment proxy shows how the warichu text appears
relative to the parent text.
7 In the Line Breaking Options section, specify the minimum number of characters required before and after the line

breaks to start a new line, and then click OK

More Help topics
Hyphenate text
Change Justification settings
Use tate-chu-yoko

Changing spacing between characters in CJK text
Adjust kerning for the half-width space between Roman words
❖ With the Type tool

, select a range of text, and do one of the following:

Adjust character tsume in CJK composition
Applying tsume to characters causes the space around them to be compressed proportionally. However, the vertical and
horizontal scaling of the characters remains unchanged.

1 Select the text to which you want to apply tsume.
2 Input the percentage in Tsume

in the Character panel or the Control panel.

You can also check which tsume or tracking was applied for each character by highlighting the affected text.

Last updated 6/13/2015

310
Typography

Using grid tracking to adjust character spacing
One way in which you can compress aki between characters is to specify the line spacing for the frame grid itself and
adjusting tracking for placed text. This is a form of character compression that uses a feature called Adjust Tracking
With CJK Grid in the Character panel menu or the Control panel (also called grid tracking).
Some characters in CJK fonts are smaller than the embox, resulting in a large aki between characters when they are
placed on the frame grid. Setting tsume in this way for the grid itself is convenient because it allows mojikumi where
characters are properly aligned in the grid. This setting can also be saved as a grid format.
The Character Aki default in the Frame Grid Settings dialog box is set to “0”. In automated typography, this tracking is
known as “Beta”. Setting this to a negative value for mojikumi causes the right grid to overlap the left grid in accordance
with the set value. Characters input to the grid will be aligned on the basis of the center of the each grid, so the spacing
for each character will be compressed. In addition, depending on the mojikumi settings, character forms adjusted to
less than the maximum width will change on the basis of the value proportion of Line Spacing Tsume. For instance,
when mojikumi is set to half spacing for yakumono such as parentheses, by setting the Character Aki in the grid to -1H,
yakumono will be compressed to half of -1H, thus -0.5H. However, because character spacings based on tracking in this
grid are not applied to Roman text, character spacing for Roman text will not be compressed in line with tracking. In
addition, because this tracking value is applied to the grid itself, it is handled as an absolute value. For this reason, even
if the text font size changes, the tracking value does not.
This feature is enabled by default. To disable this feature, select Adjust Tracking With CJK Grid from the Character
panel menu or Control panel, and deselect the box to the left of the item name.

Adjust tracking by using Grid Jidori
You can justify text for specified grid characters by setting grid jidori. For example, if you select 3 characters entered
and set jidori to 5, the 3 characters will be spread evenly across the grid for 5 character spaces.
1 Select a range of characters.
2 In Grid Jidori

in the Character panel or Control panel, enter a value in the text box or select one from the pop-up

menu.
Note: Use the Grid Jidori feature in the frame grid. It may not function properly in a text frame.

More Help topics
Highlight text containing custom kerning and tracking
Use mojikumi
Set paragraph gyoudori

Formatting characters
For a video tutorial on formatting characters, see www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4275_id.

Apply baseline shift
Use Baseline Shift to move a selected character up or down relative to the baseline of the surrounding text. This option
is especially useful when you’re hand-setting fractions or adjusting the position of inline graphics.

Last updated 6/13/2015

311
Typography

1 Select text.
2 In the Character panel or Control panel, type a numeric value for Baseline Shift

. Positive values move the
character’s baseline above the baseline of the rest of the line; negative values move it below the baseline.
To increase or decrease the value, click in the Baseline Shift box, and then press the Up or Down Arrow key. Hold down
Shift while you press the Up or Down Arrow key to change the value in greater increments.

To change the default increment for baseline shift, specify a value for Baseline Shift in the Units & Increments section
of the Preferences dialog box.

Make characters superscript or subscript in a non-OpenType font
1 Select text.
2 Choose Superscript or Subscript in the Character panel menu or in the Control panel.

When you choose Superscript or Subscript, a predefined baseline shift value and type size are applied to the selected
text.
The values applied are percentages of the current font size and leading, and are based on settings in the Type Preferences
dialog box. These values do not appear in the Baseline Shift or Size boxes of the Character panel when you select the
text.
Note: You can change the default size and position of superscripts and subscripts using Advanced Type preferences.

Apply underline or strikethrough
The default weight of an underline and strikethrough depends on the size of the type.
Jeff Witchel provides a video tutorial about underlining at Custom Underlines in InDesign.

Apply underline or strikethrough
1 Select text.
2 Choose Underline or Strikethrough in the Character panel menu or the Control panel.

Change underline or strikethrough options
Creating custom underlining is especially useful when you want to create an even underline below characters of
different sizes, or for creating special effects, such as background highlighting.

1 From the Character panel menu or the Control panel menu, choose Underline Options or Strikethrough Options.

Last updated 6/13/2015

312
Typography

2 Do any of the following, and then click OK:

• Select Underline On or Strikethrough On to turn on underline or strikethrough for the current text.
• For Weight, choose a weight or type a value to determine the thickness of the underline or strikethrough line.
• For Type, select one of the underline or strikethrough options.
• For Offset, determine the vertical position of the line. The offset is measured from the baseline. Negative values
move the underline above the baseline and the strikethrough below the baseline.
• Select Overprint Stroke when you want to make sure that the stroke doesn’t knock out underlying inks on a
printing press.
• Choose a color and tint. If you specified any line type other than solid, choose a gap color or gap tint to change
the appearance of the area between dashes, dots, or lines.
• Select Overprint Stroke or Overprint Gap if the underline or strikethrough will be printed over another color,
and you want to avoid errors that can occur with printing misregistration.
To change the underline or strikethrough options in a paragraph or character style, use the Underline Options or
Strikethrough Options section of the dialog box that appears when you create or edit the style.

Apply ligatures to letter pairs
InDesign can automatically insert ligatures, which are typographic replacement characters for certain letter pairs, such
as “fi” and “fl,” when they are available in a given font. The characters that InDesign uses when the Ligature option is
selected appear and print as ligatures, but are fully editable, and do not cause the spell checker to flag a word
erroneously.

With OpenType fonts, when you choose Ligatures from the Character panel menu or Control panel menu, InDesign
produces any standard ligature defined in the font, as determined by the font designer. However, some fonts include
more ornate, optional ligatures, which can be produced when you choose the Discretionary Ligatures command.
1 Select text.
2 Choose Ligatures from the Character panel menu or the Control panel menu.

Change the color, gradient, or stroke of text
You can apply colors, gradients, and strokes to characters and continue to edit the text. Use the Swatches panel and
Stroke panel to apply colors, gradients, and strokes to text, or change Character Color settings when creating or editing
a style.

Last updated 6/13/2015

313
Typography

A Swatch affects fill or stroke B Swatch affects container or text C Tint percentage

1 Do one of the following:

• To apply color changes to text inside a frame, use the Type tool

to select text.

• To apply color changes to all text in a frame, use the Selection tool to select the frame. When applying color to
the text rather than the container, make sure that you select the Formatting Affects Text icon in the Tools panel
or in the Swatches panel.
2 In the Tools panel or in the Swatches panel, select whether you want to apply the color change to the fill or stroke.

If you select Stroke, the color change affects only the outline of characters.
3 Do any of the following:

• In the Swatches panel, click a color or gradient swatch.
• In the Stroke panel, specify a weight or other stroke options. (See Stroke panel options .)
You can also apply a gradient to text by dragging across the selected text using either the Gradient Swatch tool
the Gradient Feather tool
.

To create reverse type, you can change the text fill color to white or [Paper] and the frame’s fill color to a dark color. You
can also create reverse type by using a paragraph rule behind text; however, if the rule is black, you’ll need to change
the type to white.

Change the color and gradient of text
You can apply colors and gradients to the stroke and fill of characters with the Swatches panel. For a linked story, you
can apply any colors or gradients defined by the linked InDesign layout. For a stand-alone story, you can apply any of
the default colors or new colors you create for the document.
Note: You cannot create gradients in InCopy. Gradients only appear when imported from InDesign.

Last updated 6/13/2015

314
Typography

A Swatch affects fill or stroke B Swatch affects container or text C Tint percentage

Change the color of text
1 Using the Type tool

, select the text you want to color.

2 In the Swatches panel (choose Window > Swatches), click a color or gradient swatch.

Note: You can apply colors to text in either Galley, Story, or Layout view; however, color changes are visible only in Layout
view.

Specify the type of swatches to display
1 Choose Window > Swatches to open the Swatches panel.
2 At the bottom of the panel, specify one of the following:

• To see all color, tint, and gradient swatches, click the Show All Swatches button.
• To see only process color, spot color, and tint swatches, click the Show Color Swatches button.
• To see only gradient swatches, click the Show Gradient Swatches button.

Add transparency effects to text
Use the Effects panel to add transparency effects, such as drop shadows, to text.
Mike Rankin provides examples about transparency effects at InDesign Eye Candy, Part I.
1 Use the Selection tool

to select the text frame.

2 Choose Object > Effects > [effect].
3 Choose Text from the Settings For menu.

You can choose Object if you want the effects you choose to apply to the text frame’s stroke and fill as well as the text
inside it.
4 Specify the effect attributes and click OK.

If you want to change the text’s blending mode or opacity settings, make these changes on the Effects panel.

Last updated 6/13/2015

315
Typography

Assign a language to text
Assigning a language to text determines which spelling and hyphenation dictionary is used. Assigning a language does
not change the actual text.
1 Do any of the following:

• To apply the language only to selected text, select the text.
• To change the default dictionary used in InDesign, choose the language with no documents open.
• To change the default dictionary for a specific document, open the document, choose Edit > Deselect All, and
then choose the language.
2 In the Character panel, choose the appropriate dictionary in the Language menu.

InDesign uses Proximity (and WinSoft for some languages) dictionaries for both spelling and hyphenation. These
dictionaries let you specify a different language for as little as a single character of text. Each dictionary contains
hundreds of thousands of words with standard syllable breaks. Changing the default language does not affect existing
text frames or documents.
You can customize language dictionaries to ensure that any unique vocabulary you use is recognized and treated
correctly.
InDesign includes a language locking feature that prevents CJK text from being assigned a non-CJK language.

A “Glockenspiel” in English B “Glockenspiel” in Traditional German C “Glockenspiel” in Reformed German

Change the case of type
The All Caps or Small Caps commands change the appearance of text, but not the text itself. Conversely, the Change
Case command changes the case setting of selected text. This distinction is important when searching or spell-checking
text. For example, suppose you type “spiders” in your document and apply All Caps to the word. Using Find/Change
(with Case Sensitive selected) to search for “SPIDERS” will not find the instance of “spiders” to which All Caps was
applied. To improve search and spell-check results, use the Change Case command rather than All Caps.
Anne-Marie Concepcion provides an article about small caps at Small Caps vs OpenType All Small Caps.

Change text to All Caps or Small Caps
All caps is a method used to capitalize all Roman text. Small caps is a method used to capitalize all Roman text and
make it the approximate size of lowercase characters.
InDesign can automatically change the case of selected text. When you format text as small caps, InDesign
automatically uses the small-cap characters designed as part of the font, if available. Otherwise, InDesign synthesizes
the small caps using scaled-down versions of the regular capital letters. The size of synthesized small caps is set in the
Type Preferences dialog box.

Last updated 6/13/2015

316
Typography

If you select All Caps or Small Caps in an OpenType font, InDesign creates more elegant type. If you’re using an
OpenType font, you can also choose All Small Caps from the Character panel menu or the Control panel. (See Apply
OpenType font attributes .)
1 Select text.
2 Choose All Caps or Small Caps in the Character panel menu or in the Control panel. If the text was originally typed

in all caps, selecting Small Caps will not change the text.

Specify the size for small caps
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Advanced Type (Windows) or InCopy > Preferences > Advanced Type (Mac OS).
2 For Small Caps, type a percentage of the original font size for text to be formatted as small caps. Then click OK.

Change capitalization
1 Select text.
2 Choose one of the following in the Type > Change Case submenu:

• To change all characters to lowercase, choose Lowercase.
• To capitalize the first letter of each word, choose Title Case.
• To change all characters to uppercase, choose Uppercase.
• To capitalize the first letter of each sentence, choose Sentence Case.
Note: The Sentence Case command assumes that the period (.), exclamation point (!), and question mark (?) characters
mark the ends of sentences. Applying Sentence Case may cause unexpected case changes when these characters are used in
other ways, as in abbreviations, file names, or Internet URLs. In addition, proper names may become lowercase when they
should be uppercase.

Scale type
You can specify the proportion between the height and width of the type, relative to the original width and height of
the characters. Unscaled characters have a value of 100%. Some type families include a true expanded font, which is
designed with a larger horizontal spread than the plain type style. Scaling distorts the type, so it is generally preferable
to use a font that is designed as condensed or expanded, if one is available.

Last updated 6/13/2015

317
Typography

A Unscaled type B Unscaled type in condensed font C Scaled type in condensed font

Adjust vertical or horizontal scaling
1 Select text you want to scale.
2 In the Character panel or Control panel, type a numeric value to change the percentage of Vertical Scaling

Horizontal Scaling

If the Use New Vertical Scaling in Vertical preference option is selected, the X and Y scale for Roman glyphs in vertical
text will be reversed, making all text in the line scale in the same direction. (See Change CJK composition preferences.)
If the Adjust Line Height With Char Scale option is selected in the Character panel menu, the Y scale of glyphs affects
line height. When scaling frame grids, the Y scale is affected, so you may want to adjust the line height to avoid autogyoudori occurring on the scaled grid.

Scale text by resizing the text frame in InDesign
❖ Do any of the following:

• Using the Selection tool, hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS), and then drag a corner of the text
frame to resize it.
• Using the Scale tool

, resize the frame.

(See Scale objects .)

Determine the appearance of scaled text values
When you change the scale of a frame, the text inside the frame is also scaled. For example, when you double the size
of a text frame, the text also doubles in size; 20-point text increases to 40 points.
David Blatner provides an article about scaled text frames at Making a Magnifying Glass Text Frame in InDesign.
You can change a preferences option to indicate how scaled text appears in panels:

• By default, with Apply To Content selected, the Font Size boxes in the Control panel and Character panel list the
new size of text (such as 40 pt). If you select the Adjust Scaling Percentage option, the Font Size boxes display both
the original and the scaled size of the text, such as “20 pt (40).”

Last updated 6/13/2015

318
Typography

• The scaling values in the Transform panel tell you the horizontal and vertical percentage by which the frame was
scaled. By default, with Apply To Content selected, scaling values display at 100% after a text is scaled. If you select
the Adjust Scaling Percentage option, the scaling values reflect the scaled frame, so doubling the scale of a frame
displays as 200%.
Tracking scale changes to frames is useful if you have to revert a frame and the text inside it to their original size. It’s
useful as well for finding out by how much you changed the size of a frame. To track scale changes to frames and the
text inside these frames:
1 Choose Edit > Preferences > General (Windows) or InDesign > Preferences > General (Mac OS).
2 Select Adjust Scaling Percentage, and then click OK.

Note the following:

• The Adjust Scaling Percentage preference applies to frames that you scale after the preference is turned on, not to
existing frames.
• The Adjust Scaling Percentage preference stays with the text. The scaled point size continues to appear in
parentheses even if you turn off the Adjust Scaling Percentage preference and scale the frame again.
• To remove the scaled point size from the Transform panel, choose Redefine Scaling as 100% in the Transform panel.
Choosing this option doesn’t change the appearance of the scaled frame.
• If you edit the text or scale a frame within threaded frames when the Adjust Scaling Percentage preference is
selected, the text is scaled, even if it moves to a different frame. However, if Apply To Content is selected, any text
that flows to a different frame as a result of editing is no longer scaled.

Skew type
1 Select text.
2 In the Character panel, type a numeric value for Skewing

. Positive values slant type to the right; negative values

slant type to the left.
Note that applying an angle to type does not produce true italic characters.

More Help topics
Apply OpenType font attributes
OpenType fonts
Applying color
Add rules (lines) above or below paragraphs
Applying gradients to text
Transparency effects
Hyphenation and spelling dictionaries

Formatting paragraphs
For a video tutorial on formatting paragraphs, see www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4276_id.

Last updated 6/13/2015

319
Typography

Adjust paragraph spacing
You can control the amount of space between paragraphs. If a paragraph begins at the top of a column or frame, InCopy
does not honor the Space Before value. In such a case, you can increase the leading of the first line of the paragraph or
increase the top inset of the text frame in InDesign.
1 Select text.
2 In the Paragraph panel or the Control panel, adjust the appropriate values for Space Before

and Space After

To ensure formatting consistency, change paragraph spacing in the paragraph styles you define.

Use drop caps
You can add drop caps to one or more paragraphs at a time. The drop cap’s baseline sits one or more lines below the
baseline of the first line of a paragraph.
The size of drop cap text differs depending on whether the drop cap characters in the first line are half-width roman or
full-width CJK. When the drop cap characters in the first line are half-width roman, the cap height of the drop cap
matches the cap height of the first line of text in the paragraph, and the Roman baseline of the drop cap matches the
baseline of the last drop cap line in the paragraph. The embox top of the drop cap matches the embox top of the first
line of the paragraph, and the embox bottom of the drop cap matches the embox bottom of the last drop cap line in the
paragraph.
You can also create a character style that can be applied to the drop-cap characters. For example, you can create a tall
cap (also called a raised cap) by specifying a 1-line, 1-character drop cap and applying a character style that increases
the size of the first letter.

Create a drop cap
1 With the Type tool

selected, click in the paragraph where you want the drop cap to appear.

2 In the Paragraph panel or Control panel, type a number for Drop Cap Number Of Lines

to indicate the number

of lines you want the drop cap to occupy.
3 For Drop Cap One Or More Characters

, type the number of drop cap characters you want.

4 To apply a character style to the drop cap character, choose Drop Caps And Nested Styles from the Paragraph panel

menu, and then choose the character style you created.
You can also use the Drop Caps And Nested Styles dialog box to align the drop cap to the text edge, reducing the
amount of space on the left side of the drop cap, and adjust for drop cap letters with descenders, such as “g” and “y.”
If you want to resize, skew, or change the typeface of the drop cap letter for added effect, select the letter or letters and
make the formatting changes.
You can also use the Drop Caps And Nested Styles dialog box to adjust the drop cap in different way. You can align
the drop cap to the text edge, scale for descenders, ignore the frame grid, pad to the frame grid, and scale up or down
to the grid.

Last updated 6/13/2015

320
Typography

Remove a drop cap
1 With the Type tool

selected, click in the paragraph where the drop cap appears.

2 In the Paragraph panel or Control panel, type 0 for Drop Cap Number Of Lines or Drop Cap Number Of Characters.

Add rules (lines) above or below paragraphs
Rules are paragraph attributes that move and are resized along with the paragraph on the page. If you’re using a rule
with headings in your document, you may want to make the rule part of a paragraph style definition. The width of the
rule is determined by the column width.
The offset for a rule above a paragraph is measured from the baseline of the top line of text to the bottom of the rule.
The offset for a rule below a paragraph is measured from the baseline of the last line of text to the top of the rule.

A Rule above paragraph B Rule below paragraph

Michael Murphy provides a video tutorial about creating special effects using paragraph rules at Paragraph Rules Rule.
Creative Curio provides an article about creative uses of paragraph rules at Creative Uses for Paragraph Rules in
InDesign, Pt 1.

Add a rule above or below a paragraph
1 Select text.
2 Choose Paragraph Rules from the Paragraph panel menu or Control panel menu.
3 At the top of the Paragraph Rule dialog box, select Rule Above or Rule Below.
4 Select Rule On.

Note: If you want both a rule above and below, make sure that Rule On is selected for both Rule Above and Rule Below.
5 Select Preview to see what the rule will look like.
6 For Weight, choose a weight or type a value to determine the thickness of the rule. For Rule Above, increasing the

weight expands the rule upwards. For Rule Below, increasing the weight expands the rule downward.
7 Select Overprint Stroke when you want to make sure that the stroke doesn’t knock out underlying inks on a printing

press.
8 Do one or both of the following:

• Choose a color. The available colors are those listed in the Swatches panel. Select the Text Color option to make
the rule the same color as the first character in the paragraph for Rule Above and the last character for Rule
Below.

Last updated 6/13/2015

321
Typography

• Choose a tint or specify a tint value. The tint is based on the color you specified. Note that you can’t create tints
of the built-in colors None, Paper, Registration, or Text Color.
• If you specified any line type other than solid, choose a gap color or gap tint to change the appearance of the area
between dashes, dots, or lines.
9 Choose the width of the rule. You can choose either Text (from the left edge of text to the line end) or Column (from

the left edge of the column to the right edge of the column). If the left edge of the frame has a column inset, the rule
begins at the inset.
10 To determine the vertical position of the rule, type a value for Offset.
11 To make sure that the rule above text is drawn within the text frame, select Keep In Frame. If this option isn’t

selected, the rule can appear outside the text frame.
To make sure the paragraph rule at the top of one column aligns with the text at the top of the adjacent column,
select Keep In Frame.
12 Set left or right indents for the rule (not for text) by typing values for Left Indent and Right Indent.
13 Select Overprint Stroke if the paragraph rule will be printed over another color and you want to avoid errors that

can occur with printing misregistration. Then click OK.

Remove a paragraph rule
1 Using the Type tool

, click in the paragraph containing the paragraph rule.

2 Choose Paragraph Rules from the Paragraph panel menu or Control panel menu.
3 Deselect Rule On and click OK.

Ways to control paragraph breaks
You can eliminate orphans and widows, words or single lines of text that become separated from the other lines in a
paragraph. Orphans fall at the bottom of a column or page, and widows fall at the top of a column or page. Another
typographic problem to avoid is a heading that stands alone on a page with the following paragraph on the next page.
You have several options for fixing widows, orphans, short exit lines, and other paragraph break problems:
Discretionary hyphens A discretionary hyphen (Type > Insert Special Character > Hyphens And Dashes >
Discretionary Hyphen) appears only if the word breaks. This option prevents the common typographic problem of
hyphenated words, such as “care-giver,” appearing in the middle of a line after text reflows. Similarly, you can also add
a discretionary line break character.
No Break Choose No Break from the Character panel menu to prevent selected text from breaking across a line.
Nonbreaking spaces Insert a nonbreaking space (Type > Insert White Space > [nonbreaking space]) between words you

want to keep together.
Keep Options Choose Keep Options from the Paragraph panel menu to specify how many lines in the following

paragraph remain with the current paragraph.
Start Paragraph Use Start Paragraph in the Keep Options dialog box to force a paragraph (usually a title or heading)
to appear at the top of a page, column, or section. This option works especially well as part of a heading paragraph style.
Hyphenation Settings Choose Hyphenation from the Paragraph panel menu to change hyphenation settings.
Edit text Editing text may not be an option depending on the kind of document you work with. If you have license to

rewrite, then subtle rewording can often create a better line break.

Last updated 6/13/2015

322
Typography

Use a different composer In general, use Adobe Paragraph Composer to let InDesign compose paragraphs

automatically. If a paragraph isn’t composed the way you’d like, choose Adobe Single-line Composer from the
Paragraph panel menu or Control panel menu and adjust selected lines individually. See Compose text.
In general, use Adobe Japanese Paragraph Composer or Adobe Paragraph Composer to let InDesign compose
paragraphs automatically. If a paragraph isn’t composed the way you’d like, choose Adobe Japanese Single-line
Composer or Adobe Single-line Composer from the Paragraph panel menu or Control panel menu and adjust selected
lines individually.

Control paragraph breaks using Keep Options
You can specify how many lines of the following paragraph remain with the current paragraph as it moves between
frames—a convenient way to ensure that headings don’t become isolated from the body text they introduce. InDesign
can highlight the paragraphs that sometimes break in violation of your settings.
You may not want to use Keep Options if your document does not require your columns to share the same last baseline.
To highlight paragraphs that violate Keep Options, choose Edit > Preferences > Composition (Windows) or InCopy >
Preferences > Composition (Mac OS), select Keep Violations, and click OK.
1 Select the paragraph or paragraphs you want to affect.
2 Choose Keep Options in the Paragraph panel menu or Control panel menu. (You can also change keep options when

creating or editing a paragraph style.)
3 Choose Keep Options in the Paragraph panel menu. (You can also change keep options when creating or editing a

paragraph style.)
4 Select any of these options and then click OK:

• Select Keep With Previous to keep the first line of the current paragraph with the last line of the previous
paragraph.
• For Keep With Next _ Lines, specify the number of lines (up to five) of the subsequent paragraph that the last
line of the current paragraph stays with. This option is especially useful for making sure that a heading stays with
the next few lines of the paragraph that follows it.
• Select the Keep Lines Together option and select All Lines In Paragraph to prevent the paragraph from breaking.
• Select the Keep Lines Together option, select At Start/End Of Paragraph, and specify the number of lines that
must appear at the beginning or ending of the paragraph to prevent orphans and widows.
• For Start Paragraph, choose an option to force InDesign to push the paragraph to the next column, frame, or
page. If Anywhere is selected, the start position is determined by the Keep Line Settings option. For other
options, they will be forced to start from these positions.
When you create paragraph styles for headings, use the Keep Options panel to make sure that your headings remain
with the paragraph that follows them.

Create hanging punctuation
The Optical Margin Alignment function is for Roman text. For more information on hanging of punctuation marks in
CJK text, see Apply kinsoku hanging.
Punctuation marks and letters such as “W” can make the left or right edges of a column appear to be misaligned.
Optical Margin Alignment controls whether punctuation marks (such as periods, commas, quotation marks, and
dashes) and edges of letters (such as W and A) hang outside the text margins, so that the type looks aligned.

Last updated 6/13/2015

323
Typography

1 Select a text frame, or click anywhere in the story.
2 Choose Type > Story.
3 Select Optical Margin Alignment.
4 Select a font size to set the appropriate amount of overhang for the size of type in your story. For optimal results, use

the same size as the text.
To turn off Optical Margin Alignment for an individual paragraph, choose Ignore Optical Margin from the Paragraph
panel menu or Control panel menu.

More Help topics
Add paragraph and character styles
Drop caps and nested styles
Apply a character style to a drop cap
Add column, frame, and page breaks

Formatting text
Format text
Use the Control panel to change the appearance of text. When text is selected or when the insertion point is placed in
text, the Control panel displays either the character formatting controls or the paragraph formatting controls, or a
combination of both, depending on your monitor resolution. These same text formatting controls appear in the
Character panel and Paragraph panel. You can also use the Character panel and Paragraphs panel to change the
appearance of text.
For a video tutorial on formatting characters, see www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4275_id. For a video tutorial on formatting
paragraphs, see www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4276_id.
Use the Character panel and Paragraphs panel to change the appearance of text. In InDesign, you can also use the
Control panel to format text. The Control panel is not available in InCopy.
Note the following methods of formatting text:

• To format characters, you can use the Type tool
to select characters, or you can click to place the insertion point,
select a formatting option, and then begin typing.
• To format paragraphs, you don’t need to select an entire paragraph—selecting any word or character, or placing the
insertion point in a paragraph will do. You can also select text in a range of paragraphs.

Last updated 6/13/2015

324
Typography

• To set the formatting for all future text frames that you’ll create in the current document, make sure that the
insertion point is not active and that nothing is selected, and then specify text formatting options. To set default text
formatting for all new documents, close all documents, and then specify the text settings. See Set defaults.
• Select a frame to apply formatting to all text inside it. The frame cannot be part of a thread.
• Use paragraph styles and character styles to format text quickly and consistently.
For a video tutorial on working with text, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0075.
1 Select the Type tool

2 Select the Type tool

or Vertical Type tool

3 Click to place an insertion point, or select the text that you want to format.
4 In the Control panel, click the Character Formatting Control icon

or the Paragraph Formatting Control icon

A Character formatting controls B Paragraph formatting controls

5 In the Control panel, click the Character Formatting Control icon

or the Paragraph Formatting Control icon

A Character formatting controls B Paragraph formatting controls

6 Choose Type > Paragraph or Type > Character to display the Paragraph or Character panel.
7 Specify formatting options.

Text formatting precedence
To format text with attributes such as font style and text direction, you can use several different methods. For example,
you can use the Control panel, frame grid options, or named grids or text styles. If you use more than one method and
attributes conflict with each other, InDesign must choose which attribute to use. The order of precedence is as follows:
1 Character attribute overrides
2 Character style
3 Paragraph attribute overrides
4 Paragraph style
5 CJK grid attributes (either from a named grid or from Frame Grid Options dialog box)
6 Application default (root paragraph style)

For example, if you specify one font size in the Frame Grid Options dialog box and a different font size in a character
style, the font size from character style is used. Similarly, if you include both a paragraph style and a named grid in an
object style, the paragraph style takes precedence over the named grid.

Last updated 6/13/2015

325
Typography

Format a frame grid
When you select a frame grid, options for formatting the grid are displayed in the Control panel.
1 Using a selection tool, select a frame grid.
2 Select any options in the Control panel.

A Reference point B X Location C Y Location D Width E Height F Vertical scaling G Horizontal scaling H Character aki I Line aki J Grid
format name K Grid view L Font size M Frame grid characters per line N Number of lines O Number of columns P Column gutter

Copy type attributes (Eyedropper)
You can use the Eyedropper tool to copy type attributes such as character, paragraph, fill, and stroke settings, and then
apply those attributes to other type. By default, the Eyedropper tool copies all type attributes. To customize the
attributes you want to copy with the Eyedropper tool, use the Eyedropper Options dialog box.
The Eyedropper tool is available only in Layout View.

Copy type attributes to unselected text
1 With the Eyedropper tool

, click the text that is formatted with the attributes you want to copy. (The text can be
in another open document.) The eyedropper pointer reverses direction, and appears full
, to indicate that it’s
loaded with the attributes you copied. When you position the eyedropper pointer over text, an I-beam appears next
.
to the loaded eyedropper

2 With the Eyedropper tool, select the text you want to change.

The selected text takes on the attributes loaded in the eyedropper. As long as the Eyedropper tool is selected, you
can continue to select text to apply formatting.
3 To deselect the Eyedropper tool, click another tool.

To clear the formatting attributes currently held by the eyedropper tool, press Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) while
the Eyedropper tool is loaded. The Eyedropper tool reverses direction and appears empty
, to indicate that it’s ready
to pick up new attributes. Click an object containing the attributes you want to copy, and then drop the new attributes on
another object.

If you use the Eyedropper tool to copy a paragraph style from text in one document to text in another, and the
paragraph style has the same name but different sets of attributes, any style differences will appear as local overrides to
the destination style.

Last updated 6/13/2015

326
Typography

Copy type attributes to selected text
1 With the Type tool

or Path Type tool

, select the text to which you want to copy attributes.

2 Using the Eyedropper tool

, click the text from which you want to copy attributes. (The text from which you
want to copy attributes must be in the same InDesign document as the text you want to change.) The Eyedropper
, to indicate that it’s loaded with the attributes you copied. The attributes
tool reverses direction and appears full
are applied to the text you selected in step 1.

Change which text attributes the Eyedropper tool copies
1 In the toolbox, double-click the Eyedropper tool.
2 Choose Character Settings or Paragraph Settings in the Eyedropper Options dialog box.
3 Select the attributes you want to copy with the Eyedropper tool, and then click OK.

To copy or apply paragraph attributes only without having to change settings in the Eyedropper Options dialog box,
hold down Shift as you click text with the Eyedropper tool.

Use Quick Apply
Use Quick Apply to find and apply styles, menu commands, scripts, variables, and most other commands that can be
found in the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box.
1 Select the text or frame to which you want to apply the style, menu command, script, or variable.
2 Choose Edit > Quick Apply, or press Ctrl+Enter (Windows) or Command+Return (Mac OS).
3 Start typing the name of the item you want to apply.

The name you type doesn’t need to be an exact match. For example, typing he will locate styles such as Head 1, Head
2, and Subhead, as well as Help menu commands such as Help Menu > InDesign Help.

You can narrow the search to only a single category by typing the appropriate prefix at the beginning of the search,
such as m: for menu or p: for paragraph styles. To view a list of prefixes, click the down arrow to the left of the Quick
Apply text box. You can deselect categories in this list that you don’t want to appear.

Last updated 6/13/2015

327
Typography

4 Select the item you want to apply, and then:

• To apply a style, menu command, or variable, press Enter or Return.
• To apply a paragraph style and remove overrides, press Alt+Enter (Windows) or Option+Return (Mac OS).
• To apply a paragraph style and remove overrides and character styles, press Alt+Shift+Enter (Windows) or
Option+Shift+Return (Mac OS).
• To apply an item without closing the Quick Apply list, press Shift+Enter (Windows) or Shift+Return (Mac OS).
• To close the Quick Apply list without applying an item, press Esc or click anywhere else in the document window.
• To edit a style, press Ctrl+Enter (Windows) or Command+Return (Mac OS).
When the Quick Apply list is displayed, press the left and right arrow keys to scroll through the edit field; press the up
and down arrow keys to scroll through the list of items.

More Help topics
Working with Text video
Control panel overview
Apply colors using the Eyedropper tool

Last updated 6/13/2015

328

Chapter 9: Tables

Selecting and editing tables
Select table cells, rows, and columns
When you select part or all of the text in a cell, that selection has the same appearance as would text selected outside a
table. However, if the selection spans more than one cell, the cells and their contents are both selected.
If a table spans more than one frame, holding the mouse pointer over any header or footer row that is not the first
header or footer row causes a lock icon to appear, indicating that you cannot select text or cells in that row. To select
cells in a header or footer row, go to the beginning of the table.

Select cells
❖ Using the Type tool

, do any of the following:

• To select a single cell, click inside a cell, or select text, and then choose Table > Select > Cell.
• To select multiple cells, drag across a cell border. Be careful not to drag the column or row line so that you don’t
resize the table.
To switch between selecting all of the text in a cell and selecting the cell, press Esc.

Select entire columns or rows
❖ Using the Type tool

, do any of the following:

• Click inside a cell, or select text, and then choose Table > Select > Column or Row.
• Move the pointer over the top edge of a column or the left edge of a row so that the pointer becomes an arrow
shape ( or ), and then click to select the entire column or row.

Select all header, body, or footer rows
1 Click inside a table, or select text.
2 Choose Table > Select > Header Rows, Body Rows, or Footer Rows.

Last updated 6/13/2015

329
Tables

Select the entire table
❖ Using the Type tool

, do any of the following:

• Click inside a table, or select text, and then choose Table > Select > Table.
• Move the pointer over the upper left corner of the table so that the pointer becomes an arrow shape
click to select the entire table.

, and then

• Drag the Type tool across the entire table.
You can also select a table in the same way you select an anchored graphic—place the insertion point immediately before
or after a table, and then hold down Shift while pressing the Right Arrow key or Left Arrow key, respectively, to select
the table.

Insert rows and columns
You can insert rows and columns using a number of different methods.

Insert a row
1 Place the insertion point in a row below or above where you want the new row to appear.
2 Choose Table > Insert > Row.
3 Specify the number of rows you want.
4 Specify whether the new row or rows should appear before or after the current row, and then click OK.

The new cells have the same formatting as the text in the row in which the insertion point was placed.
You can also create a new row by pressing Tab when the insertion point is in the last cell.

Insert a column
1 Place the insertion point in a column next to where you want the new column to appear.
2 Choose Table > Insert > Column.
3 Specify the number of columns you want.
4 Specify whether the new column or columns should appear before or after the current column, and then click OK.

The new cells have the same formatting as the text in the column in which the insertion point was placed.

Insert multiple rows and columns
1 With the insertion point in a cell, choose Table > Table Options > Table Setup.
2 Specify a different number of rows and columns, and then click OK.

New rows are added to the bottom of the table; new columns are added to the right side of the table.
You can also change the number of rows and columns using the Table panel. To display the Table panel, choose Window
> Type & Tables > Table.

Last updated 6/13/2015

330
Tables

Insert a row or column by dragging
When adding columns, if you drag more than one and one-half times the width of the column being dragged, new
columns are added that have the same width as the original column. If you drag to insert only one column, that column
can have a narrower or wider width than the column from where you dragged. The same behavior is true of rows, unless
the Row Height for the row being dragged is set to At Least. In this case, if you drag to create only one row, InDesign
will resize the new row, if necessary, so that it’s tall enough to contain text.
1 Position the Type tool

over the border of a column or row so that a double-arrow icon (

or ) appears.

2 Hold down the mouse button, and then hold down Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) while dragging down to

create a new row, or to the right to create a new column. (If you press Alt or Option before holding down the mouse
button, the Hand tool appears—so make sure you begin dragging before you press Alt or Option.)
Note: Dragging to insert rows or columns doesn’t work at the top or left edges of a table. These fields are used to select rows
or columns.
Note: Dragging to insert rows or columns doesn’t work at the top or left edges of a table in horizontal tables, or at the top
or right edges of a table in vertical tables. These fields are used to select rows or columns.

Delete rows, columns, or tables
• To delete a row, column, or table, place the insertion point inside the table, or select text in the table, and then choose
Table > Delete > Row, Column, or Table.
• To delete rows and columns by using the Table Options dialog box, choose Table > Table Options > Table Setup.
Specify a different number of rows and columns, and then click OK. Rows are deleted from the bottom of the table;
columns are deleted from the right side of the table.
Note: In a vertical table, rows are deleted from the left side of the table; columns are deleted from the bottom of the table.

• To delete a row or column by using the mouse, position the pointer over the border of the bottom or right side of
or ) appears; hold down the mouse button; and then hold down Alt
the table so that a double-arrow icon (
(Windows) or Option (Mac OS) while dragging either up to delete rows, or to the left to delete columns.
Note: If you press Alt or Option before holding down the mouse button, the Hand tool will appear—so press Alt or Option
after you begin dragging.

• To delete cell contents without deleting cells, select the cells containing the text you want to delete, or use the Type
to select the text within the cells. Press Backspace or Delete, or choose Edit > Clear.
tool

Change the alignment of a table within a frame
A table assumes the width of the paragraph or table cell in which it is created. However, you can change the size of the
text frame or table so that the table is wider or narrower than the frame. In such a case, you can decide where you want
the table to be aligned within the frame.
1 Place the insertion point to the right or left of the table. Make sure that the text insertion point is placed on the table

paragraph and not inside the table. The insertion point becomes as tall as the table in the frame.
2 Click an alignment button (such as Align Center) in the Paragraph panel or Control panel.

Navigate within a table
Use the Tab or arrow keys to move within a table. You can also jump to a specific row, especially useful in long tables.

Last updated 6/13/2015

331
Tables

Move within a table using Tab
• Press Tab to move to the next cell. If you press Tab in the last table cell, a new row is created. For information on
inserting tabs and indents in a table, see Format text within a table.
• Press Shift+Tab to move to the previous cell. If you press Shift+Tab in the first table cell, the insertion point moves
to the last table cell.
The first cell, last cell, previous cell, and next cell differ depending on the writing direction of the story. For horizontal
writing, the first cell is in the upper left corner, the last cell is in the lower right, the previous cell is the cell to the left (the
previous cell of a cell on the left edge is the rightmost cell on the row above), and the next cell is the cell to the right (the next
cell of a cell on the right edge is the leftmost cell on the row below). For vertical writing, the first cell is in the upper right
corner, the last cell is in the lower left, the previous cell is the cell above (the previous cell of a cell on the upper edge is the
bottom cell of the row on the right), and the next cell is the cell below (the next cell of a cell on the lower edge is the top cell
of the row on the left).

Move within a table using arrow keys
1 Press the arrow keys to navigate within and between table cells. If you press the Right Arrow key when the insertion

point is at the end of the last cell in a row, the insertion point moves to the beginning of the first cell in the same row.
Similarly, if you press the Down Arrow key when the insertion point is at the end of the last cell in a column, the
insertion point moves to the beginning of the first cell in the same column.
2 If you press the Down Arrow key when the insertion point is at the end of the last cell in a row in a vertical table, the

insertion point moves to the beginning of the first cell in the same row. Similarly, if you press the Left Arrow key
when the insertion point is at the end of the last cell in a column in a vertical table, the insertion point moves to the
beginning of the first cell in the same column.

Jump to a specific row in a table
1 Choose Table > Go To Row.
2 Do any of the following:

• Specify the row number you want to jump to, and then click OK.
• If a header or footer row is defined in the current table, choose Header or Footer from the menu, and then click
OK.

Cut, copy, and paste table contents
When text is selected within a cell, cutting, copying, and pasting actions are the same as for text selected outside a table.
You can also cut, copy, and paste cells and their contents. If the insertion point is in a table when you paste, multiple
pasted cells appear as a table within a table. You can also move or copy the entire table.
1 Select the cells you want to cut or copy, and then choose Edit > Cut or Copy.
2 Do any of the following:

• To embed a table within a table, place the insertion point in the cell where you want the table to appear, and then
choose Edit > Paste.
• To replace existing cells, select one or more cells in the table—making sure that there are sufficient cells below
and to the right of the selected cell—and then choose Edit > Paste.

Move or copy a table
1 To select the entire table, place the insertion point in the table and choose Table > Select > Table.

Last updated 6/13/2015

332
Tables

2 Choose Edit > Cut or Copy, move the insertion point where you want the table to appear, and then choose Edit >

Paste.

Convert tables to text
1 Using the Type tool

, place the insertion point inside the table, or select text in the table.

2 Choose Table > Convert Table To Text.
3 For both Column Separator and Row Separator, specify the separators you want to use.

For best results, use a different separator for columns and rows, such as tabs for columns and paragraphs for rows.
4 Click OK.

When you convert a table to text, the table lines are removed and the separator you specify is inserted at the end of each
row and column.

Combine tables
Use the Paste command to merge two or more tables into a single table.
1 In the target table, insert at least as many blank rows as you’ll be pasting from the other tables. (If you insert fewer

rows than are copied, you cannot paste.)
2 In the source table, select the cells you want to copy. (If you copy more column cells than are available in the target

table, you cannot paste.)
3 Select at least one cell where you want the incoming rows to be inserted, and then choose Edit > Paste.

If the pasted rows use different formatting than the rest of the table, define one or more cell styles, and then apply the
cell styles to the pasted cells. Hold down Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) while clicking the cell style to override
existing formatting.
Anne-Marie Concepcion provides an article about combining tables at Joining Tables.

Working with tables in Story Editor
When you choose Edit > Edit In Story Editor, tables and their contents appear in Story Editor. You can edit tables in
Story Editor.

Last updated 6/13/2015

333
Tables

A Table icon B Overset graphic

• To expand or collapse the table in Story Editor, click the triangle to the left of the table icon at the top of the table.
• To determine whether the table is sorted by rows or columns, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Mac OS) the table
icon and choose Arrange By Rows or Arrange By Columns.
• Use Layout view to modify and format the table. You cannot select columns or rows in Story Editor.

Working with tables in Galley/Story view
When you’re working in Galley or Story view, you can edit tables and their contents.

Last updated 6/13/2015

334
Tables

• To expand or collapse the table in Galley or Story view, click the triangle to the left of the table icon at the top of the
table.
• To determine whether the table is sorted by rows or columns, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Mac OS) the table
icon and choose Arrange By Rows or Arrange By Columns.
• Use Layout view to modify and format the table. You cannot select columns or rows in Galley or Story view.

More Help topics
Keys for tables
Keys for tables
Resize columns, rows, and tables
Keys for tables
Keys for tables
Table and cell styles

Table and cell styles

Last updated 6/13/2015

335
Tables

About table and cell styles
Just as you use text styles to format text, you can use table and cell styles to format tables. A table style is a collection of
table formatting attributes, such as table borders and row and column strokes, that can be applied in a single step. A cell
style includes formatting such as cell insets, paragraph styles, and strokes and fills. When you edit a style, all tables or
cells to which the style is applied are updated automatically.
Note: There is one important difference between text styles and table styles. While all character styles attributes can be part
of a paragraph style, cell style attributes are not part of the table style. For example, you cannot use a table style to change
the border color of interior cells. Instead, create a cell style and include it in the table style.
[Basic Table] and [None] styles
By default, each new document contains a [Basic Table] style that can be applied to tables you create and a [None] style
that can be used to remove cell styles applied to cells. You can edit the [Basic Table] style, but you can’t rename or delete
either [Basic Table] or [None].
Using cell styles in table styles
When you create a table style, you can specify which cell styles are applied to different regions of the table: header and
footer rows, left and right columns, and body rows. For example, for the header row, you can assign a cell style that
applies a paragraph style, and for the left and right columns, you can assign different cell styles that apply shaded
backgrounds.

A Header row formatted with cell style that includes paragraph style B Left column C Body cells D Right column

Cell style attributes
Cell styles do not necessarily include all the formatting attributes of a selected cell. When you create a cell style, you can
determine which attributes are included. That way, applying the cell style changes only the desired attributes, such as
cell fill color, and ignores all other cell attributes.
Formatting precedence in styles
If a conflict occurs in formatting applied to a table cell, the following order of precedence determines which formatting
is used:
Cell style precedence 1. Header/Footer 2. Left column/Right column 3. Body rows. For example, if a cell appears in
both the header and the left column, the formatting from the header cell style is used.
Table style precedence 1. Cell overrides 2. Cell style 3. Cell styles applied from a table style 4. Table overrides 5. Table

styles. For example, if you apply one fill using the Cell Options dialog box and another fill using the cell style, the fill
from the Cell Options dialog box is used.
For a video tutorial on using table styles, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0084.

Last updated 6/13/2015

336
Tables

Table/Cell Styles panels overview
Use the Table Styles panel (Window > Styles >Table Styles) to create and name table styles, and to apply the styles to
existing tables or tables you create or import. Use the Cell Styles panel (Window > Styles > Cell Styles) to create and
name cell styles, and to apply the styles to table cells. Styles are saved with a document and appear in the panel each
time you open that document. You can save table and cell styles in groups for easier management.
When you position the insertion point in a cell or table, any style that is applied is highlighted in either of the panels.
The name of any cell style that is applied through a table style appears in the lower left corner of the Cell Styles area. If
you select a range of cells that contains multiple styles, no style is highlighted and the Cell Styles panel displays
“(Mixed).”

Open the Table Styles or Cell Styles panel
❖ Choose Window > Styles, and choose Table Styles or Cell Styles.

Change how styles are listed in the panel
• Select Small Panel Rows to display a condensed version of the styles.
• Drag the style to a different position. You can also drag styles to groups that you create.
• Choose Sort By Name from the panel menu to list the styles alphabetically.

Define table and cell styles
If you work with a standalone story, you can define, modify, and apply table and cell styles in InCopy. If the styles you
want exist in another InCopy document, you can import those styles into the current document. You cannot import
table or cell styles from an InDesign document.
For a video tutorial on using table styles, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0084.
1 If you want to base a new style on the formatting of an existing table or cell, place the insertion point in a cell.
2 If desired, define a paragraph style for the cell style.
3 Choose Window > Styles >Table Styles to open the Table Style panel, or choose Window > Styles > Cell Styles to

open the Cell Styles panel.
4 Choose New Table Style from the Table Styles panel menu, or choose New Cell Style from the Cell Styles panel menu.
5 For Style Name, type a name.
6 For Based On, select which style the current style is based on.
7 To define a style shortcut, position the insertion point in the Shortcut text box and make sure that Num Lock is on.

Then hold down any combination of Shift, Alt, or Ctrl (Windows) or Shift, Option, and Command (Mac OS), and
press a number on the numeric keypad. You cannot use letters or non-keypad numbers for defining style shortcuts.
8 To specify the formatting attributes, click a category on the left and specify the attributes you want. For example, to

assign a paragraph style to a cell style, click the General category, and then choose the paragraph style from the
Paragraph Style menu.
For cell styles, options that don’t have a setting specified are ignored in the style. If you don’t want a setting to be part
of the style, choose (Ignore) from the setting’s menu, delete the contents of the field, or click a check box until a small
box appears in Windows or a hyphen (-) appears in Mac OS.
9 If you want the new style to appear in a style group you’ve created, drag it to the style group folder.

Last updated 6/13/2015

337
Tables

Load (import) table styles from other documents
You can import table and cell styles from another InDesign document into the active document. During import, you
can determine which styles are loaded and what should occur if a loaded style has the same name as a style in the
current document. You can also import styles from an InCopy document.
You can import table and cell styles from an InDesign or InCopy document into a standalone InCopy document or
InCopy content that is linked to InDesign. You can determine which styles are loaded, and what should occur if a
loaded style has the same name as a style in the current document.
Note: If you import styles into linked content, new styles are added to the InDesign document when the content is updated,
and any style with a name conflict is overridden by the InDesign style with the same name.
1 From the menu of the Cell Styles or Table Styles panel, choose Load Cell Styles, Load Table Styles, or Load Table

And Cell Styles.
2 Double-click the InDesign document containing the styles you want to import.
3 In the Load Styles dialog box, make sure that a check mark appears next to the styles you want to import. If any

cells in the current document that used the old style. The definitions of the incoming and existing styles appear at
the bottom of the Load Styles dialog box so you can compare them.
Auto-Rename Renames the loaded style. For example, if both documents have a style named “Table Style 1,” the

loaded style is renamed “Table Style 1 copy” in the current document.

Apply table and cell styles
Unlike paragraph and character styles, table and cell styles do not share attributes, so applying a table style does not
override cell formatting, and applying a cell style does not override table formatting. By default, applying a cell style
removes formatting applied by any previous cell style, but does not remove local cell formatting. Similarly, applying a
table style removes formatting applied by any previous table style, but does not remove overrides made using the Table
Options dialog box.
In the Styles panel, a plus sign (+) appears next to the current cell or table style if the selected cell or table has additional
formatting that isn’t part of the applied style. Such additional formatting is called an override.
1 Position the insertion point in a table, or select the cells to which you want to apply the style.
2 Do one of the following:

• Click the table or cell style in the Table Styles or Cell Styles panel (chose Window > Styles >Table Styles or Cell
Styles). If the style is in a style group, expand the style group to locate the style.
• Press the shortcut you defined for the style. (Make sure that Num Lock is on.)

Base one table or cell style on another
You can create links between similar table or cell styles by creating a base, or parent, style. When you edit the parent
style, any changed attribute that appears in the child styles will change as well. By default, table styles are based on [No
Table Style], and cell styles are based on [None].
1 Create a new style.
2 In the New Table Style or New Cell Style dialog box, select the parent style in the Based On menu. The new style

becomes the child style.

Last updated 6/13/2015

338
Tables

3 Specify formatting for the new style to distinguish it from the parent style.

Edit table and cell styles
One of the advantages of using styles is that when you change the definition of a style, all of the tables or cells formatted
with that style change to match the new style definition.
Note: If you edit styles in InCopy content that’s linked to an InDesign document, the modifications are overridden when
the linked content is updated.
1 Do one of the following:

• If you don’t want the style to be applied to a selected table or cell, right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac
OS) the style in the Styles panel, and choose Edit [style name].
• In the Styles panel, double-click the style, or select the style and choose Style Options from the Styles panel menu.
Note that this method applies the cell style to any selected cell or the table style to any selected table. If no table
is selected, double-clicking a table style sets it as the default style for any table you create.
2 Adjust settings in the dialog box, and then click OK.

Delete table and cell styles
When you delete a style, you can select a different style to replace it, and you can choose whether to preserve the
formatting.
1 Select the style in the Styles panel.
2 Do one of the following:

• Choose Delete Style from the panel menu.
• Click the Delete icon

at the bottom of the panel, or drag the style to the Delete icon.

• Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac OS) the style, and then choose Delete Style. This method is
especially useful for deleting a style without applying it to the selected cell or table.
3 Select the style to replace it.

If you select [No Table Style] to replace a table style or [None] to replace a cell style, select Preserve Formatting to
keep the formatting of the table or cell to which the style is applied. The table or cell preserves its formatting but is
no longer associated with a style.
4 Click OK.

Redefine table or cell styles based on current formatting
After you apply a style, you can override any of its settings. If you decide you like the changes, you can redefine the style
to retain the new formatting.
Note: If you redefine styles in InCopy content linked to an InDesign document, the modifications are overridden when the
linked content is updated.
1 Place the insertion point in the table or cell that is formatted with the style you want to redefine.
2 Make changes to the table or cell as necessary.
3 Choose Redefine Style from the Styles panel menu.

Last updated 6/13/2015

339
Tables

Note: For cell styles, changes to only those attributes that are part of the cell style will enable the Redefine Style command.
For example, if the cell style includes a red fill and you override a cell to use a blue fill, you can redefine the style based on
that cell. But if you change an attribute that is ignored in the cell style, you can’t redefine the style with that attribute.

Override table and cell styles
After you apply a table or cell style, you can override any of its settings. To override a table style, you can change options
in the Table Options dialog box. To override a cell, you can change options in the Cell Options dialog box or use other
panels to change the stroke or fill. If you select a table or cell that has an override, a plus sign (+) appears next to the
style in the Styles panel.
You can clear table and cell overrides when you apply a style. You can also clear overrides from a table or cell to which
a style has already been applied.
If a style has a plus sign (+) next to it, hover over the style to view a description of the override attributes.

Preserve or remove overrides while applying a table style
• To apply a table style and preserve cell styles but remove overrides, hold down Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac OS)
as you click the style in the Table Styles panel.
• To apply a table style and remove both cell styles and overrides, hold down Alt+Shift (Windows) or Option+Shift
(Mac OS) as you click the style in the Table Styles panel.
Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac OS) the style in the Table Styles panel, and then choose Apply [table style],
Clear Cell Styles to apply a style and clear cell styles.

Remove overrides while applying a cell style
❖ To apply a cell style and remove overrides, hold down Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) as you click the name of

the style in the Cell Styles panel.
Note: Only those attributes that are part of the cell style are considered overrides. For example, if the cell style includes
a red fill and all other attributes are ignored, changing a different cell option is not considered an override.

Clear attributes not defined by a cell style
❖ Choose Clear Attributes Not Defined By Style from the Cell Styles panel menu.

Clear table or cell overrides
1 Select the table or cells containing the overrides.
2 In the Styles panel, click the Clear Overrides In Selection icon

, or choose Clear Overrides from the Styles panel

menu.

Break the link to table or cell styles
When you break the link between tables or cells and the style applied to them, the tables or cells retain their current
formatting. However, future changes to that style won’t affect them.
1 Select the cells to which the style has been applied.
2 Choose Break Link To Style from the Styles panel menu.

Last updated 6/13/2015

340
Tables

More Help topics
Group styles
Table Styles video
Use Quick Apply
Duplicate styles or style groups

Table strokes and fills
About table strokes and fills
You can add strokes and fills to your tables in a number of ways. Use the Table Options dialog box to change the stroke
of the table border, and to add alternating strokes and fills to columns and rows. To change the strokes and fills of
individual cells or header/footer cells, use the Cell Options dialog box, or use the Swatches, Stroke, and Color panels.
By default, the formatting you select using the Table Options dialog box overrides any corresponding formatting
previously applied to table cells. However, if you select the Preserve Local Formatting option in the Table Options dialog
box, the strokes and fills applied to individual cells are not overridden.
If you use the same formatting repeatedly for tables or cells, create and apply table styles or cell styles.

Change the table border
You can change the table border by using either the Table Setup dialog box or the Stroke panel.
1 With the insertion point in a cell, choose Table > Table Options > Table Setup.
2 Under Table Border, specify the desired weight, type, color, tint, and gap settings. (See Table stroke and fill options.)
3 Under Stroke Drawing Order, select the drawing order from the following options:
Best Joins If selected, row strokes will appear to the front at the points where strokes of different colors cross. In

addition, when strokes such as double lines cross, the strokes are joined and the crossing points are connected.
Row Strokes In Front If selected, row strokes appear in front.
Column Strokes In Front If selected, column strokes appear in front.
InDesign 2.0 Compatibility If selected, row strokes appear in front. In addition, when strokes such as double lines
cross, they are joined and the crossing points are connected only at points where strokes cross in a T-shape.

4 If you do not want stroke formatting of individual cells to be overridden, select Preserve Local Formatting.
5 Click OK.

If you remove the stroke and fill from a table, choose View > Extras > Show Frame Edges to display the cell boundaries
of a table.

Add stroke and fill to cells
You can add stroke and fill to cells using the Cell Options dialog box, Stroke panel, or Swatches panel.

Last updated 6/13/2015

341
Tables

Add stroke and fill using Cell Options
You can determine which cell lines are formatted with a stroke or fill by selecting or deselecting lines in the Preview
proxy. If you want to change the appearance of all rows or columns in the table, use an alternating stroke or fill pattern
in which the second pattern is set to 0.
1 Using the Type tool

, place the insertion point in or select the cell or cells in which you want to add a stroke or
fill. To add a stroke or fill to header/footer rows, select the header/footer cells at the beginning of the table.

2 Choose Table > Cell Options > Strokes And Fills.
3 In the proxy preview area, specify which lines will be affected by stroke changes. For example, if you want to add a

heavy stroke to the outside lines but not to the inside lines of the selected cells, click an inside line to deselect it.
(Selected lines are blue; deselected lines are gray.)

In the proxy preview area, double-click any outside line to select the entire outer selection rectangle. Double-click
any inside line to select the inside lines. Triple-click anywhere in the proxy to select or deselect all lines.
4 For Cell Stroke, specify desired weight, type, color, tint, and gap settings. (See Table stroke and fill options.)
5 For Cell Fill, specify desired color and tint settings.
6 Select Overprint Stroke and Overprint Fill if desired, and then click OK.

Add a stroke to cells using the Stroke panel
The Stroke panel is available in InDesign, not InCopy.
1 Select the cell or cells you want to affect. To apply a stroke to header or footer cells, select the header or footer row.
2 Choose Window > Stroke to display the Stroke panel.
3 In the proxy preview area, specify which lines will be affected by stroke changes.
4 In the Tools panel, make sure the Object button

is selected. (If the Text button is selected, the stroke changes

will affect the text, not the cells.)
5 Specify a weight value and stroke type.

Add a fill to cells using the Swatches panel
1 Select the cell or cells you want to affect. To apply a fill to header or footer cells, select the header or footer row.
2 Choose Window > Color > Swatches to display the Swatches panel.
3 Make sure the Object button

is selected. (If the Text button is selected, the color changes will affect the text, not

the cells.)
4 Select a swatch.

Add a gradient to cells using the Gradient panel
1 Select the cells you want to affect. To apply a gradient to header or footer cells, select the header or footer row.
2 Choose Window > Color > Gradient to display the Gradient panel.

Last updated 6/13/2015

342
Tables

3 Click in the Gradient Ramp to apply a gradient to the selected cells. Adjust the gradient settings as necessary.

Add diagonal lines to a cell
1 Using the Type tool

, place the insertion point in or select the cell or cells in which you want to add diagonal

lines.
2 Choose Table > Cell Options > Diagonal Lines.
3 Click the button for the type of diagonal line you want to add.
4 Under Line Stroke, specify desired weight, type, color, and gap settings; specify a Tint percentage and Overprint

options.
5 From the Draw menu, choose Diagonal In Front to place the diagonal line in front of the cell contents; choose

Content In Front to place the diagonal line behind the cell contents, and then click OK.

Table stroke and fill options
When selecting strokes and fills for the table or cells, use the following options:
Weight Specifies the line thickness for the table or cell border.
Type Specifies the line style, such as Thick - Thin.
Color Specifies the color of the table or cell border. The choices listed are those available in the Swatches panel.
Tint Specifies the percentage of ink of the specified color to be applied to the stroke or fill.
Gap Color Applies a color to the areas between the dashes, dots, or lines. This option is not available if Solid is selected

for Type.
Gap Tint Applies tint to the areas between the dashes, dots, or lines. This option is not available if Solid is selected for

Type.
Overprint When selected, causes the ink specified in the Color drop-down list to be applied over any underlying colors,

rather than knocking out those inks.

Alternate strokes and fills in a table
You can alternate strokes and fills to enhance readability or improve the appearance of your table. Alternating strokes
and fills in table rows does not affect header and footer rows. However, alternating strokes and fills in columns does
affect header and footer rows.
Alternating stroke and fill settings override cell stroke formatting, unless you select the Preserve Local Formatting
option in the Table Options dialog box.
If you want to apply a fill or stroke to every body cell in the table, and not just alternating patterns, you can still use the
alternating stroke and fill settings to create such non-alternating patterns. To create such an effect, specify 0 for Next in
the second pattern.

Last updated 6/13/2015

343
Tables

Add alternating strokes to a table
1 With the insertion point in a cell, choose Table > Table Options > Alternating Row Strokes or Alternating Column

Strokes.
2 For Alternating Pattern, select the type of pattern you want to use. Select Custom if you want to specify a pattern;

for example, one column with a thick black line followed by three columns with thin yellow lines.
3 Under Alternating, specify the fill options for both the first pattern and the next pattern. For example, you may want

to add a solid stroke to the first column and a Thick - Thin line to the next column, so that they alternate. Specify 0
for Next if you want the strokes to affect every row or column.
Note: In tables that span multiple frames, alternating strokes and fills for rows do not restart at the beginning of
additional frames in the story. (See Break tables across frames.)
4 Select Preserve Local Formatting if you want formatted strokes previously applied to the table to remain in effect.
5 For Skip First and Skip Last, specify the number of rows or columns at the beginning and end of the table in which

you do not want stroke attributes to appear, and then click OK.

Add alternating fills to a table
1 With the insertion point in a cell, choose Table > Table Options > Alternating Fills.
2 For Alternating Pattern, select the type of pattern you want to use. Select Custom if you want to specify a pattern,

such as one row shaded in gray followed by three rows shaded in yellow.
3 Under Alternating, specify the fill options for both the first pattern and the subsequent pattern. For example, if you

selected Every Second Column for Alternating Pattern, you may want to shade the first two columns in a gray tint
and leave the next two columns blank. Specify 0 for Next if you want the fill to apply to every row.
4 Select Preserve Local Formatting if you want previously formatted fills applied to the table to remain in effect.
5 For Skip First and Skip Last, specify the number of rows or columns at the beginning and end of the table in which

you do not want fill attributes to appear, and then click OK.

Turn off alternating strokes and fills in a table
1 Place the insertion point in the table.
2 Choose Table > Table Options > Alternating Row Strokes, Alternating Column Strokes, or Alternating Fills.
3 For Alternating Pattern, choose None, and then click OK.

Adobe InCopy In Copy CC (2015) Help 2015 En

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation